CELL-DYN Ruby System Service Manual
Version 201958-114
Document Control Number 201959-114 (Front Matter)
©2006, 2015 by Abbott Laboratories. All rights reserved.
Revision Log
Click to view Chapter 4 Removal and Replacement and Chapter 5 Verification Procedure Revision History.
All other Revision History is located in the table below:
VERSION
DATE
SECTIONS REVISED/ADDED
TSBs INCORPORATED ISAs INCORPORATED
Revision 201958-114 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-113 November 2013 Revision 201958-113 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-112 August 2013
Revision 201958-112 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-111 July 2012
Revision 201958-111 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-110 March 2011
Revision 201958-110 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-109 November 2010 Revision 201958-109 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-114 March 2015
201958-108 July 2010
Revision 201958-108 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-107 October 2009
Revision 201958-107 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-106 June 2009
Revision 201958-106 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-105 November 2008 Revision 201958-105 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-104 July 2008
Revision 201958-104 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-103 March 2008
Revision 201958-103 Change Listing N/A
N/A
201958-102 February 2007
Revision 201958-102 Change Listing N/A
170-004
201958-101 April 2006
New Document
N/A
N/A
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Proprietary Information
(Document Control Number 204679-103)
The information, documents and related graphics published herein (the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories.
Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that:
The copyright notice appears on all copies;
Use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by Abbott trained personnel or informational use only;
The Information is not modified in any way; and
No graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and
may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or
modifications to the Information at any time without any prior notification.
Qualifications:
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for information and illustration purposes only and shall not be
used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts and screens do not reflect actual patient
names or test results.
The information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories-trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or
experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision and with cooperation from Abbott
Laboratories technical support or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or
arising from the use of the information by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to
those persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision
and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any user of the Information should make any oral, written
or electronic response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions, comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such
response and any information submitted therewith shall be considered non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to
reproduce, publish or otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever including, without limitation, the research,
development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such information. The sender of any information to
Abbott is fully responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and its non-infringement of any other
person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or services.
Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the
most current information.
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates.
No use of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name may be made without the prior written authorization of
Abbott Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names,
and trade names are the property of their respective companies. All rights reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other
proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT
TO THE INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
This CELL- DYN Ruby System Service Manual is published by Abbott Diagnostics, a division of Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park,
IL 60064, U.S.A.
Please direct all inquiries concerning information in this manual to the foregoing address.
CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-111) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-102 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-101 to Version 201958-102 of this manual.
Section
Numbers
Sections
Revised/Added
Revision
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-102"
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-102"
Front
1
1.2
Proprietary
Information
Change Copyright date
General Data
Change to "Document Control Number - 201960-102"
Theory of
Operation
HGB Measurement changed 540 nm wavelength to 555 nm wavelength in two places
1.2
Changed graphic 9H_6016a to 9H_6016b
2
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number - 201961-102"
2.1
Block Diagrams
Changed 9H_9048.PDF
2.4
Deleted section and made a PLACEHOLDER
4
Removal &
Replacement
Change to "Document Control Number - 201962-102"
4
B1.02
Added new Part Numbers and Names
4
B1.02
Added new Note and updated graphic 9H_8038a to 9H_8038b
4
B1.03
Added new Part Number
4
B1.03
Added new Note to Replacement action
4
E1.01
Changed steps and added new Note to Replacement action
4
F1.04
Deleted Part Name
5
Verification
Procedures
Change to "Document Control Number - 201963-102"
5.1
Verification
Procedures
Updated Verification Procedure and Verification Matrix tables
5
VP-16
Updated Note and graphic 9H_6010a to 9H_6010b
5
VP-17
Deleted procedure and made a PLACEHOLDER
5
VP-18
Updated text in procedure
5
VP-19
Added text in step in Verify PMT Dynode Voltage
5
VP-31
Changed psi valves in text of procedure
5
VP-36
Changed Purpose and added Materials to procedure
5
VP-38
Added new VP "Un-installing Installed Version of the Operator's Manual"
5
VP-41
Updated steps in New Application Software Installation area and changed time in Note in
Reload Application Software area
5
VP-45
Added new VP "System Language Change Procedure"
5
VP-46
Added new VP "Installation of Operator's Manual from Media (English and Multilingual
Version)"
5
VP-52
Added new VP "Operating System - User Account Log On Procedure"
5
VP-54
Updated text in Verify Performance Specification action area
5
VP-55
Added new VP "Creating a Windows XP Firewall Exception for the File Transfer Program"
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-102) • Copyright 2006, 2007 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories.
CELL-DYN RUBY is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-103 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-102 to Version 201958-103 of this manual.
Section
Sections
Numbers Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-103"
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-103"
Front
Proprietary
Information
Change Control Number 204679-101
Chap 4
Title
Document Control Number, change to "201962-103"
Chap 4
Locator table
Parts and RR names will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU.
Chap 4
All RR
procedures
Parts and verification information will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU. A note
dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and
replace if necessary.", has been added at the beginning of the RR. An additional verification
procedure, G110, has been added as the final verification of each RR.
Chap 5
Verification
Procedures
Change to "Document Control Number - 201963-103"
Chap 5
All VPs
Two notes dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not
expired and replace if necessary." and "At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify
per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.", have been
added at the beginning of the procedure.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-104 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-103 to Version 201958-104 of this manual.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-104"
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-104"
Chap 2
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number 201961-103"
Chap 2
Troubleshooting
Edited Analyzer Setpoints Reference Chart information.
Chap 5
VP-18
Updated graphic 9h_6012b.
Chap 5
VP-19
Updated graphic 9h_6012b.
Chap 5
VP-20
Updated graphic 9h_6012b.
Chap 5
VP-21
Updated graphic 9h_6012b.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-104) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-105 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-104 to Version 201958-105 of this manual.
Section
Numbers
Sections
Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-105"
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-105"
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number 201961-104"
Chap 2
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9048d Cable Connection Diagram.
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9048d_A.
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9048d_B.
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9054b, Integrated Sample Loader, Sample Processor Flow
Diagram.
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9057b_A.
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9057b_B.
Chap 5
Verification Matrix
Updated text in Hard Disk Drive.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-105) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-106 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-105 to Version 201958-106 of this manual.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-106"
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-106"
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number 201961-105"
Chap 2
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9048e Cable Connection Diagram.
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9048e_B.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-106) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-107 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-106 to Version 201958-107 of this manual.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-107"
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-107"
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number 201961-106"
Chap 2
Chap 2
Updated graphic 9H_9056b Diagnostic Flow System Diagram.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-107) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-108 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-107 to Version 201958-108 of this manual.
Section
Numbers
Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-108"
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-108"
Front
Proprietary Information
Change Manual Revision Number to 204679-102
Proprietary Information
Updated the Trademark information
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number 201961-107"
Analyzer Setpoints Reference
Chart
Deleted Pressure/Vacuum Pump Recover Time Test (at sea level) table.
Optics Bench Offset
Specification
Updated text in Individual Gain Setting, Mean Channel Range and CV
Specification table.
Application Software
Corrected day typo in the Day column of table.
Chap 2
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-108) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-109 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-108 to Version 201958-109 of this manual.
Section
Numbers
Sections
Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-109"
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-109"
General Data
Change to "Document Control Number 201960-103"
Chap 1
Updated two graphics, Sample Staging Flow Diagram 9H_9039b and Sample Delivery
Flow Diagram 9H_9040b.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-109) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-110 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-109 to Version 201958-110 of this manual.
Section
Numbers
Sections
Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to "Document Control Number 201959-110"
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-110"
General Data
Change to "Document Control Number 201960-104"
Chap 1
Update text in Motor Control Subsystem, under Introduction to change ‘AC’ to ‘DC’ and
add ‘and by the PRM’.
Chap 2
Troubleshooting
Change to "Document Control Number 201961-108"
Updated graphic 9H_9055b Vac/Press Supply Flow Diagram.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-110) • © 2006, 2011 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-111 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-110 to Version 201958-111 of this manual.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to Manual Revision Number "201959-111"
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201958-111"
Front
Proprietary Information
Change Document Control Number to 204679-103
Proprietary Information
Updated the Trademark information
Troubleshooting
Changed document control number from "201961-109" to "201961-110".
Troubleshooting
Changes to diagrams 9H_9054c, 9H-9056c, 9H_9057c, 9H_9057c_a, 9H-9058b
RR - B1.02
Updated graphic 9h_8038b.
RR - D1.01
Updated graphic 9h_8061b.
RR - F1.01
Update to Sample Loader Cover removal procedure.
Chap 2
Chap 4
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-111) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-112 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-111 to Version 201958-112 of this manual.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to Manual Revision Number "201958-112"
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201959-112"
Troubleshooting
Changed document control number from "201961-109" to "201961-110"
Troubleshooting
Changes to diagrams
Chap 2
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-112) • © 2006, 2013 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-113 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-112 to Version 201958-113 of this manual.
Section Numbers Sections Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to Manual Revision Number "201958-113"
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201959-113"
Troubleshooting
Changed document control number from "201961-110" to "201961-111"
Troubleshooting
Changes to diagram 9h_9054d
Chap 2
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-113) • © 2006, 2013 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Revision 201958-114 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from Version 201958-113 to Version 201958-114 of this manual.
Section
Numbers
Sections
Revised/Added
Revision
Front
Title
Change to Manual Revision Number "201958-114"
Front
Title
Change to "Front Matter Content Control Number 201959-114"
General Data
Change document control number from "201960-104" to "201960-105."
Chap 1
Change title and content for Warning icons and Descriptions to Safety Symbols and
Classifications.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
General Data
Document Control Number 201960-105
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Safety
Links
Biohazards
Biological Hazards
Chemical Hazards
Electrical Safety
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Hazard Signal Words
Laser Safety
Mechanical Hazards
Physical Hazards
Safety Symbols & Classification
Static Hazard
Hazard Signal Words
Introduction
Operation, maintenance and servicing of CELL-DYN Ruby system may expose individuals to potential safety and health hazards.
All work must be performed in accordance with procedures described in the Abbott Operator's or Service Manuals. This section
describes the types and locations of potential hazards that could cause physical harm to service personnel. Warnings are inserted
throughout this manual to alert service personnel to potential hazards. Standard warning conventions including hazard signal words
(example, Danger) and symbols are described below. These words and symbols are used to indicate physical, mechanical, or
procedural conditions that could result.
Definitions
Hazard signal word definitions are described below.
Signal
Word
DANGER
Definition
Denotes an immediate hazard which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. This signal word
represents the highest level of any hazardous situation.
WARNING Denotes a hazard which could result in moderate to serious personal injury.
Caution
Denotes potential hazards that could result in minor injury. Also used for conditions or activities that could interfere
with proper functioning or performance of the instrument.
Note
Denotes operator or service information.
Safety Symbols & Classification
Safety hazard symbols are used in this manual and on instrument labels to identify potentially dangerous conditions or situations. In
this manual and on some instrument labels, text accompanies the safety symbol to describe the hazard, or symbols may be used
in lieu of text. For other instrument labels, the operator is to refer to the manual for specific information, or you must recognize the
symbols and understand the type and degree of potential hazard.
Symbol
Classification
Symbol
Description
Safety Recommendation
DANGER
Class 3B
Laser
Identifies an
activity or area
where operators
are exposed to
an eye hazard if
procedural or
engineering
control is not
observed
Denotes lasers or laser systems that can produce an eye hazard if
viewed directly. This includes intrabeam viewing of specular reflections.
DANGER
High
Voltage
Identifies high
voltage areas
over 600 volts
and the
possibility of
electrical shock
in noted activity
or at posted
locations in the
power supply.
Prior to servicing power supply assemblies, verify that the system is
powered off and the power cord to the analyzer is disconnected.
WARNING
Chemical
Hazard
Identifies an
activity or an
area where
hazardous
chemicals are
present.
Wear safety glasses, chemical resistant gloves, and a lab coat when
handling the following solutions (Abbott cleaning solutions and various
reagents). These solutions may be potentially harmful. Refer to the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package insert for specific safety
information. In case of contact with the skin or eyes, flush with water at
least 15 minutes. If irritation persists or signs of toxicity occur from
exposure, seek medical attention immediately.
WARNING
Splash/
Spray
Hazard
Identifies an
activity where
fluids may be
under pressure.
Fluids may be under pressure. Follow procedures and wear appropriate
personal protective equipment.
WARNING
Potential
Biohazard
Identifies an
activity or area
where operators
may be exposed
to potentially
infectious
substances
Consider all clinical specimens, reagent controls, surfaces, or
components that contain or have contacted human blood or serum as
potentially infectious. Wear gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses, and
follow other biosafety practices as specified in the OSHA Bloodborne
Pathogen Rule (29 CFR Part 1910.1030) or other equivalent biosafety
procedures.
WARNING
Electrical
Identifies the
possibility of
When the instrument is powered and protective covers are removed,
there are exposed electrical systems that could startle or seriously
Shock
Hazard
electrical shock if
procedural or
engineering
controls are not
observed
injure personnel upon contact. Use appropriate safety precautions to
prevent body and/or tool contact with live electrical components,
especially power supplies. Turn off the power to the instrument and
disconnect the power cord before replacing fuses, printed circuit boards,
(etc.). Replace only the fuses that are externally accessible and labeled.
Only use replacement fuses of the specified type and electrical rating.
Caution
Lifting
Hazard
Identifies an
activity where it
may be required
to lift or move a
heavy object.
The system weighs approximately 230 pounds. Obtain assistance when
moving and/or use appropriate lifting devices.
Caution
Moving
Parts
Identifies an
activity or an
area where
moving parts are
present.
Possible injury may result from allowing part of your body to enter a
range of mechanical movement during instrument operation. Keep all
protective covers in place when instrument is running.
Caution
Identifies an
Consult caution/warning instructions.
activity that may
present a safetyrelated hazard.
Caution
Identifies an
Electrostatic area where
Discharge
electrostatic
discharge may
be present. A
ground strap
must be worn
while servicing
the system.
Indicates that
the material has
Harmful (Xn) or
Irritant (Xi)
properties.
The operator must wear a ground strap while servicing the system.
The labeling of CELL-DYN Ruby System reagents/calibrators/controls or
liquid consumables may include this hazard symbol. The symbols are
used to convey particular properties of the chemical or chemical
mixture, and to notify you that precautions should be taken when
working with the material. Always consult the specific package insert or
Material Safety Data Sheet for further information.
Biohazards
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Biological Hazards
The following activities may involve the presence of biological materials:
Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls
Cleaning spills
Handling and disposing of waste
Moving the System
Performing maintenance procedures
Performing decontamination procedures
Performing component replacement procedures
Precautions
Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, and calibrators that contain human sourced material and instrument surfaces or
components that have come in contact with human sourced material as potentially infectious. No known test method can offer
complete assurance that products derived from human sourced material or instrument components exposed to human sourced
material will not transmit infection. Therefore, all products derived from human sourced materials and instrument components
exposed to human sourced material should be considered potentially infectious. It is recommended that all potentially infectious
materials be handled in accordance with the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Rule (29 CFR Part 1910.1030) or other equivalent
biosafety procedures.
Precautions include, but are not limited to the following:
Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eyewear when handling human sourced material or contaminated instrument
components.
Do not pipet by mouth.
Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses when handling human sourced material or contaminated
instrument components.
Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated instrument components with an appropriate tuberculocidal
disinfectant, such as 0.5% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectant.
Decontaminate and dispose of all specimens, reagents, and other potentially contaminated materials in accordance with
local, state, and federal regulations.
If you are exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious materials you should immediately take the following steps to cleanse
the affected area, and seek medical attention as soon as possible:
Eyes-rinse with water for 15 minutes.
Mouth-rinse with water.
Skin-wash the affected area with soap and water.
Puncture wound-allow to bleed freely. Wash the affected area with soap and water.
Sharps
Probes, needles, aspiration probes are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious materials. Avoid contact with the tips of
these parts.
Handling Spills
Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices. In general, safe work practices for cleaning spills include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves, labcoat, and protective eyewear.
Absorb the spill with absorbent material.
Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.
Wipe the area with an appropriate tuberculocidal disinfectant such as a 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution.
Dispose of spilled and contaminated material in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations.
Instrument or Part Decontamination
Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (protective eyewear, gloves, lab coat) while performing decontamination
activities. Prior to service or maintenance, the instrument should be decontaminated in accordance with the following:
1. Remove and dispose of contaminated disposables in a regulated medical waste container.
2. Clean and decontaminate the exterior of the instrument using a detergent solution followed by a 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution or other tuberculocidal disinfectant. Flush the fluid pathway as specified in the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator's
Manual. For information on preparing the proper concentration of sodium hypochlorite solution, refer to VP-14
Decontamination.
Caution
Under normal circumstances, printed circuit boards do not require decontamination. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
enclosed inside the skins of computer and peripheral equipment are not considered to be contaminated.
Decontamination may affect the performance of a printed circuit board or internal computer component.
Handling Waste
Dispose of all potentially infectious materials (clinical specimens reagents, controls, calibrators, standards, cuvettes, liquid
consumables, and contaminated gloves, wipes, swabs, and other disposables that may be contaminated) in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
Sharps, such as probes, needles, broken glass, slides and other sharps that are contaminated with potentially infectious
substances, should be placed in an appropriately labeled, puncture resistant and leak proof container before treatment and
disposal.
Electrical Safety
The CELL-DYN Ruby System does not pose uncommon electrical hazards to Operators if it is installed and operated without
alteration, and is connected to a power source that meets required specifications. Refer to Pre-Site Specification & Checklist for
details.
Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of any system. Only qualified field service personnel should
perform electrical servicing. Elements of electrical safety include, but are not limited to the following:
Periodically inspect electrical cabling into and on the system for signs of wear and damage.
Turn the instrument OFF before disconnecting the power cord and before cleaning, servicing, or performing maintenance on
any electrical or internal component.
In the event of a blown fuse or thrown circuit breaker, determine the cause and correct the problem before attempting to
resume operation of the equipment. Replace only the fuses that are externally accessible and labeled. Only use replacement
fuses of the specified type and electrical rating.
Assure the power to the instrument is turned OFF. A high voltage charge may remain on the power supply with the power
OFF. Use an electrically insulated tool to disconnect the power supply and short (both male pins) to the instrument chassis.
Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or communication components. Unplug the instrument before clean-up of
major liquid spills. Clean spilled fluids immediately.
Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands.
Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the system.
Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as those supplied with the instrument, to protect against
electric shock. Connect power cords only to properly grounded outlets.
It is recommended that a ground fault circuit interrupter be used when working in a wet environment.
Laser Safety
DANGER
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
The CELL-DYN Ruby is a Class 1 laser product.
Do not look directly into the laser beam, aperture, or any reflection of the beam from a mirror-like surface. Do not place any optics
into the beam, or remove the protective covers, or bypass the interlocks. Do not use controls or adjustments, or perform
procedures other than those specified. Do not remove, damage, or obliterate the laser warning labels. If any label becomes
illegible, replace it. When the access door, or inner protective cover are removed, helium-neon laser power up to 10 mW
continuous wave at 632.8 nm in a beam with a 1 mR divergence could be accessible in the interior of the optics bench. This
amount of energy, with insignificant attenuation with distance, is sufficient to cause eye damage.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser
light exposure. If the instrument is used or modified in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided
by the instrument may be impaired.
Laser Caution Labels
The Class 1 Laser Product Label (Abbott PN 9230702) placement is shown below. The label consists of black lettering against a
yellow background. The label is located on the backside of the instrument and positioned at a clearly visible location.
The inner protective cover laser warning labels must not be removed and are to remain legible. The protective housing label
(Abbott PN 9230701) is shown below. The label consists of black lettering against a yellow background. This label appears on the
protective cover (under the top cover) that covers the laser mirrors and on the upper left side of the flow panel.
For beam alignment and other open beam configurations, follow instructions provided by the Service Manual, Advisories, and
Bulletins regarding the requirement for using laser safety eyewear. If required, assure laser eyewear is not damaged and has an
optical density of 1-2 at a wavelength of 632.8 nm. During open beam configurations, assure that the beam is confined to the laser
bench area and only personnel with proper eye protection are present.
Class 1 Laser Product Label (PN 9230702)
Laser Protective Housing Warning Label (PN 9230701)
Under Top Cover Laser Warning Label Location
Flow Panel Laser Warning Label Location
Rear Panel Class 1 Laser Product Label
Mechanical Hazards
The CELL-DYN Ruby System is an automated system that operates under computer control. As with most automated equipment,
there is potential for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical components whenever the instrument is in operation. The
system minimizes mechanical hazards by providing guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components, and
encoding the software with safety features.
Operators of the CELL-DYN Ruby System are potentially exposed to moving mechanical components such as the syringe panel.
Use caution when performing any maintenance procedure on the syringe panel as moving parts can pinch.
Basic elements of mechanical equipment safety include but are not limited to:
Never bypass or override a safety device.
Keep all protective covers and barriers in place.
Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the System.
Never allow any part of your body to enter a range of mechanical movement during System operation.
Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch on the System.
Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the System.
Be especially cautious when performing adjustment, maintenance, cleaning, or repair procedures.
Use caution when loading reagents.
In the event of an instrument malfunction or an unexpected sequence of movements, be aware that unexpected field service
personnel reflex actions could occur, causing injury.
Chemical Hazards
You may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, or liquid consumables. Exposure to
hazardous chemicals is minimized by following instructions provided in the assay-specific Package Inserts and Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS). Exposure levels are further reduced by the design features of the instrument when it is used properly.
Precautions
In general, observe the following precautions when handling chemicals:
Consult Material Safety Data Sheets for safe use instructions and precautions.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious gloves and protective eye wear and
clothing.
Always maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.
If irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure, seek medical attention.
Hazard symbols that may appear on CELL-DYN Ruby System product labeling may be accompanied by Risk (R) and Safety (S)
numbers and represent specific risk and safety phrases as defined by European Community Directives. The risk and safety phrases
describe precautions to be used when working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture. For all (R) and (S) numbers that
appear on product labeling, refer to the corresponding phrases indicated in the Package Insert or similar document.
Physical Hazards
Sharps and Probes
The probe, vent needle, and aspiration probe are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious materials. Avoid contact and
handle cautiously to prevent injury. Never reach into the instrument while it is in operation.
In general, use of sharps and glassware should be minimized. Use mechanical means to remove contaminated broken glassware.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately marked, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container before treatment and disposal.
Heavy objects
The waste container is heavy when full. Use care when handling the container to reduce the risk of injury.
The system is heavy and has unsupported sections of the shell. Ensure that you have adequate help before attempting to move the
system.
Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on unsupported sections of the shell.
Use proper lifting techniques when moving the System.
Trip hazard
The System is equipped with a power cord and various computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure cords in high
traffic areas are properly stowed.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Many of the electronic components on the System circuit boards are susceptible to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Static discharge
of as little as 100 - 200 volts can damage or destroy a component. To put that in perspective, depending on the floor covering,
relative humidity and other factors, walking across a floor generates between 250 - 35,000 electrostatic volts. Attempts to ground
oneself and remove the static charge by grasping the instrument chassis provides only momentary resolution.
Static Hazard
Static protective procedures are used during the manufacture of PC boards. Replacement PC board assemblies are also protected
by use of static protective packaging as well as boxed to prevent physical damage. Assemblies that have failed and are returned
for repair are also handled at the repair shop under static protection procedures.
Handling Guidelines - PC Subassemblies
These guidelines assure protection against failures created by static.
Retain spare PC board subassemblies in the static-protective bags.
Use an approved static-protective field service kit, or the ground strap shipped with the board, whenever a board is removed
from an instrument or protective bag.
Replace the defective PC board in the same protective bag to return for repair.
Continued use of the protective shipping boxes, both during shipping and storage, eliminates most failures caused by physical
damage.
Static Protective Service Kit
The static protective service kit (14207-035) is designed to keep the FSE/FSR, replacement part, work surface, and instrument at
the same ground level. Generally, an instruction set accompanies the kit, however, in the absence of specific instructions, follow
ESD Procedure.
Kit Parts
Static protective work surface
Wrist strap and attaching cable
Grounding clip or cable
ESD Procedure
Note
Use where ESD symbol is present and static protective equipment is not shipped with replacement part.
1. Place the work mat on a solid surface close to the instrument, allow the ground strap to reach the instrument.
2. Attach the ground clip to the instrument chassis.
3. Attach the other end of the ground clip cable and the connector from the wrist strap to the work mat. (Exception: Some wrist
strap cables provide a clip to connect to the same ground source as the mat cable).
4. Attach wrist strap to your wrist, make sure the metallic button on the inside of the wrist strap is in direct contact with your
5.
6.
7.
skin.
Place PC boards, removed from the instrument, on the work mat.
Replacement PC boards should be placed on the work mat before removing from the protective bag and remain on the mat
until installation.
Defective PC boards should be replaced in the static-protective bag before removal from the work mat area.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
System Description
Introduction
This section contains information on assembly locations, mechanical hardware descriptions and functions, fluidic hardware
descriptions and functions, and electronic hardware descriptions and functions.
Descriptions of the CELL-DYN Ruby parameters, reagents, and operation is contained in the Operator's Manual.
System Configuration
Introduction
Refer to CELL-DYN Ruby System. The CELL-DYN Ruby does have an industrial type single board computer build in the analyzer.
The CELL-DYN Ruby personal computer section is divided into three parts: PC Module, Video Display, and Keyboard. The PC
Module resides in the Analyzer as a module, and the Video Display and Keyboard are external to the Analyzer.
The sample processing section of the Analyzer performs the functions of reagent and sample handling and gathers raw cell data
from the HGB Flow Cell and Optics Bench described in Section 1. The PC Module, in conjunction with the Video Display and
Keyboard, perform the final processing of the raw cell data and all the user interface functions, such as display, printing, RS-232
communications, etc.
Analyzer Configuration
Analyzer Front View is a front view of the Analyzer showing the major assemblies. These assemblies perform the functions of
sample, reagent, and waste processing, and is explained in detail later in this section.
The optics bench (flow cytometer) is located on top of the instrument, just behind the flow panel.
Analyzer Left Side View is a left side view showing the air supply.
Analyzer Right Side View is a right side view of the Analyzer, showing the PC module and computer door.
CELL-DYN Ruby System
Analyzer Front View
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
3.1
Analyzer Main 5.1
Right Front
Flow Panel
3.1.10
Optical
Sensor,
Center Cover
5.1.1
Shear Valve
4.1
Left Front
Flow Panel
5.1.2
HGB Heater
4.1.1
Diluent/Sheath 5.1.3
(quiet)
Reservoir 1
WBC Lyse
Reservoir
4.1.2
Diluent/Sheath 5.1.4
(noisy)
Reservoir 2
WC-2
4.1.3
Vent Acc
5.1.5
WC-4
4.1.4
WC-1
5.1.6
Overpressure
Sensor
4.1.5
WC-3
5.1.7
Dual Syringe
Drive (C,D)
4.1.6
Diluent/Sheath 5.1.8
Filter (small)
Dual Syringe
Drive (A,B)
4.1.7
Sample
Staging
Peristaltic
Pump
5.1.9
Drip Tray
4.1.8
RBC/PLT
Mixing
Chamber
5.1.10
RBC/HGB
Diluent Syringe
4.1.9
WBC (WOC)
Chamber
5.1.11
WBC Lyse
Syringe
4.1.10
HGB Flow
Cell
5.1.12
HGB Lyse
Syringe
4.1.11
WOC Heater
5.1.13
Sample
Injection
Syringe
4.1.12
Bubble Trap
5.1.14
Ultrasonic
Short Sample
Sensor (S1)
Sol. 2-1, 2-2, 4-1, 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7,
6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-7, 6-8, 9-1, 9-2, 9-3, 9-4,
9-5, 9-6, 9-7, 9-8
Solenoid
Valve 3.9 kg
White (NO)
5.1.15
Short Sample
Sensor (S2)
Sol. 6-5, 6-6
Solenoid
Valve Black
(NC)
5.1.16
Cover Blood
Sample
Detector
Sol. 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-7, 1-8, 2-4, 2-5,
2-6, 2-7, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 4-2,
4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6
Solenoid Valve
3.9 kg White
(NO)
Sol. 1-5, 2-3, 2-8, 3-4
Solenoid Valve
Black (NC)
Analyzer Left Side View
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
3.1
Analyzer Main
7.1.7
ACC 3
3.1.9
APS
7.1.8
ACC 4
6.1
Optics Bench Assy
7.1.9
ACC 5
7.1
VAC/PRESS Supply/Electronics Assy 7.1.10
SHM 1
7.1.1
PRESS Pump
7.1.11
SHM 2
7.1.2
VAC Pump
7.1.12
Chopper Drive PCB, OTS
7.1.3
VPM
7.1.13
Fan 2
7.1.4
PRM
V1 (7-1), V4 (7-2) Solenoid Valve 5kg Large Black (NO)
7.1.5
ACC 1
V2, V3, V5
7.1.6
ACC 2
Analyzer Right Side View
Solenoid Valve 3.9kg White (NO)
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
8.1
Computer/Electronics Assy
8.1.7
Industrial SBC
8.1.1
ATX CPS
8.1.8
PDM
8.1.2
CD-RW
8.1.9
TCM
8.1.3
FDD
8.1.10
CPU/DCM
8.1.4
HDD
8.1.11
MAM
8.1.5
Backplane PCI/ISA ATX
8.1.12
SPM
8.1.6
HSSL Keyboard Adapter
8.1.13
Fan 3
Analyzer Rear View
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
3.1
Analyzer Main
3.1.6
Diluent/Sheath Inlet
3.1.1
AC IN + Filter
3.1.7
WBC Lyse Inlet
3.1.2
Analyzer Main Switch
3.1.8
Fan Filter
3.1.3
External Waste Full Sensor Connector 3.1.11
Fan 1
3.1.4
External Waste Outlet
Computer/Electronics Assy
3.1.5
HGB Lyse Inlet
8.1
Analyzer Top View
Flow System Functional Description
Introduction
The flow system differs substantially from our other instruments in three ways. The first is that there is no impedance transducer on
the CELL-DYN Ruby, and RBCs and PLTs are both counted and sized by the optical flow cell. The second is that the HGB mixing
chamber is a light-tight enclosure that is also the HGB flow cell. The third is that the initial whole blood sample is aspirated by a
vacuum source and not a sample syringe or pump. The other principles of the flow system are very similar to the CELL-DYN 3700
and CELL-DYN Sapphire.
For the sake of explanation, the flow system is divided into the following distinctly different functions needed to perform the various
flow sequences used on the CELL-DYN Ruby.
Vacuum Flow
Pressure Flow
Reagent Flow
Sample Aspiration Flow
Dilution & Mixing Flow
Sample Staging Flow
Sample Delivery & Measurement Flow
Cleaning & Waste Flow
The following paragraphs describe each of these functions.
Vacuum Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
5
Valve Function
ACC5, VAC 2 (variable) Supply
17
WC-2, VAC 2 Supply
31
WC-4, VAC 1 Supply
45
WBC Lyse Reservoir, VAC 1
61
Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2, VAC 1
62
Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1, VAC 1
97
WC-3, VAC 1
Functional Description
Refer to Vacuum Flow Diagram. There are two vacuum accumulators employed on the CELL-DYN Ruby: ACC 4 holds VAC 1 that
is used to pull fluids into the reagent reservoirs and waste chambers.
ACC 5 holds VAC (variable) and supplies WC-2. The primary purpose of this vacuum is to aspirate the whole blood sample
through the shear valve. It has three (3) levels depending on being in the open (Hematology or Retic) or closed (Hematology)
sample mode. Due to the plumbing configuration, the vacuum level is higher when in the closed mode.
Vacuum Flow Diagram
Pressure Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
2
ACC 2, PRESS 2 Supply
3
ACC 3, PRESS 3 Supply
18
WC-2, PRESS 1 Supply
32
WC-4, PRESS 1
46
WBC Lyse Reservoir, PRESS 3
63
Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1, PRESS 3
64
Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2, PRESS 2
Functional Description
Refer to Pressure Flow Diagram. PRESS 1, generated directly by the pump, performs the functions of supplying pressure to ACC 2
and ACC 3, and also supplies pressure to WC-1 through WC-4 used for emptying the chambers.
PRESS 2 is used to supply Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 used for hydrodynamic focusing in the optical flow cell, and also
flushing the optical flow cell.
PRESS 3 is used to supply pressure to the Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 and WBC Lyse Reservoir. This low pressure is used
for various flushing functions throughout the flow system. A low pressure is needed to prevent leaking when the wash blocks are
used to clean the open and closed probes.
Pressure Flow Diagram
Reagent Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
11
Shear Valve Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
15
Open Sample Probe Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
22
Sample Injection Syringe Diluent/Sheath (noisy)
23
WBC Lyse Reservoir Output
28
Main HGB Lyse Supply
33
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe Diluent/Sheath (quiet)
34
Closed Probe Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
65
Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 Output
66
Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 Output
91
Optical Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Flow
94
HGB Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
95
RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
96
WBC (WOC) chamber/WOC Heater WBC Lyse Flush
Functional Description
Refer to Reagent Flow Diagram. The Diluent/Sheath entering the flow system supplies two reservoirs: the Diluent/Sheath (quiet)
Reservoir 1 and the Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2. The Diluent/Sheath (quiet) exiting the Reservoir 1 through 66 performs the
following functions.
Flushes the shear valve through 11
Flushes the open sample probe through 15
Fills the RBC/HGB diluent syringe through 33
Flushes the closed sample probe through 34
Flushes the HGB flow cell through 94
Flushes the RBC/PLT cup through 95
Flushes the WBC (WOC) chamber/WOC Heater through 96
Dilutes the RBC/PLT sample
Partially dilutes the HGB sample
The Diluent/Sheath (noisy) exiting the Reservoir 2 through 65 is used for hydrodynamic focusing of the sample streams, filling the
sample injection and WBC Lyse syringe, and flushing the optical flow cell.
Reagent Flow Diagram
Sample Aspiration Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
12
Sample Aspiration Vacuum
17
WC-2, VAC 2 Supply
Functional Description
Sample Aspiration Flow Diagram. During sample aspiration, the whole blood sample is pulled from the open or closed probe
through the shear valve by the vacuum in WC-2 (variable). Due to the differences in plumbing (open vs. closed), the VAC 2 is a
variable vacuum set to three different levels (open mode Hematology, Retic, and closed mode Hematology).
To detect a short sample condition during sample aspiration and transfer two ultrasonic sensors (S1, S3) and one blood sample
detector (S2, green 555 nm LED) are employed in the sample aspiration flow system. S1 controls the leading edge (open&closed
mode) during aspiration. S3 controls the leading edge (open mode) during transfer. These sensors detect the presence or absence
of liquid in the aspiration line, and they are not adversely affected by the density or viscosity of the sample.
Blood sample detector (S2) controls the leading edge (closed mode) during transfer.
Sample Aspiration Flow Diagram
Dilution & Mixing Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
24
HGB Lyse Syringe Output
25
WBC Lyse Syringe Output
26
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe HGB/NOC Dilution
27
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe RBC/PLT Dilution
51
HGB Flow Cell Vent
Functional Description
Refer to Dilution & Mixing Flow Diagram. The CELL-DYN Ruby employs hydrodynamic transfer to transport the RBC/PLT, WBC
(WOC), and HGB/NOC dilutions to its respective cup where we apply PRESS 3 for bubble mixing. The input ports in the cups are
oriented so that the whole blood and reagent swirl when injected by the syringes.
To make the HGB/NOC dilution the RBC/HGB Diluent syringe pushes the 12 µL of whole blood and approximately 1.7 mL of
diluent/sheath into the HGB cup; simultaneously the HGB lyse syringe injects approximately 0.9 mL of HGB lyse, resulting in a
1:217 dilution ratio (nominal). As stated previously, the HGB cup is also the HGB flow cell, and the HGB sample remains in the
cup until sample measurement.
To make the RBC/PLT dilution the RBC/HGB Diluent syringe pushes the 1.67 µL of whole blood and approximately 2.8 mL of
diluent/sheath into the RBC/PLT cup, resulting in a 1:1677 dilution ratio (nominal).
To make the WBC (WOC) dilution the WBC lyse syringe pushes the 20 µL of whole blood and approximately 1.0 mL of WBC lyse
into the WBC cup, resulting in a 1:50 dilution ratio (nominal).
Dilution & Mixing Flow Diagram
Sample Staging Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
41
NOC Sample Staging
52
Staging Pump Input
54
RBC/PLT Sample Staging
55
WBC (WOC) Sample Staging
Functional Description
Refer to Sample Staging Flow Diagram. After dilution and mixing the RBC/PLT, WBC (WOC), and NOC samples must be staged
before processing through the optical flow cell. The staging is performed by a peristaltic pump and valve 52.
The RBC/PLT is staged first through 54, the NOC is staged second through 41, and, if applicable, the WBC (WOC) is staged third
through 55.
Sample Staging Flow Diagram
Sample Delivery Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
22
Sample Injection Syringe Diluent/Sheath (noisy)
64
Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2, PRESS 2
65
Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2, Output
91
Optical Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Flow
Functional Description
Refer to Sample Delivery Flow Diagram. After the sample is staged at the flow cell, it is injected into the flow cell by the Sample
Injection syringe for sample processing. The syringe first moves up at a fast speed, and then slows down. During the slow speed
movement, the count window opens for a precise period of time for sample measurement.
During the delivery period Diluent/Sheath is forced in by PRESS 2 to hydrodynamically focus the sample stream.
After the delivery period the Sample Injection syringe is re-filled with Diluent/Sheath through 22.
Sample Delivery Flow Diagram
Cleaning & Waste Flow Description
Associated Pinch Valves
Valve Number
Valve Function
11
Shear Valve Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
12
Sample Injection Vacuum
13
Shear Valve Drain, WC-4
14
Open Sample Probe Drain, WC-4
15
Open Sample Probe Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
21
RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber Drain
24
HGB Lyse Syringe Output
25
WBC Lyse Syringe Output
27
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe RBC/PLT Dilution
34
CS Probe Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
36
CS Vent Trap Drain, WC-4
37
CS Probe Drain, WC-4
38
CS Vent Trap Vent
52
Staging Pump Input
56
Optical Flow Cell Output
57
Optical Flow Cell Drain
91
Optical Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Flow
92
WBC (WOC) Chamber/WOC Heater Drain, WC-3
93
HGB Flow Cell Drain, WC-3
94
HGB Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
96
WBC (WOC) Chamber/WOC Heater WBC Lyse Flush
Functional Description
Refer to Cleaning & Waste Flow Diagram. There are two basic functions performed by the cleaning and waste plumbing: flushing
components and draining components. The WBC (WOC) Chamber/WOC Heater is flushed with WBC Lyse through 96.
The HGB flow cell and RBC/PLT mixing chamber are flushed with Diluent/Sheath (quiet) through 94 and 95. The optical flow cell is
flushed with Diluent/Sheath (noisy) through 91. The shear valve and ID of the open/closed probe are flushed with Diluent/Sheath
(quiet) through 11. The outside of the open and closed probes are flushed with Diluent/Sheath (quiet) through 15 and 34. During
cleaning, the reagent syringes flush the lines from the syringes to the mixing chambers to prevent carryover.
The waste chambers perform the draining and collection of waste from the various components.
WC-1 collects waste from the following components:
Optical flow cell output and drain through 56 and 57
Sample staging pump
WC-2 collects waste from the sample aspiration plumbing through 12.
WC-3 collects waste from the following components:
RBC/PLT mixing chamber through 21
HGB flow cell through 93
WBC (WOC) Chamber/WOC Heater through 92
WC-4 collects waste from the following components:
Shear valve and ID of the open/closed probe through 13
Open probe through 14
Closed probe through 37
CS vent trap through 36
Cleaning & Waste Flow Diagram
Optics Bench Description
The CELL-DYN Ruby optics bench is functionally the same as the other CELL-DYN 3000 Series Analyzers. The CELL-DYN Ruby
optics bench baseplate has a cutout that accommodates the location of the shear valve. A detailed description of the functions of
the optics bench components is contained in Optics Bench Theory. CELL-DYN Ruby Optics Bench shows the physical layout of the
components on the optics bench.
CELL-DYN Ruby Optics Bench
Aspiration Tower Description
Aspiration Tower Functions
Refer to Aspiration Tower. The aspiration tower, located in the center of the flow panel performs the following functions.
Pierces and vents the sample tube
Works in conjunction with the sample aspiration plumbing, aspirates the blood sample
Spins the sample tube for barcode reading
Senses the height of the sample tube being processed
Works in conjunction with the cleaning and waste plumbing, rinses the vent/aspirate probe
Aspiration Tower Functional Description
Guide System Assemblies
The functions of piercing, tube spinning, and cleaning are performed by two guide systems: GS1 and GS2. The vent/aspirate
needle is attached to GS1, and the barcode spinner, wash block, and tube height flag are attached to GS2.
Both move vertically along two shafts, and are connected together by a sliding shaft. GS1 is directly driven up and down by the
stepper motor. GS2 is pulled up by the shaft linking it to GS1 and moves down by gravity.
An optical sensor senses the home (up) position of GS1 and the position of GS2 is sensed by the tube height sensors.
A solenoid driven stop holds GS2 in the up position when the vent/aspirate needle is being washed.
Barcode Spin Assembly
Refer to Aspiration Tower and Tube Spinning. The barcode spin assembly consists of a DC motor, two gears, a belt, and a spin
cone.
The spin cone is designed to accommodate both standard and Sarstedt tubes. The cone has slots that grip the tube cap when
spinning the tube.
The top of the cap of a standard tube is larger than that of a Sarstedt tube and does not completely enter the recess of the cone
(Tube Spinning (D)). The edges of the slots dig into the tube cap spinning the tube.
The top of the cap of a Sarstedt has a smaller diameter than a standard tube, and this smaller area does not create enough friction
to spin the tube. To overcome this problem, the Sarstedt tube has a three (3) pin locking mechanism used as spin tabs. When the
tube first starts spinning, it slips in the cone until the spin tabs enter a slot. The tabs then ride on the edge of the slot, spinning the
tube (Tube Spinning (F)).
Aspiration Tower
Tube Spinning
Tube Height Sensing
Refer to Tube Height Sensors. The computer uses the tube height sensors to sense and identify the type of tube at the aspirate
position and to sense the vertical position of GS2.
Tube Height Sensors
The basic reason for distinguishing between a standard and a Sarstedt tube is that the Sarstedt tube has a plunger remaining in
the bottom of the tube. This dictates that the vent/aspirate needle is driven into the tube 1/2 inch less when a Sarstedt tube is
sensed than when a standard tube is sensed.
In Tube Height Sensors (A) GS1 is at the home position and both S1 and S2 are open. When GS2 is lowered onto a standard
tube (Tube Height Sensors (B)), S1 is closed and S2 is open. When GS2 Is lowered onto a Sarstedt tube (Tube Height
Sensors (C)), both S1 and S2 are closed. When there is no tube at the aspirate position (Tube Height Sensors (D)), GS2 moves to
the bottom position and S1 is open and S2 is closed.
Aspiration Tower Functional Sequence
The aspiration tower performs the following steps during an Sample Loader count cycle.
1. The GS2 stop is disengaged, the spin cone starts spinning, and GS1 and GS2 move down for a pre-determined period of
time.
2. GS1 and GS2 stop moving, the tube is spun for barcode reading, and the tube height sensors are checked to determine the
3.
4.
5.
type of tube being processed.
The spin cone stops spinning and GS1 moves the vent/aspirate needle into the tube to a distance dictated by the type of
tube being processed. This pierces the cap and vents the tube of pressure or vacuum and allows sample aspiration.
Vacuum #2 is applied to aspirate the blood sample.
Refer to Probe Cleaning & Air Gap. GS1 moves the vent/aspirate needle up and the outside of the needle is washed (Probe
Cleaning & Air Gap (A)). GS1 continues to home position and the GS2 stop engages the bottom of GS2 preventing it from
moving down.
Note
For demonstration purposes the vent/aspirate probe in Probe Cleaning & Air Gap is rotated 90° from its actual
orientation.
6. The spin cone spins to dislodge the sample tube and, if stuck in the cone, the tube drops.
7. GS1 moves the vent/aspirate needle into the wash block and the vent needle is rinsed (Probe Cleaning & Air Gap (B)).
8. After the shear valve returns to the aspirate position the vent/aspirate needle tip moves into the wash block and the inside of
9.
10.
the aspirate needle is rinsed (Probe Cleaning & Air Gap (C)).
The aspirate needle tip moves out the bottom of the wash block and the air gap is aspirated (Probe Cleaning & Air
Gap (D)).
The vent/aspirate needle moves up to the home position and stops. The tower is now ready to process the next sample
tube.
Probe Cleaning & Air Gap
Aspiration Tower Electronics
Refer to Aspiration Tower Electronics Diagram. There are three sensors, two motors, and one solenoid on the aspiration tower.
They are all controlled by sample handler module #1 (SHM1). SHM1 communicates with the CPU/DCM via the RS-485 bus.
Aspiration Tower Electronics Diagram
Sample Handler Module Description
There are two SHMs in the CELL-DYN Ruby system. SHM1 controls the aspiration tower, and SHM2 controls the Sample Loader.
Refer to SHM Block Diagram. The SHM performs the following functions.
Provides serial communications with the CPU/DCM
Provides serial communications with the barcode reader
Drives and reads up to eight optical sensors
Drives and reads up to two reflective tube sensors
Drives up to eight solenoids
Drives one DC motor
Drives one stepper motor
SHM Block Diagram
Electronic Subsystems Introduction
CELL-DYN Ruby Electronic Assemblies
The CELL-DYN Ruby electronics consists of a variety of individual printed circuit boards and electronic assemblies. The following is
a list of these with their acronyms:
Miscellaneous Boards
Vacuum/Pressure Module (VPM)
Cable Distribution Module (CDM)
Sample Handler Module (SHM)
Status Alert Board (SAB)
Measurement & Motion Control Boards & Assemblies
Photo-Diode Preamplifier (PD PAM)
Photo-Multiplier Tube (PMT)
PMT Supply/Preamplifier (PMT PAM)
HGB Flow Cell/Mixing Chamber
Main Amplifier Module (MAM)
Signal Processing Module (SPM)
Central Processing Module/Device Control Module (CPM/DCM)
Motor Processor Module (MPM)
Stepper Driver Board (SDB)
Shear Valve Driver Module (SVD)
Motor Drive Module (MDM)
Pump Relay Module (PRM)
Solenoid Driver Module (SDM)
Sample Handler Module (SHM)
Sensor Interface Boards & Assemblies
Flow Control Module (FCM)
Reagent Sensor Board (RSB)
Ultrasonic Short Sample Sensor
Sample Detector Board (SDB)
Shear Valve Sensor Board (SVSB)
Temperature Control Module (TCM)
System Power Boards & Assemblies
Analyzer Power Supply (APS)
ATX Computer Power Supply (CPS)
Power Distribution Module (PDM)
Laser Power Supply (LPS)
Data Station Boards & Assemblies
Industrial Single Board Computer (SBC) Type ROBO-8713VGA
Backplane, 6-slot PCI/ISA
3 1/2" Floppy Disk Drive
HDD IDE 5.1 GB or larger
CD-RW Drive ATAPI 52x
Multimedia Kit to work with ROBO-8713VGA
VGA Video Display
Serial Link/Membrane Keyboard Controller Card
CELL-DYN Ruby Electronic Subsystems
To aid in understanding the overall system, these electronic modules are divided into the following functional subsystems:
Data Interface Subsystem
A/D Converter Subsystem
D/A Converter Subsystem
Measurement Subsystem
Solenoid Control Subsystem
Motor Control Subsystem
Status Sensor Subsystem
Reagent Heater Subsystem
Vacuum & Pressure Subsystem
Power Distribution Subsystem
Personal Computer Subsystem
The following paragraphs describe each of these individual functional subsystems.
Data Interface Subsystem
Refer to Data Interface Subsystem. The function of this subsystem is to provide data interface and control throughout the system.
The data interface subsystem includes: system motion control, vacuum and pressure control, data acquisition control, raw
measurement data, and system status.
System Bus Descriptions
Serial Bus Communications
The high speed serial link provides serial communications between the CPU/DCM and the PC module. The initial program is
downloaded to the CPU/DCM over this bus at start-up. The CPU/DCM also sends raw measurement data (listmode) to the PC
module for final processing by the algorithms that reside in the PC module.
The MPM serial bus provides communications with the MPM for control of the stepper motors. It also provides readback of the
output of the A/D converter on the MPM for diagnostic purposes.
The RS-485 bus provides serial communications with the aspiration control and tube control boards which provides control of the
aspiration tower and Sample Loader.
The debug terminal bus provides serial communications with an external terminal or computer for diagnostic purposes.
Data Interface Subsystem
Parallel Bus Communications
The high speed external CPU bus provides high speed communications with the SPM and MAM for control of measurement and
data acquisition.
The peripheral bus provides communications with the FCM and VPM for the following:
Readback of system sensors
Control of pinch valves
Control of the shear valve
Control of status indicators
Control of vacuum and pressure
Readback of vacuum and pressure
The tag bus provides the CPU/DCM with a code, generated on the SPM, that identifies the particular analog voltage being sent to
the A/D for processing. This allows the computer to properly process and store the A/D output.
The MUX DAC control bus provides address data for steering the output of the D/A converter on the CPU/DCM to the appropriate
sample-and-hold circuits on the MAM, SPM, FCM, and VPM. There is only one D/A for generating control voltages, and it must be
shared by the boards.
CPU/DCM Description
Refer to CPM/DCM Block Diagram. The CPU/DCM board combines the functions of the CELL-DYN 3500 68KCPU and DCM
boards. Most of the interface and control functions were described in the previous paragraph. Another interface function of the
CPU/DCM is the 7-segment display, which displays the results of the internal start-up diagnostics.
The CPU/DCM generates the reference voltages used for diagnostic purposes, and divides the +/-15V by two for display. The
output of the selftest MUX is made available to the A/D for readback. The A/D and D/A is explained in detail later in this section.
CPM/DCM Block Diagram
A/D Converter Subsystem
Refer to A/D Converter Subsystem. The primary function of the A/D Converter Subsystem is to convert the amplitude of an analog
voltage or captured pulse peak to a digital value. In the case of pulses, each pulse is generated by a particle passing through the
optical flow cell. In the optical flow cell, one cell generates several pulses simultaneously, because there are several optical
detectors excited as the cell passes through the sensing zone. These pulses are captured and measured one at a time by the A/D.
The CPU/DCM contains the only analog-to-digital converter in the Analyzer, and it is multiplexed to measure analog voltages from
other boards and auxiliary voltages within the board itself.
Each pulse measurement has an identifying tag associated with it, generated by the SPM. In a long byte stream of data, the tag
indicates the source of the measured value following it.
A tag sequencer performs time-division multiplexing of all the pulse measurements. The tag sequencer is programmed to loop on a
series of measurements. The results of these measurement conversions are transferred to the main memory on the CPU/DCM via
direct memory access (DMA). The DMA transfers data at high rates without CPU intervention. Measurements made in this way are
referred to as automatic measurements.
The CPU uses the A/D to perform a secondary function of measuring analog voltages at different points of the system, such as
Hemoglobin, diagnostics, calibration voltages, etc. These measurements are initiated asynchronously by the CPU, and they are
referred to as manual measurements, as opposed to automatic measurements for pulses. These measurements do not use DMA
transfer. After the requested manual measurement has been made, a flag is set and the tag sequencer continues as before with
the next iteration of automatic measurements.
A/D Converter Subsystem
There are four A/D busses used in the system. The voltages to be processed by the A/D are individually placed on the busses
under control of the MUX DAC control bus.
D/A Converter Subsystem
Refer to D/A Converter Subsystem and Sample & Hold Circuits. The purpose of the D/A subsystem is to generate all the DC
reference and control voltages used throughout the Analyzer. The heart of the subsystem is the CPU/DCM board employing a 12bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
D/A Converter Subsystem
The DAC output voltages are programmed under control of the CPU. The analog voltage is then placed on three DAC busses
simultaneously, and then steered into the appropriate sample and hold circuit on one of the boards by the MUX DAC control bus.
By continuously sending the different analog voltages from the DAC and refreshing the S/H on each board, all the DC voltages
remain stable during system operation. Diagnostic readback of all locally generated voltages is also available.
Sample & Hold Circuits
Measurement Subsystem
Introduction
Refer to Measurement Subsystem. The measurement subsystem performs the following major functions:
Initial detection and amplification of signals from the optical flow cell and HGB flow cell.
Individual pulse processing and rejection of invalid cells.
Hardware counting of valid cells.
A/D conversion of pulse peak and HGB voltages.
Transfer of raw data to the PC module for processing by final software algorithms.
Measurement Subsystem
The measurement subsystem provides detection, amplification, and processing of signals from the optical flow cell and HGB flow
cell. The output signals from the four optical channels are amplified by programmable gain amplifiers on the MAM and sent to the
SPM. If the amplitude of the pulse is above the selected trigger threshold, the signals are processed by the peak hold circuitry. The
peak hold voltages are then individually sent to the CPU/DCM via the analog ADC bus. The tag bus also sends a code with each
pulse peak, identifying the channel. An A/D converter on the CPU/DCM converts these voltages to a 12-bit digital code which is
placed in memory, and then sent on to the PC module for final processing and display.
The output of the HGB flow cell is amplified by the FCM and placed on the ADC bus. It is then processed by the A/D in much the
same manner as the optical signals.
Photo-Diode Preamplifier Description
Refer to Photo-Diode Preamplifier. A photo-diode in each of the preamplifiers provide initial detection and amplification of the
forward scatter channels. Each board consists of a photo-diode and a two-stage current to voltage amplifier.
Photo-Diode Preamplifier
The photo-diode produces an electrical current that is directly proportional to the light intensity falling on its sensing element. When
a cell passes through the sensing zone of the optical flow cell, it produces an instantaneous burst of scattered light. This produces
a current pulse at the output of the photo-diode. The amplifier converts this to an amplified voltage pulse, which is routed to the
MAM for further amplification and processing.
PMT Preamplifier Description
Refer to PMT Preamplifier. The PMT preamplifier provides the initial amplification of the PMT signal, and supplies the high voltage
(VDYN) to the PMT. A variable resistor provides adjustment of the high voltage for calibration purposes.
An inverting amplifier in the feedback loop divides the high voltage by 100, and the output is supplied to the A/D for display. To
prevent damage to the PMT, the output of the amplifier chain is monitored by the over current comparator. If the signal exceeds a
preset level, the output of the comparator shuts down the high voltage supply.
PMT Preamplifier
Main Amplifier Module (MAM) Description
Refer to Main Amplifier Block Diagram. The MAM performs the processing of the optical channels between the preamplifiers and
the SPM.
Main Amplifier Block Diagram
The MAM performs the following Functions:
Linear amplification for the optical channels
Log amplification for the 0° and 10° channels
Programmable gain for the optical channels
Baseline restoration for the optical channels
Calibration of the log amplifiers
Offset adjustment for the log amplifiers
Test pulse generation for the optical channels
Readback of baseline restorer offsets
Readback of PMT VDYN voltages
When processing WBCs the signals from the preamplifiers are amplified by the linear amplifiers, baseline restored, and sent directly
to the SPM for further processing. The log amplifiers are not used in the WBC mode.
In the RBC/PLT mode, the linear amplifiers perform the same functions described above, the linear outputs 0°/10°/90° are
processed by the SPM for RBC histogram construction and MCV. Due to the larger size differential between RBCs and PLTs,
amplifiers with more dynamic range are needed for the optical flow cell to adequately process both cells simultaneously. The linear
outputs for the 0° and 10° channels are amplified again by the three-decade log amplifiers, and then routed to the SPM for
processing. Log amplified signals are also used for PLT histogram construction and MPV.
The log amplifier calibration circuitry calibrates the log amplifiers during system start-up, ensuring proper operation. The offset
adjustment circuitry provides offset compensation for each of the log amplifiers.
The test pulse generator supplies fixed-height pulses to the optical channels for diagnostic purposes.
A reference circuit supplies +/-10VDC used in calibrating the log amplifiers.
An analog multiplexer provides readback of the baseline restorer outputs and PMT VDYNs via the A/D on the CPU/DCM for
diagnostic purposes.
Signal Processor Module (SPM) Description
Refer to Signal Processor Module Block Diagram. The SPM performs the final pulse processing before the signals are sent to the
A/D on the CPU/DCM. The SPM performs the following functions.
Sets the threshold voltages under computer control
Selects the trigger threshold under computer control
Using thresholds, detects valid cell pulses
Captures WBC, RBC, and PLT cell peak voltages
Generates WBC, RBC, and PLT hardware counts
Generates tag sequencer identifier codes
Generates variable height test pulses for testing linear and log channels
Generates reference voltages for internal use
Provides readback of the cell peak voltages, threshold voltages, -10V, and +5V
The basic functions of the SPM detecting valid cell pulses, counting valid cell pulses, and capturing the peak voltages of valid cell
pulses.
There are six peak hold circuits that capture the peak voltages of the linear and log channels. Those circuits are controlled by the
bank 1 and bank 2 pulse detection and peak capture logic circuits.
Note
Presently bank 1 is used to process WBC, NOC, RBC, and PLT, and bank 2 is not used.
The logic circuits contain the threshold comparators and hardware counters used to detect and count valid cell pulses. In bank 1
the trigger channel can be 0° or 10° (linear or log), and in bank 2 the trigger channel is always the 10° log channel.
If the threshold criteria is met, a count is generated and the peak is held and passed on the A/D for conversion. If the threshold
criteria is not met, the pulse is not counted or converted.
Signal Processor Module Block Diagram
The reference voltage and test pulse generator provides the threshold voltages for bank 1 and bank 2, reference voltages for
internal use, and variable height test pulses for diagnostic purposes.
The A/D MUX and control circuitry multiplexes the analog voltages onto ADC3, and generates the tag identifiers used to properly
process and store the digital results.
Solenoid Control Subsystem
Introduction
Refer to Solenoid Control Diagram #1 and Solenoid Control Diagram #2. Solenoid control data resides in software on the
CPU/DCM, and sent to the FCM. The FCM then places the data on the SDM data bus and it is clocked into the appropriate SDM
by the clock signals. The SDM then provides the current drive to open and close individual solenoids. Each SDM can drive a
maximum of eight solenoids. There are five solenoids (1 thru 5) that are not driven by the SDMs, and are driven directly by the
VPM. The function of these solenoids is explained later in this section.
There are two (2) driver outputs of SDM5 used to enable/disable the circuitry on the TCM PCB for HTR-1 (HGB/NOC) and HTR-2
(WBC/WOC).
Solenoid Control Module Description
Refer to Solenoid Driver Module Block Diagram. The SDM consists of eight solenoid drivers, an on/off latch, and a hi/lo power
latch.
Each solenoid operates in three power modes: off, low power, and high power. The solenoid is initially pulled in with high power
applied to ensure maximum pinching torque. After 0.5 seconds low power is applied to hold the solenoid which requires less
torque. This technique reduces overall power consumption and heat generation.
The eight bits of on/off and power data is supplied to the latches via the solenoid data bus. The data is then clocked to the drivers
by hi clock and on clock signals to control the individual solenoids.
Each solenoid has a LED that indicates the status of the driver output. It is important to note that when the solenoid is activated,
the LED should be brighter for 0.5 seconds and dimmer when in the hold mode.
Solenoid Driver Module Block Diagram
Solenoid Control Diagram #1
Solenoid Control Diagram #2
Motor Control Subsystem
Introduction
Refer to Motor Control Subsystem. There are seven stepper motors in the CELL-DYN Ruby Analyzer. Six are controlled by the
MPM, which is a microprocessor based DMA controller, and one is controlled by SHM1. The MPM sends power, speed, and
direction data to the stepper drivers which provide the actual drive current to the stepper motors. The MPM receives commands
from the CPU via the MPM serial bus. The stepper motor control circuitry on SHM1 performs the same functions as the MPM and
stepper drivers for the aspiration probe up/down motor.
The FCM sends start commands and direction control to the shear valve driver which then drives the shear valve motor. Since it is
an DC motor, limit switches are used to control the travel of the shear valve in both directions. The vacuum and pressure pumps
are DC motors, and are controlled by the CPU, VPM, PRM.
The SHM1 drives the aspiration probe up/down stepper motor and the DC barcode spin motor. It receives commands from the
CPU via the RS-485 serial bus.
The DC Y-Valve is driven by the motor drive module which receives on/off and direction control from SDM4.
Motor Processor Module Description
Refer to Motor Processor Module Block Diagram. The MPM is an intelligent (microprocessor-based) controller, operating under
CPU control it can control up to twelve stepper motors (M0 to M11). It communicates with the CPU via the MPM Serial Link. It
provides motor current information with data bits I0 and I1, and motor speed and direction with data bits PH0 and PH1.
For diagnostic purposes, the MPM measures motor winding current using an integrating A/D converter, which monitors the voltage
drop across resistors on the stepper driver board.
It also routes +5VDC, +28VDC, and ground to the stepper driver boards.
Motor Control Subsystem
Motor Processor Module Block Diagram
Stepper Driver Board Description
Refer to Stepper Driver Board Block Diagram. The stepper driver board operates under the control of the motor processor module.
It contains the circuitry required to control and drive a two-phase stepper motor.
The stepper driver circuitry consists of two motor driver ICs, one for each winding of the two-phase stepper motor. These ICs
contain the input control logic, current sense comparators, single pulse generator, and output circuitry. External components
configure the single pulse generator, current sense low-pass filtering, and maximum winding current.
The stepper driver board provides sensing of the voltage across the two stepper motor windings by the MPM for diagnostic
purposes. The voltage across each stepper motor winding is sensed through one megohm resistors on each end of the winding.
These resistors form a part of the integrating A/D converter circuitry on the MPM that is a part of the overall diagnostics for the
stepper motor circuitry.
Stepper Driver Board Block Diagram
Status Sensor Subsystem
Introduction
Refer to Status Sensor Subsystem. The status sensor subsystem provides the main computer with the status of system
mechanical, electronic, and fluidic functions. It employs optical sensors, ultrasonic sensors, thermal sensors, and fluid sensors to
detect various system conditions.
The optical sensors are primarily used to detect mechanical position: such as, shear valve position, y-valve position, etc.
The ultrasonic sensors (S1 and S3) are used to detect the leading edge of fluid or bubbles in the sample aspiration tubing. It is
used during sample aspiration to detect a short sample condition. The blood sample detector (S2), green 555 nm LED, is used
during sample aspiration in the closed mode to detect a short sample condition. Thermal sensors are used to trigger the reagent
heater element condition.
There are two types of fluid sensors used: in-line and level. The in-line sensor consists of two electrodes placed in fluidic tubing to
detect bubbles in the tubing indicating an empty condition. The level sensor is two electrodes placed at the top of a reagent
reservoir or waste container to detect a full condition. Additionally, there is another type of level sensor used in the two VAC ACC 1
and ACC 2 to prevent them from overflow of foam or liquid introduced by system malfunction through WC-2, WC-3, WC-4.
Flow Control Module Description
Refer to Flow Control Module Block Diagram. The flow control module is a multi-purpose board the performs a number of interface
and control functions. They are:
Provides detection and interface of the fluid sensors
Controls the shear valve
Provides interface of the shear valve limit switches
Controls the status alert board
Sends clock and reset signals to the SDMs
Supplies LED current to the HGB flow cell
Provides initial amplification of the HGB voltage
Multiplexes the HGB voltage to the A/D
Multiplexes the VPM voltages to the A/D
Provides interface of the heater elements HTR-1 and HTR-2
Status Sensor Subsystem
Fluid Sensor Description
Refer to AC Voltage Divider. The fluid sensor circuitry is based on an AC voltage divider. A one-shot applies a 5 volt, 10
microsecond pulse to one end of a reference resistor for each fluid sensor. The other end of the resistor is connected to a filter
capacitor in parallel with the AC coupled fluid sensor. A comparator compares the voltage across the AC coupled fluid sensor with
a fixed reference voltage. The CPM captures the output of the comparator at the end of the 10 microsecond period.
Flow Control Module Block Diagram
The reference resistor is selected so that, if there is liquid between the sensor electrodes, the voltage at the comparator remains
below the reference voltage for longer than 10 microseconds, indicating a full condition. If there is no fluid between the fluid sensor
electrodes, the voltage rises above the comparator reference voltage within the 10 microseconds, indicating an empty condition.
The filter capacitor time constant is short compared to 10 microseconds, and the AC coupling capacitor time constant is long
compared to 10 microseconds.
AC Voltage Divider
For troubleshooting purposes, it is important to note that at no time is a constant +5VDC seen on the plus (+) sensor electrode.
However, pulses can be viewed with an oscilloscope at the plus (+) electrode.
Reagent Heater Subsystem
The flow panel is equipped with two Reagent Pre-Heater Elements. The heater elements have an adjustable operational
temperature range between 15°C ±0.5°C (59°F ±1.8°F) and 45°C ±0.5°C (113°F ±1.8°F). The Temperature Control Module (TCM)
is enabled during instrument prime to control the reagent heater temperature. It takes approximately 6 minutes to stabilize.
During instrument standby, both heater elements are disabled.
HGB Pre-Heater (HTR-1)
The temperature is set to 45°C ±0.5°C (113°F ±1.8°F). Diluent/Sheath for HGB dilution and HGB Lyse is pre-heated and
transferred to the HGB flow cell. The nominal temperature of the dilution in the HGB flow cell is 32°C (89.6°F).
WBC (WOC) Pre-Heater (HTR-2)
The WBC (WOC) Chamber is surrounded by the heater. The temperature is set to 25°C ±0.5°C (77°F ±1.8°F).
Vacuum and Pressure Subsystem
Introduction
There are two regulated vacuum and three regulated pressure levels employed in the CELL-DYN Ruby Analyzer. Since there is
only one vacuum pump and one pressure pump, both systems are set up in a primary and secondary configuration. Since the
systems are very similar, we will use the pressure system as an example in explaining the functions of both systems.
Refer to Vacuum & Pressure Subsystem. Pressure regulator 1 monitors the pressure level in the primary ACC 1, PRESS 1. If the
pressure level falls below a certain threshold, the pump is turned on until the desired level is reached.
If pressure regulator 2 senses a drop in the ACC 2, PRESS 2, solenoid 2 is opened which bleeds pressure from the ACC 1 to
ACC 2 until the desired level is reached. The ACC 3, PRESS 3 is replenished through solenoid 3 from the ACC 1, under control of
pressure regulator 3. The two levels of vacuum operate in exactly the same manner. Both systems have vent solenoids which are
opened at selected times to allow the primary pressure and vacuum accumulators to return to atmosphere.
The vacuum and pressure levels are set by the computer via DAC4. A reference voltage (setpoint) is multiplexed to an individual
sample and hold circuit for each vacuum or pressure level. This voltage is then used to set the lower threshold for that particular
regulator.
The actual vacuum and pressure levels are monitored by the computer via the analog multiplexer and ADC4.
If there is a condition, both PRESS and VAC levels fall below a set threshold at the same time, PRESS PUMP ON and VAC
PUMP ON are staggered 100 ms, controlled by a microprocessor.
Pump Relay Module
Vacuum & Pressure Subsystem
Vacuum/Pressure Module Description
Refer to Vacuum/Pressure Module Block Diagram. The vacuum/pressure module is the main control board for the vacuum and
pressure subsystem. It performs the following functions:
Provides logic for control of the pumps and solenoids
Provides drive for the pumps and solenoids
Senses the vacuum and pressure levels
Controls the vacuum and pressure levels
Provides interface for the vacuum wet sensors
Provides interface for the vacuum and pressure setpoints
Provides interface for the vacuum and pressure levels and reference voltages for monitoring and readback
The vacuum/pressure module can operate in two modes: closed-loop and open-loop. In the closed-loop mode the
vacuum/pressure module controls the vacuum and pressure, and the computer only monitors the levels.
In the open-loop mode the computer takes direct control of the pumps and solenoids, allowing it to control levels, open and close
solenoids, etc. This mode is used mainly during diagnostics, and special conditions such as inhibiting the vacuum pump in a
vacuum accumulator wet condition, or inhibiting both pumps during optical sample delivery.
The vacuum and pressure levels are controlled by setpoints that set the lower threshold for the vacuum and pressure. These
voltages are sent from the D/A via DAC4, and stored by the by the sample-and-hold circuits.
The vacuum and pressure voltages and reference voltages are sent to the A/D via the analog MUX and ADC4.
The reference voltage supply generates the reference voltages used as bias for the pressure and vacuum sensors.
Vacuum/Pressure Module Block Diagram
Power Distribution Subsystem
The power distribution subsystem supplies the Analyzer voltages used for measurement, fluidic control, mechanical motion control,
and the PC module. It consists of three (3) power supply modules: the APS, ATX CPS, and the Laser PS.
Refer to Power Distribution Subsystem. Line AC is routed through an RF filter and Terminal Block PCB where it splits to the APS
and ATX CPS. Both power supplies are AC-line switching power supplies with active PFC (Power Factor Correction) circuit, and
with full range input features.
The circuitry on the APS generates two outputs consisting of two regulated DC voltages, +15.5VDC and +28VDC to GND. The total
output power is 1,000 W:
+15.5VDC: CDM1&CDM2, PDM, FCM
+28VDC: MDM, MPM, SHM1&SHM2, CDM1&CDM2, TCM, FAN1-3, PRM, SVD, Laser PS, PDM, FCM
The following voltages are generated by the PDM using a DC to DC converter:
+5VDC: MAM, SPM, CPU/DCM, MDM, MPM, VPM, FCM, SHM1 and SHM2
±15VRAW: voltage switcher on PDM
The following voltage switcher output voltages are used:
±15VDC: MAM, SPM, CPU/DCM, VPM, FCM, SHM1 and SHM2, linear voltage regulator input voltage
The following linear regulator output voltages are used:
±12VDC: MPM
The circuitry on the ATX CPS generates five regulated DC voltages, +3.3VDC, ±5VDC, ±12VDC to GND_ATX. The total output
power is 300W:
+3.3VDC: BACKPLANE
+5VDC: BACKPLANE, HDD, FDD, CD-RW
-5VDC: BACKPLANE
+12VDC: BACKPLANE, HDD, FDD, CD-RW
-12VDC: BACKPLANE
Power Distribution Subsystem
Personal Computer Subsystem
Refer to Personal Computer Subsystem. The personal computer subsystem is the main intelligence of the CELL-DYN Ruby
system. It consists of an industrial design single board computer (SBC) module (internal to the Analyzer), an external video display,
and an external keyboard, mouse and hand held barcode reader. It performs the following functions:
Stores main control program for the Analyzer
Applies software algorithms to the raw cell data
Stores and applies troubleshooting information
Stores and applies dilution and calibration factors
Stores patient history and QC data
Provides floppy and hard disk storage
Provides CD-RW capability
Provides Audio connectivity
Provides GbE LAN port
Provides operator keyboard and hand held barcode reader entry
Provides one parallel port, two serial ports and three USB ports
Provides VGA port
Communicates with Analyzer via the HSSL Controller
Interfaces with external peripheral devices, such as the Printer, Laboratory Information System, etc.
Personal Computer Subsystem
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-110) • © 2006, 2011 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Theory of Operation
Introduction
The CELL-DYN Ruby is a fully automated in vitro hematology analyzer that uses electronic and optical principles to perform
measurements on blood cells contained in precisely diluted blood samples.
The CELL-DYN Ruby uses a colorimeter to measure Hemoglobin (HGB) concentration.
A laser based flow cytometer performs the following functions:
Using light scatter, it counts, sizes, and classifies white blood cells (WBCs).
Using light scatter, it counts and sizes platelets (PLTs).
Using light scatter, it counts and sizes red blood cells (RBCs).
Hemoglobin Theory
Dilution Ratio and Sample Transport
The shear valve sections off 12 µL of whole blood. This section is then transported, along with approximately 1.7 mL of pre-heated
(45°C ± 0.5°C) Diluent/Sheath to the HGB/NOC mixing chamber where it is mixed with approximately 0.9 mL of HGB lyse, resulting
in a 1:217 (nominal) dilution ratio. The final dilution in the HGB/NOC mixing chamber measures a temperature of approximately
32°C. The dilution is ready for measurement after bubble mixing.
Note
The HGB/NOC heater is adjusted for laboratory air temperature below or equal to 20°C (68°F).
HGB Measurement
Hemoglobin Measurement Block Diagram is a block diagram of a simplified hemoglobin (HGB) measurement system. The
concentration of hemoglobin contained in the prepared sample is measured and displayed in grams per deciliter (g/dL), US default
units. This concentration is proportional to the absorbance of the light by the sample in the green 555 nanometer (nm) wavelength
region.
The light path consists of a current-controlled LED emitting a 555 nm wavelength, the HGB cup\flow cell, and a photodiode.
The output current from the photodiode, proportional to the light energy received, is amplified by the current-to-voltage amplifier
providing the output signal.
The ratio of voltages when measuring a clear reference solution in the HGB cup/flow cell, and then measuring the prepared
hemoglobin sample, represents the hemoglobin concentration.
Hemoglobin Measurement Block Diagram
Flow Cytometer Theory
Introduction
The optics bench contains the CELL-DYN Ruby Flow Cytometer. The basic purpose of the optics bench is to detect light scattered
from cells as they pass through a flow cell illuminated by a HeNe Laser. This light can be scattered from the surface and internal
structure of the cell.
The optical and electronic components of the optics bench convert the light to an equivalent electronic signal for processing by the
electronic hardware and software.
The optics bench generates the following measured parameters:
White Blood Cell Count
WBC 5-Part Differential
Platelet Count and MPV
RBC Count and MCV
Before beginning an in-depth description of the optics bench, we must examine a number of basic flow cytometry principles in
greater detail.
Light Scatter Theory
As stated previously, the CELL-DYN Ruby optics bench uses the principle of light scatter to count, size, and classify cells. The
following are descriptions of the basics of light scatter as it applies to the CELL-DYN Ruby.
Forward Scatter
The first scatter group is forward scatter, collected in the forward direction. Forward scatter is further divided into 0° scatter,
collected at 1° to 3° from the axial plane, and 10° scatter, collected at 3° to 10° from the axial plane.
0° scatter is mainly representative of particle size and is not very sensitive to cell structure. 10° scatter is still mainly representative
of cell size, but it is more sensitive to cell structure than 0° scatter.
Side Scatter
The second scatter group is orthogonal (side) scatter, collected between approximately 60° and 120° from the axial plane. This side
scatter consists of two types: polarized side scatter (90°) and depolarized side scatter (90°D). Polarized side scatter is light
remaining vertically polarized after scattering, and depolarized side scatter is light that is rotated to horizontal polarization during
scattering.
Cell Scatter
Cell Scatter depicts the way particles or cells scatter light. We can see in the three cases depicted that all cells or particles scatter
light at all angles and polarization.
The particle or cell depicted in Cell Scatter (A) has surface characteristics and structure that do not scatter much light at wide
angles. The particle or cell depicted in Cell Scatter (B) has surface characteristics and structure that scatter much more light at
wide angles.
The cell depicted in Cell Scatter (C) has internal granules, and these granules generate much more side scatter than a cell with no
granules. Some granulated cells generate side scatter consisting primarily of polarized side scatter, with very little being
depolarized. Others, because of the structure of the granules, generate more depolarized side scatter. This phenomenon is
examined in more detail later in this section.
Cell Scatter
Optical Flow Cell Theory
In order to detect and process cell scatter, it is essential cells pass through the focused laser beam one at a time. The flow cell is
the assembly on the optics bench that makes this single-file flow possible. The flow cell is the optical sensing zone of a flow
cytometer.
Optical Flow Cell is a front and top view of the CELL-DYN Ruby flow cell and the associated lenses. The actual flow cell is a clear
quartz block with a square 250 micron channel in the center. This channel flares out into a cone at the bottom of the flow cell.
Hydrodynamic Focusing
A delivery syringe injects the diluted sample through an injection tube; simultaneously, 9 psi of pressure forces Diluent/Sheath fluid
into the assembly. The sheath converges on the sample in the cone, and forces it into a small stream approximately 30 microns in
diameter. Due to the characteristics of the fluid flow, the sample and sheath streams are laminar, meaning they do not mix with
one another. This overall principle is known as hydrodynamic focusing. Because the sample stream is now very small, cells pass
through the laser beam in single file, allowing them to be processed one at a time.
Optics Bench Theory
CELL-DYN Ruby Optics Bench is a block diagram of the CELL-DYN Ruby optics bench. For explanation, we will follow the light
along the various paths, and examine in detail the functions of the optical and electronic components.
Illumination Optics
The vertically polarized output of the laser is reflected at a 90° angle by the Rear Mirror and passes through the Cylindrical Lens
(CELL-DYN Ruby Optics Bench). This lens changes the shape of the beam from a circle to an ellipse, which concentrates the
power along the horizontal axis of the ellipse (Beam Shape and Power Distribution). It is again reflected at another 90° angle by
the Front Mirror.
The beam then passes through a 125 µm slit, which blocks all but the center portion of the elliptical beam. We can see in Beam
Shape and Power Distribution that the power distribution of the beam, after the slit, is flat. This flat power distribution allows the cell
stream to wander slightly in the Flow Cell and still be exposed to the same light intensity. The imaging lens focuses the beam on
the Cell Stream where light is scattered in the forward and 90° directions.
Optical Flow Cell
Beam Shape and Power Distribution
Forward Scatter Components
In the forward direction, the forward focusing lens focuses the scatter on the 0° detector and the 10° detector. Since the 0° scatter
is at a low angle, it passes through a hole in the perforated mirror and directly onto a photocell in the 0° detector. The 10° scatter
is reflected by the surface of the perforated mirror onto a photocell in the 10° detector.
The laser beam diameter is much larger than the average cell, and much of the light passes by the cell. If this axial light were
allowed to reach the 0° detector, it would result in saturation of the detector circuitry. To solve this problem, an obscuration bar is
placed in the beam path to block the axial light. This bar allows only 0° scatter to reach the detector.
CELL-DYN Ruby Optics Bench
Side Scatter Components
In the 90° direction, the objective lens focuses the scatter to the center of the 1,000 µm Slit. This slit blocks the scatter from the
walls of the flow cell channel, which would interfere with scatter from the cell stream. The field focusing lens focuses the 90°
polarized and depolarized scatter onto the polarized and depolarized detectors. A beam splitter reflects 10% of the scatter to
detector #3 and allows 90% to pass through to the horizontal polarizer. This polarizer allows only horizontally polarized scatter to
pass on to detector #4, which is the scatter that was depolarized by the cell. Because the side scatter is at a very low level, photomultiplier tubes are used as detectors in both channels.
Optical Measurement Electronics Theory
Introduction
Optical Measurement Electronics is a basic block diagram of the CELL-DYN Ruby optical measurement electronics. In this
measurement circuitry, up to four channels can be used to count, size, and classify cells. Each channel provides its own distinct
information relating to cell size or morphology (structure).
Particle Processing
Optical Measurement Electronics shows the complete set of possible signal paths of the optical measurement electronics. The
electrical cell signals originate at the four optical detectors located on the optics bench assembly. The detectors and their
associated pre-amplifiers provide electrical pulses. These pulses represent the light scattered when a cell passes through the laser
beam. Signals from each of these detectors flow through separate linear amplifiers. Following the linear amplifiers, the first two
signals (0°, 10°) flow through logarithmic amplifiers.
Following these logarithmic amplifiers, the signals are routed to the signal comparators and the peak hold circuits. The peak hold
circuits capture the amplitude of the signal pulses. The analog outputs of the peak capture circuits are passed on to the A/D
system where they are digitized for storage in computer memory. The comparators compare the incoming cell signals (pulses) to
DC threshold voltages. The comparator outputs are digital signals which indicate when a pulse equals or exceeds the threshold
value. The logic following the comparators is used to control the peak capture circuits and the hardware counters that generate the
hardware count.
Optical Measurement Electronics
Note
Presently bank 1 is used to process WBC, NOC, RBC, and PLT, and bank 2 is not used.
The peak hold circuits are grouped into two banks, bank 1 and bank 2. Bank 1 is the more general and configurable of the two
banks. This bank is used for both WBC measurement and RBC measurement. The 0°, 10°, 90°, and 90°D signals flow to peak
hold circuits 1, 2, 3, and 4. Either the linear or logarithmic signals can be supplied to the first two peak hold circuits. This linear or
logarithmic selection also determines which signal is passed to the bank 1 comparator. In addition, a separate control signal is
used to switch between linear and logarithmic signals being sent to the peak hold circuit. The bank 1 peak hold circuits are
controlled by the bank 1 comparator. This comparator compares the selected signal (0° or 10°) to the bank 1 lower threshold. The
comparator also triggers the bank 1 counter. This counter accumulates the total number of pulses which exceed the bank 1 lower
threshold.
Optical Hematology Parameters
Introduction
Unlike our other instruments, the CELL-DYN Ruby does not employ an impedance transducer to count and size RBCs and PLTs.
RBC and PLT data is derived from the optical flow cell, and HGB is the only measured parameter that is not derived from the
optical flow cell. The following paragraphs describe the basic theory of the optical hematology parameters.
WBC Theory
Dilution Ratio and Sample Transport
The shear valve sections off 20 µL of whole blood. This section is then transported, along with approximately 1.0 mL of WBC Lyse
to the WBC (WOC) mixing chamber/WOC Heater where it is mixed, resulting in a 1:50 (nominal) dilution ratio.
The final dilution in the WBC (WOC) mixing chamber measures a temperature of 25°C ± 0.5°C. The dilution is ready for
measurement after bubble mixing.
Note
The WOC heater is adjusted for laboratory air temperatures below or equal to 20°C (68°F).
WBC Scatter
The CELL-DYN Ruby performs a WBC count and a five-part differential. Generating a five-part differential consists of separating
the WBCs into five distinct subpopulations. The five subpopulations are: Lymphocytes, Monocytes, Basophils, Neutrophils, and
Eosinophils. To understand how this is accomplished, we must first examine WBC scatter in more detail.
WBC Scatter shows the way WBCs scatter light. For the sake of explanation, we can divide the WBCs into two major groups:
nongranular cells (mononuclear) and granular cells (polynuclear). The nongranular cells are composed of Lymphocytes and
Monocytes; and the granular cells are composed of Basophils, Neutrophils, and Eosinophils.
WBC Scatter
The internal structure of the nongranular cells (Lymphocytes, Monocytes) has almost no scatter effect on the axial light, and most
of the scatter is from the surface of the cell. This scatter falls mainly in the 0° and 10° channels, with very little falling in the 90°
and 90°D channels.
Note
Basophiles tend to generate less side scatter than other granular cells in this application. Therefore, this cell type displays
on the 90° versus the 10° scatter that is determined to be the mononuclear cell region.
The magnitude of the scatter in the 0° channel is mainly proportional to cell size and is not, to any great extent, affected by cell
structure. The 10° channel is mainly proportional to size, but is more sensitive to cell complexity (structure).
On the other hand, the internal granules of the granular cells cause the granular cells to scatter much more light at side scatter
angles. In the case of Basophils and Neutrophils, most of the side scatter is vertically polarized and falls in the 90° channel, with
very little falling in the 90°D channel.
The Eosinophil has a unique quality in that the granules have the property of depolarizing more of the light before scattering. So,
much more of the side scatter from an Eosinophil falls in the 90°D channel than that of a Basophil or Neutrophil.
WBC Scatterplots
The CELL-DYN Ruby graphically displays data in the form of histograms and scatterplots. A shortcoming of histograms is that
information is gathered from only one channel at a time, and only relates to pulse amplitudes and number of pulses for that
particular channel. This technique is fine for displaying RBC or PLT distributions, but it is a limiting factor when trying to classify
and display the five distinctly different types of WBCs.
When generating scatterplots, data are gathered from two channels simultaneously. This allows the CELL-DYN Ruby to mix and
match size and morphology to count, size, and classify WBCs.
WBC Scatterplots
WBC Scatterplots depicts three of the scatterplots used on the CELL-DYN Ruby. Each valid cell is represented by a dot on the
scatterplot. The dots are positioned at a point determined by the combination of the output levels of the two channels. If we apply
arbitrary numbers to these outputs, as in WBC Scatterplots (A), we can better understand the placement of the dots. The output of
the 0° channel has an output level of 11 (Y-Axis), and the output of the 10° channel is 8 (X-Axis). Thus, the corresponding dot is
placed at the intersection of the two levels: 0°-11 and 10°-8. An increase in the 0° output level moves the dot up (+Y) on the Yaxis, and an increase in the 10° output level moves the dot to the right (+X) on the X-axis. The same concept is used for
generating all other scatterplots.
Once the data (list mode data) is gathered, the software can apply mathematical equations to separate the various cell populations
and generate a 5-Part Differential and various morphological flags. The first of these is shown in WBC Scatterplots (B); in this step
the 10° and 90° channels are used to separate the mononuclear cells from the polynuclear cells. The second is shown in WBC
Scatterplots (C); in this step the 90° and 90° depolarized channels are used to separate the Eosinophils from the Neutrophils. Once
these two determinations have been made, the software can use equations to make the other cell classifications as shown in WBC
Scatterplots (D).
WBC Measurement Electronics Configuration
The WBC configuration is the simplest configuration. The circuitry not used for this configuration is shown in dashed lines. For this
configuration, all four signals pass through the linear amplifiers to the bank 1 peak hold circuits (peak holds 1 through 4). The
output of the linear 0° amplifier is also connected to the bank 1 comparator, and is the trigger for this configuration. This
comparator allows capturing of pulse heights and counting of pulses when the linear 0° signal exceeds the bank 1 lower threshold.
For this configuration, the logarithmic amplifiers and the bank 2 circuitry are not used.
WBC Measurement Electronics Configuration
RBC/PLT Theory
Dilution Ratio and Sample Transport
The shear valve sections off 1.67 µL of whole blood. This section is then transported, along with approximately 2.8 mL
Diluent/Sheath, to the RBC/PLT mixing chamber where it is mixed, resulting in a 1:1677 (nominal) dilution ratio.
RBC/PLT Histogram Generation
There are 256 channels (bins) available for each optical channel, and each channel equates directly to a pulse amplitude within a
certain range. In the case of RBCs and PLTs, each channel can be equated to an individual cell within a certain size range. For
RBCs and PLTs these channels can be referred to as size channels. We can use these size channels to generate RBC and PLT
histograms that graphically represent the overall size distribution of a particular sample.
RBC Histogram Generation is a drawing of a smoothed RBC histogram and an exploded view of the raw counts per channel of the
peak portion of the histogram (A).
RBC Histogram Generation
If we compare RBC Histogram Generation (B) with RBC Histogram Generation (A), we can see the relationship of channel data to
the actual histogram shape. The raw counts increase with volume on the leading edge, and decrease on the trailing edge.
In our other instruments, the size width of each channel in cubic microns, from channel 0 to channel 255, is the same. This is
because our other instruments use linear amplifiers to amplify the RBC and PLT pulses. In the CELL-DYN Ruby logarithmic
amplifiers are used to amplify the RBC and PLT pulses, and the channel width is not the same over the entire range.
RBC/PLT Measurement Electronics Configuration
Refer to RBC/PLT Measurement Electronics Configuration. Configuration bank 1 is used to measure RBC and PLT. The logarithmic
0° and 10° signals are passed to peak holds 1 and 2 of bank 1. The output of the 10° log amp is used as the trigger for both RBC
and PLT. There is no upper hardware threshold for RBC, and the upper threshold for PLT is set by software.
Nuclear Optical Count (NOC) Theory
Fragile White Blood Cells
A common problem when optically counting WBCs is a condition known as fragile (nonviable) white cells. Fragile white cells are
WBCs where the cell membrane is abnormally fragile, and it is destroyed by the WBC lyse, leaving only the nucleus intact. This
condition results in an erroneous low count because most of the pulses from the nuclei fall below the lower hardware threshold and
are not counted even though they are valid cells present in the patient sample before lysing.
RBC/PLT Measurement Electronics Configuration
Fragile white cells are common in patients with leukemias and certain viral infections, and it is extremely important that an accurate
WBC count be reported under these clinical conditions.
Count Rate Analysis
In order to count samples with fragile white blood cells, the abnormal sample must be flagged and an accurate count be obtained
by an alternative counting method. The CELL-DYN Ruby uses the WBC count rate to determine if the sample contains an
excessive amount of fragile cells.
Refer to WBC Count Rate. The first step in generating the count rate is to divide the 7.5 second WBC count time into fifteen time
slots of 500 microseconds each.
WBC Count Rate
The WBC count is then accumulated and stored for each of these 500 microsecond time slots, allowing the rate of decline to be
determined. If we compare A with B, we can see that the rate of decline is much higher for B than for A.
The cause for the increased rate of decline in B is that fragile cells are being destroyed by the WBC lyse during the count time. If
this rate of decline exceeds a pre-determined level, a flag is set indicating the presence of an excessive amount of fragile cells in
the sample. This flag indicates that an alternative method of counting is needed to obtain an accurate count for that particular
sample.
Nuclear Optical Counting
The CELL-DYN Ruby uses the Nuclear Optical Count (NOC) to perform an accurate count on samples containing excessive fragile
WBCs. In the NOC mode the HGB sample is saved in the HGB/NOC mixing chamber, and processed through the optical flow cell
to count the nuclei. This is possible because the HGB lyse destroys the cell membranes and leaves the nuclei intact. Because the
nuclei and cells have a 1:1 ratio, we can count the total number of WBCs using this technique.
Nuclear Optical Count Scatterplot
Nuclear Optical Count Scatterplot is a drawing of a NOC scatterplot. The WBC nuclei display as a distinct population in the lower
left quadrant. A threshold is used to separate the WBC nuclei from stroma and other debris.
Thresholds, Triggers, and Gain Theory
Introduction
In order to effectively calibrate, troubleshoot, and repair the CELL-DYN Ruby, it is essential one gains a working understanding of
the functions of thresholds, triggers, and gain settings, and the effects they have on counts, histograms, and scatterplots.
Thresholds
A lower threshold is a voltage generated under computer control that sets the lower threshold voltage for a given pulse. If the
pulse does not equal or exceed the threshold, the pulse represents a cell, particle, or electronic noise that is below the range of
the particular parameter being measured, and the pulse is not processed by the measurement circuitry.
Lower and Upper Thresholds
An upper threshold is a voltage much the same as a lower threshold, but it is the upper threshold voltage for a particular pulse.
Any given pulse exceeding the upper threshold is also rejected and not processed by the measurement circuitry. Upper thresholds
reject pulses representing cells, particles, or noise that are above the range of the parameter being measured.
Trigger Threshold
A trigger threshold is a lower threshold that acts as the main enable for all the optical channels. In the optical measurement
electronics we can trigger off the 0° or 10° channels. If the amplitude of a particular pulse does not equal or exceed the selected
trigger threshold, that pulse is not counted or processed by the A/D.
Gains
If we refer back to Optical Measurement Electronics, we can see that each channel has an independent gain control. In the case of
the photodiode channels (0° and 10°), the overall gain can be changed on the Main Amplifier Module. In the case of the photomultiplier tube channels (90° or 90°D), the gain of the channel can be changed by varying the dynode voltage (supply voltage to the
PMT) on the preamplifier module, or by changing the gain on the Main Amplifier Module.
The principle that increasing the gain increases pulse amplitude, and decreasing gain decreases pulse amplitude is quite simple.
However, the effect gain has on counts, histograms, and scatterplots is not as straightforward, and must be examined in greater
detail.
Thresholds, and Gain Effects On Histograms
Thresholds, Gain and Histograms depicts the basics of how thresholds and gain can affect histograms.
Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (A) depicts a normal histogram of a particular cell population. The population is not named
because the effects are the same for all cell types. In this case, the lower threshold is placed at a point to reject any noise, and
only the valid cells are counted and displayed.
Noise to the left of the lower threshold can be in any combination of the following: other cells, cellular debris (stroma), particulate
reagent contamination, stray light (optical counting only), or electronic background noise.
In Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (B), the lower threshold is lowered to a point where some of the noise is above the threshold
and is displayed. This condition results in an increased count because noise is now counted along with the valid cell population.
In Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (C), the lower threshold is increased to a point where some of the valid cell population is
rejected, resulting in a decreased count.
In Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (D) the upper threshold is lowered to a point where some of the valid cell population are
rejected, resulting in a decreased count.
In Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (E) the gain is lowered, moving both noise and valid cells to the left, with the same overall
effect on counts as in (C).
In Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (F) the gain is increased, moving both noise and valid cells to the right, with the same overall
effect on counts as in (B).
Thresholds, Gain and Histograms
In Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (F), the gain is increased, moving both noise and valid cells to the right, with the same overall
effect on counts as in Thresholds, Gain and Histograms (B).
If the gain were increased even more, the upper threshold would begin to reject some of the larger cells in the valid cell population.
In this case, an increase or decrease in counts is unpredictable, because the noise raised above the lower threshold is
unpredictable.
Thresholds, and Gain Effects On Scatterplots
Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots depicts the basics of how thresholds and gain can affect scatterplots. Scatterplots are affected in
much the same way as histograms, the major difference being that there is an X and a Y axis representing the two channels.
Under certain configurations, thresholds and gain can have an effect on two channels simultaneously. Thresholds, Gain and
Scatterplots shows only changes in the channel (Y-axis).
In Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots (A), noise is located in the lower left corner below the lower threshold, and the lower
threshold is positioned to exclude the noise and include all the valid cells.
In Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots (B) the 0° lower threshold is lowered, and we can see the dots representing noise above the
threshold, resulting in increased counts.
In Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots (C), the lower threshold is raised to a point where some of the Lymphocytes are being
rejected, resulting in a decreased count.
In Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots (D) the gain is lowered, with the same overall effect on counts as in (C).
In Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots (E), the gain is raised, with the same overall effect on counts as in (B).
Thresholds, Gain and Scatterplots
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-102) • Copyright 2006, 2007 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories.
CELL-DYN RUBY is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Sample Loader Description
Introduction
The Sample Loader enables the CELL-DYN Ruby to process up to 50 closed sample tubes in an automatic and walk-away mode,
with a throughput of approximately 73 samples per hour in Test Selection: CBC. The Sample Loader mounts on the front of the
Analyzer (Analyzer & Sample Loader), and is controlled by the CPU/DCM via SHM2. The Sample Loader performs the following
automated functions:
Positions blood sample tubes at the vent/aspirate station for venting and sample aspiration
Moves the racks from the load side to the unload side
Mixes blood sample tubes
Reads rack and sample tube barcodes
Analyzer & Sample Loader
Sample Loader Mechanical Description
Rack Description
Rack Barcode Labels
Refer to Sample Loader Rack. Each rack has an identifying barcode, and one barcode label at each tube position (except tube
position # 1). Barcodes are read when the tube is in the vent/aspirate position. The racks also have slots through which the
barcodes of the sample tubes are read. In addition, the 10 sample tube positions are numerically identified 1 through 10.
Sample Loader Rack
Rack Orientation and Locking
The racks have an orientation groove to prevent them from being incorrectly placed in the Sample Loader. If the rack is reversed,
tabs normally riding in the groove prevent it from indexing through the processing station.
The rack at the processing station is mechanically locked in position after each index step by a spring loaded ball on the rear wall
that engages a detent in each tube position in the rack. This assures correct positioning and avoids the possibility of accidental
movement.
Functional Descriptions
Barcode Reader
The Sample Loader employs a diode-array, auto-discriminating barcode reader capable of reading Code 39, Interleaved-2-of-5,
Codabar, and Code 128 formats with checksum capability.
To reduce the possibility of error, bar code reading takes place at the vent/aspiration position.
Sample Loader Top View
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
9.1
Sample Loader
9.1.10
Sample Processor Assy
9.1.3
Barcode Reader
9.1.11
Rotary Valve Assy
9.1.8
Optical Sensor, Load Side Empty
9.1.18
Mixer Assy
9.1.9
Open Probe Assy
Mixer Assembly
Refer to Mixer Bladder Operation and Inversion Mixing. The mixer assembly consists of a bank of two vertically-oriented pneumatic
grippers (bladders) mounted on a horizontal shaft and driven by a stepper motor.
The gripping mechanism consists of two closed-end bores in a block. Inside each bore is a metal sleeve and a rubber bladder that
inflates from the outside, reducing the inside diameter and gripping the sample tube.
When vacuum is applied (Mixer Bladder Operation (A)), the bladder opens, releasing the sample tube. When pressure is applied
(Mixer Bladder Operation (B)), the bladder expands, firmly gripping the tube and the cap.
Mixer Bladder Operation
During a normal mixing cycle the following occurs:
Vacuum (VAC 1) is applied to the mixer bladder, lift air cylinder control valve opens to atmospheric air pressure and the
mixer assembly is lowered over the sample tubes.
Mixer assembly captures the sample tube(s). Refer to Mixer Bladder Operation.
Pressure (PRESS 1) is applied and the mixer and tubes are raised to clear the rack.
The motor rotates the mixer through at least 15 inversions, as shown in Inversion Mixing.
The motor returns the mixer assembly to the vertical position.
flag trips an optical sensor, verifying the vertical position.
Lift air cylinder control valve opens to atmospheric air pressure, gravity moves the mixer and the tubes down into the rack.
Mixer assembly releases the sample tube(s).
Vacuum is applied and the mixer moves up, clearing the tubes.
Inversion Mixing
When the mixing sequence is completed, the rack indexes one step and the process repeats. Assuming the sequence starts with
the first tube in the rack, each tube receives at least 30 inversions (15 inversions times two mixing positions).
Index Assemblies
Refer to Sample loader View. Longitudinal (X-axis) indexing of the racks is made in one-inch increments along the rear wall of the
baseplate. An air cylinder provides the movement.
Sample loader View
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
9.1
Sample Loader
9.1.5
Optical Sensor, Mixer Head Home
9.1.1
Air Cylinder, Rack Advance
9.1.6
Optical Sensor, Lifter Home
9.1.2
Optical Sensor, Unload Side Fourth & Fifth Rack 9.1.7
Tube Mixer Head
9.1.3
Barcode Reader
Manifold Assy
9.1.4
Third & Fourth Tube Sensor
9.1.14
Refer to Index Pawl. The cylinder drives a rod with spring-loaded pawls (fingers) mounted along the length. These fingers engage
grooves in the side of the rack through a slots in the rear wall.
Index Pawl
Cross Transfer Assemblies
Refer to Rack Movement, and Sample Loader Bottom View. The cross transfer assemblies provide lateral (Y-axis) movement of
the racks.
Rack Movement
The cross transfer assembly is a pair of sweep arms that move in a horizontal plane through slots in the front and rear walls.
The ends of the arms are fitted to vertical shafts that are geared together, and the opposite tips of the arms move in equal arcs
simultaneously. The tips of the arms contact the side of the rack, pushing it laterally across the baseplate.
The cross transfer air cylinders activate after each longitudinal index, but the two racks at the front and back of the processing
station prevent any lateral movement (Rack Movement (A)). When the racks reach the position shown in Rack Movement (B), they
index laterally.
Sample Loader Bottom View
Designator
Description
Designator
Description
9.1
Sample Loader
9.1.14
Manifold Assy
9.1.1
Air Cylinder, Rack Advance
9.1.15
Air Cylinder, Load Side Cross Transfer
9.1.12
Load Side Cross Transfer Arms
9.1.16
Air Cylinder, Mixer Lift
9.1.13
Unload Side Cross Transfer Arms 9.1.17
Rack Position Sensing
Air Cylinder, Unload Side Cross Transfer
Refer to Sample Loader Bottom View. A single optical sensor senses when the load side is empty. When the last rack is
completely in the processing station a flag mounted on the sweep arm gear assembly blocks the sensor when the arms activate.
There are two sensors on the unload side that sense when the fourth and fifth racks enter the unload side. When the fifth (last)
rack is finished processing the Sample Loader halts and an alarm alerts the operator.
Sample Loader Electronics Description
The Sample Loader electronics provide communications with, and control of, the various electronic and mechanical components in
the Sample Loader. The electronics consist of the following assemblies:
Sample Handler Module #2 (SHM2)
Air Cylinder & Mixer Bladder Solenoid Valves (V1-V5)
Mixer Motor
Lifter Home Up Sensor
Mixer Head Home Sensor
Load Side Empty Sensor
Unload Side Fourth Rack Sensor
Unload Side Fifth Rack Sensor
Third and Fourth Tube Sensors
Barcode Reader
As with the overall system, the Sample Loader electronics consist of functional subsystems. They are:
Pneumatics Control Subsystem
Motor Control Subsystem
Sensor Interface Subsystem
Pneumatics Control Subsystem
Refer to Sample Loader Pneumatic Diagram and Pneumatic Control Electronics Diagram. The pneumatics control subsystem
provides electronic control of the valves supplying pressure/vacuum to the air cylinders and vacuum/pressure to the mixer bladders.
The Sample Loader employs five 3-way valves to drive the air cylinders and mixer bladders. In the case of V1, V2, and V5 a pushpull configuration is used to drive the air cylinders, with pressure extending and vacuum retracting. V3 pressure lifts the mixer head
and gravity lowers it.
In the case of the mixer bladders, a variable regulator (0-10 PSI) reduces the incoming PRESS 1 to 6.0 PSI to inflate the bladders.
The valves are controlled by the driver outputs on SHM2, and SHM2 is controlled by the CPU/DCM via the RS-485 serial bus.
Sample Loader Pneumatic Diagram
Pneumatic Control Electronics Diagram
Motor Control Subsystem
Refer to Motor Control Subsystem. The mixer stepper motor provides the inversion mixing of the sample tubes. It is driven by a
stepper driver circuit on SHM2.
Motor Control Subsystem
Sensor Interface Subsystem
Refer to Sensor Interface Subsystem. The sensor interface subsystem allows the CPU/DCM to read the status of the sensors in
the Sample Loader, and read tube barcodes.
SHM2 provides the LED drive and reads the outputs of the photo-detectors of the optical sensors.
There are two reflective tube sensors that sense the third and fourth tube positions in the processing station. They are mainly used
to ensure that an expected tube is in the correct position, and to ensure that the tubes are both lifted and dropped by the mixer
head.
Processing Station Tube Positions shows how the tube positions are numbered in reference to the processing station.
Processing Station Tube Positions
The LEDs of the two reflective tube sensor are driven by 25 kHz pulse train to prevent ambient light interference. A filter on SHM2
responds only to a 25 kHz output of the detector.
The barcode reader is controlled and read via a 4-wire serial bus.
Sensor Interface Subsystem
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-101) • Copyright 2006 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELLDYN RUBY is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Troubleshooting
Document Control Number 201961-111
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-113) • © 2006, 2013 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Analyzer Setpoints Reference Chart
Voltage Specification
PDM
Test Point
Value
E8
GND
Range
E1
+ 15.00 VDC ± 0.4 VDC
E2
- 15.00 VDC ± 0.4 VDC
E3
- 12.00 VDC ± 0.5 VDC
E4
+ 12.00 VDC ± 0.5 VDC
E5
+ 28.00 VDC ± 0.5 VDC
E6
+ 15.50 VDC ± 0.5 VDC
E7
+ 5.00 VDC
± 0.2 VDC
CPU/DCM
Test Point
TPAGND
Value
Range
Comments
GND
TP4 (VREF-) - 10.00 VDC ± 0.1 VDC adjust POT-R4
MAM
Test Point
TP1
Value
Range
Comments
GND
TP2 (VREF+) + 10.00 VDC ± 0.01 VDC adjust POT-R84
VPM
Test Point
TP3
Value
GND
Range
Comments
TP2 (VREF+) + 10.00 VDC ± 0.01 VDC adjust POT-R16
TP1 (VREF-)
- 10.00 VDC ± 0.01 VDC
verify
TCM
Test Point
Value
TP0
GND
Range
Comments
TP1
+ 2.39 VDC ± 0.01 VDC
adjust POT-R7
TP2
+ 1.94 VDC ± 0.01 VDC adjust POT-R14
TP5
+ 5.00 VDC ± 0.01 VDC
adjust POT-R4
Stepper Motor Winding Current Specification
Phase 0 Phase 0 Phase 0 Phase 3
Motor
Low
Medium
High
High
A
1.0 - 1.6 2.4 - 3.2 3.5 - 4.5 3.5 - 4.5
B
1.4 - 2.0 3.4 - 4.0 5.0 - 5.6 5.0 - 5.6
C
1.4 - 2.0 3.4 - 4.0 5.0 - 5.6 5.0 - 5.6
D
1.4 - 2.0 3.4 - 4.0 5.0 - 5.6 5.0 - 5.6
E
1.5 - 2.1 3.4 - 4.2 4.9 - 5.9 4.9 - 5.9
G
1.5 - 2.1 3.4 - 4.2 4.9 - 5.9 4.9 - 5.9
Pressure/Vacuum Accumulator Level Specification
Pressure
Accumulator
Value
Range
PRESS 1
13.00 PSI ± 0.50 PSI
PRESS 2
9.00 PSI
± 0.50 PSI
PRESS 3
4.25 PSI
± 0.25 PSI
Vacuum
Accumulator
Value
Range
VAC 1
13.00 inHg ± 0.50 inHg
VAC 2 (Open)
2.80 inHg
± 0.20 inHg
VAC 2 (Closed)
3.30 inHg
± 0.20 inHg
VAC 2 (Retic)
2.10 in Hg ± 0.20 inHg
Setpoints (Setpoint Entry - Default Settings)
Gain Settings
Parameter
Nominal Gain Setting
WOC 0° Gain
1500
WOC 10° Gain
1000
WOC 90° Gain
1400
WOC 90°D Gain
1400
NOC 0° Gain
1500
NOC 10° Gain
1000
RBC/PLT 0° Gain
1650
RBC/PLT 10° Gain
1200
RBC/PLT 90° Gain
1000
LinRBC 0° Gain
1500
LinRBC 10° Gain
1200
LinRBC 90° Gain
2000
Retic 0° Gain
1500
Retic 10° Gain
1000
Retic 90° Gain
1400
Note
Gains need to be adjusted, see Individual Gain Setting, Mean Channel Range and CV Specification
Threshold Level
Parameter Nominal Gain Setting
RBC Lo
550
WOC Lo
360
NOC Lo
400
Retic Lo
100
LinRBC Lo
300
Miscellaneous
Parameter
Nominal Gain Setting
Speaker Level
4095
SPM Reference Voltage
4095
PRESS 1
3550
PRESS 2
2500
PRESS 3
1150
VAC 1
1580
VAC 2 (Open)
400
VAC 2 (Closed)
460
VAC 2 (Retic)
300
Vacutainer Tube
-1525
Sarstedt Tube
-1350
HGB Current
1000
Note
Gains need to be adjusted, see Pressure/Vacuum Accumulator Level Specification.
Note
Gains need to be adjusted, see Raw Data Summary - HGB Reading Specification
Raw Data Summary - HGB Reading Specification
Parameter
HGB Reference
Target
2050
Range
± 200
HGB Sample*
*HGB Sample must be within 20 units from HGB Reference after background count
Optics Bench Offset Specification
Baseline Verification on Pre-amplifier PCB
Channel
Test Point
Channel 1 (0°)
Channel 2 (0°)
TP2
GND
TP1
< 0.05 VDC
TP2
GND
TP1
< 0.05 VDC
Individual Gain Setting, Mean Channel Range and CV Specification
Note
Verify NOC Gain Settings are equal to the WOC Gain Settings for channels 0° and 10°.
Note
Verify Retic Mode Gain Settings are equal to the WOC Gain Settings for channels 0°, 10° and 90°.
Parameter
Channel 1 (0°)
Channel 2 (10°)
Channel 3 (90°)
Channel 4 (90°D)
35 ±3
65 ±5
Mean from Bead Blood Worksheet ±6
Mean from Bead - Blood
Worksheet ±10
<6
<5
< 18
< 18
Nominal
Gain Setting
< 2300
< 2300
1200 - 1700
1200 - 1700
RBC/PLT 0° (7.0 µm
SRP)
Mean
Channel
180 ±1
RBC/PLT 10° (3.3 µm
SRP)
Mean
Channel
RBC/PLT 0° (5.0 µm
SRP)
Mean
Channel
RBC/PLT 10° (7.0 µm
SRP)
Mean
Channel
Mean
Channel
WOC 0°, 10°, 90°,
90°D (7.0 µm SRP)
CV%
Mean
Channel
LinRBC 0°, 10°, 90°
(HCM)
Nominal
Gain Setting
121 ±1
129 ±1
202 ±5
Mean from HCM
Assay Sheet
Mean from HCM
Assay Sheet
Mean from HCM Assay
Sheet
< 3800
< 2000
< 3000
QC Moving Average
X-B
Parameter Lower Limit Upper Limit Target Value Units Action Limit (%)
MCV
55.0
125.0
89.3
fL
30.0
MCH
20.0
40.0
30.5
pg
30.0
MCHC
24.0
44.0
34.1
g/dL
30.0
WBC
Parameter
Lower Limit Upper Limit Target Value
Units
Action Limit (%)
Lym 0° Mn
40.0
70.0
55.0
channel
30.0
Lym 10° Mn
45.0
80.0
63.0
channel
30.0
Neu 0° Mn
120.0
200.0
163.0
channel
30.0
Neu 10° Mn
110.0
185.0
145.0
channel
30.0
Neu 90° Mn
87.0
163.0
119.0
channel
30.0
Neu 90° D Mn
11.0
31.0
21.0
channel
30.0
NE Angle
12.0
32.0
22.0
degree
40.0
RBC
Parameter
Lower Limit Upper Limit Target Value
Units
Action Limit (%)
RL 0° Mn
0.00
255.0
117.0
channel
30.0
RL10° Mn
0.00
255.0
115.0
channel
30.0
RL 90° Mn
0.00
255.0
120.0
channel
30.0
Rbc 0° Mn
0.00
255.0
175.0
channel
30.0
Rbc 10° Mn
0.00
255.0
225.0
channel
30.0
Plt 0° Mn
0.00
255.0
45.0
channel
30.0
Plt 10° Mn
0.00
255.0
80.0
channel
30.0
HbS Mn
0.00
4095
1125
D/A reading
100.0
HbR Mn
0.00
4095
2000
D/A reading
100.0
RETC
Parameter Lower Limit Upper Limit Target Value
Units
Action Limit (%)
Rtc 0° Mn
0.00
255.0
47.5
channel
40.0
Rtc 10° Mn
0.00
255.0
63.0
channel
20.0
Rtc 90° Mn
0.00
255.0
21.5
channel
20.0
SRP/Blood Comparison
Cell Regions
Parameter Lower Channel Upper Channel
LYM 0°
20
100
LYM 10°
20
100
GRAN 0°
100
240
GRAN 10°
120
240
NEU 90° D
10
110
Login Passwords
Operating System Software
Login
Password
afse
IbFSE!
admin
Syssetup
cd
no password required
Application Software
Operator
ID
Password
CSC
today's day date + 5
FSE
Day
Password
Day
Password
1
0507
21
0729
2
0128
22
0321
3
0908
23
1128
4
0816
24
0701
5
1006
25
0603
6
0222
26
0808
7
0524
27
0418
8
1026
28
0922
9
0130
29
1102
10
0817
30
0221
11
1107
31
0702
12
0513
32
0220
13
0616
33
1207
14
0202
34
0315
15
1016
35
0405
16
0728
36
1216
17
0614
37
0810
18
0416
38
1126
19
1119
39
0717
20
0924
40
0521
Note
The four character passwords noted above are valid only when entered in reverse order. For example the valid
password for Day 1 is 7050.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-108) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Block Diagrams
Links
Cable Connection Diagram
9H_9048.PDF
Measurement Block Diagram
9H_9051.PDF
Motor Control Block Diagram
9H_9053.PDF
Power Distribution Block Diagram 9H_9049.PDF
Sensor Block Diagram
9H_9050.PDF
Solenoid Control Block Diagram
9H_9052.PDF
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-106) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
2
3
4
5
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
7
NC
9520532
J1 SDM2 J6
9600930
2
3
4
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
CDM1
J9 9601080 J6
6
9520532
J1
J10
9601920
Speaker &
Status BD.
NC
J7
J2
NC
J8
J4
J10 NC
J5
J1 SDM3 J6
9600930
2
3
4
NC
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
6
7
8
S2
3
4
J2
9520532
4
J2
2
J3
3
J4
J17
5
J5
J12
J15
J8
J4
J9
J5
5
6
J10
2
J2
J7
J3
J8
6
4
J4
J9
J5
J10
7
9522020
3
5
J2
J7
J3
4
5
J4
J5
J8
(SOL 61-68)
J18
952077
8
Over
P Pressure
Sensor
J16
J4
J1
J2
J3
J4
9520874
DC Motor
J5
Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 Level
9520835
9212130 Exhaust Fan
9212130 Exhaust Fan
9212130 LH Intake Fan
J3 9522009
J11
ATX PC Power
J11
9522306 9522038
9522012
J13
TCM 9522094
9522011
J15
J20
J14
J17
9522005
9522008
6
9522009
9522017
J7
J3
J8
8
J4
J9
9522053
7
TCM
9602980
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J10 9520861
J5
J2
J6
9522095
J3
J5
NC
9522079 CCW
9212944
J4
MDM
9601940
9522061
CW
1
NC
J5
9522046
J10
9520853
J12
9520854
J7
J13
NC J11
J14
9520855
9520856
J18
9522055
Input Power
B
J1
J1
9522037
SDM5 / J8
J16
9522083
VAL-2
9522083
VAL-3
9522083
VAL-4
J3
J4
J1
J3
PMT PREAMP
9601010
J2
J5
9522018
(CH3)
PMT
PMT
(CH4)
9522055
9520255
Manifold
VAL-5
UPPOS
Mixer Home
Sensor
J10
9522084
J12
J13
9522032
J15
9522045
J9
9522086 Rack Sensors
9522088 Tube Sensor Assy
J11
J16
9212940 M Mixer Motor
2104220
Bar Code Reader
Note: for Refurb Instruments with PCB
9600920, make the connections as
follows:
9250847 to J1 9600920
9522016 to J2 9600920
COM 1
COM 2
Data Station Power Switch
9522024
J18
Video Display
J27
ATX
P/S
Laser
9522083
9340117
Sample Loader Controller
Status 0-3
9212928 Computer
J10
Data Station
9341079
9312025
9212909
Laser P/S
Tube
M Spinner Ext.
VAL-1
9601000 PREAMP
0 DEG (CH1)
9601000 PREAMP
10 DEG (CH2)
PMT PREAMP
9601010
J1
J2
J3
J6
J19
9522036
SDM5 / J3
Rotary
Valve Assy
Bottom
View
J7
NC
9212943
9522049 CTR COV DPT Sensor
SHM (2)
9602290
9522083
J1
EXT. CPU BUS
+5V ± 15V
9522042
HTR-1 (HGB Right PL)
HTR-2 (WOC Left PL)
Motor
2
NC
SPRCSR
M Motor Ext.
Aspiration Tower Controller
J2
9522094
J1
9522078
J1
9212942
NC
J15
J3
9522018
NC
9522075
NC
NC
J2
J4
9522072
9600420 Sensor
& Chopper Driver
NC
NC
J16
9522039 J12
J26
RH Intake Fan
9211956
9522035 FCM J15, J16
J2
8
9520860
9522013
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
9522054
G Peristaltic Pump
Motor
MAM 9601951
9522082
NC
NC
9522016
J12
J9
9522080
PDM
9601981
9522017
9520563
9522016
GS2 SOL
9522087 SPRCSR Sensor
J14
E OTS
Motor
9522056
J10
J13
9212941
9522047
J1 J2
J1 J2
9522018
9522848
MUX DAC
Control
9522020
J10 Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 Level
9520836
J2
ADC2
9520505
CDM2
External Waste Full
J4 9601080 J7 9520857
9522051
7
J6
9522011
WBC LYSE Reservoir Level
J9 9522031
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J15
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J7
CPU / DCM
9601820
J3
J4
J5
J9
9522095
J8
DAC3
J4
HGB
9212922
J2
J1
ADC3
Shear Valve Dr.
9602220
J1 9520785
6
J9
J10
9520839
J10
J1 J2 C WBC Lyse Syr.
Motor
RBC/HGB
9520154
J1 J2 D Diluent Syr.
Motor
9600422 Chopper Driver
9601601
J3
SHM (1)
9602290
J1 9522085
9520155
MPM
SPM
9601830
9522082
J14
9520500
J3
9522046
J11
J10 9520505
9520850
J12
9522054
J1
NC
J2
9522055
J17
NC
J13
9520849 Peripheral BUS
9520834
9522050
3
S1
J1 J2 B HGB Lyse Syr.
Motor
9522081 Data Station * Serial Link
9520862
(SOL 51-58)
2
J3
FCM
9601320
9520849
J1 SDM9 J6
9600930
1
9520859
J1 SDM6 J6
9600930
J11
J20
9600420 Chopper Driver
Motor
9520844
9520847 MPM Serial Link
J6
J5
DAC1
ADC1
J7
3701818
Ultrasonic
J8
Short Sample
Sensor
(SOL 91-98)
4
1
9520851
9520852
J22
J25
J18
9520860 J2
2
5
J26
9600422 Chopper Driver
J1 J2 A Sample Injection Syr.
Start SW
3701818
Ultrasonic Short
Sample Sensor
9600910
Reagent Empty
In-Line Sensor
J2
A
NC
J1 SDM5 J6
9600930
S3
9212939
9520862
9520859 J1
NC
1
9522080
J14 9520832
9520826 J6
(SOL 41-48)
J3
Pres. Pump
9522093
9520532
J21
J23
J24
J4
J5
J8
J13 9520831
J1
J2
J4
Pump Relay
9601201
Vac. Pump
J3
J7
J3
9522035
J15
9522035 J16
J14
9522080
9520750
J1
J9
J12
J19
J1 VAC Press
9601220
9522093 J6
J1 SDM4 J6
9600930
2
J2
9601169 Short
Sample Sensor
1
VAC 1 OVFL
9520528 J10
VAC 2 OVFL
9520875
J11
Test Conn . J16
(SOL 31-38)
1
J7
Solenoid
9520858
J1
9522090
9520870
SP
7
8
J6
9520826
(SOL 21-28)
1
9520838
J11 NC
J9
J5
5
9520858
NC
9520825
J3
9522092
9522092
J3
9522008
8
(SOL 11-18)
1
9520845
SDM Data, +5V 9522053
934107
1
SBC
J1 SDM1 J6 NC SOL
9600930
1
SOL
J26
J11
LPT1
Keyboard / Mouse / Hand Held Barcode Reader
HSSL
BLK
WHT
GRN
9210462
AC In
9522091
5107518
9522043
Power Signal to PDM / J11
3X USB
APS
Ethernet LAN
+28V P/S
BLK 1
WHT
GRN
Audio
Door
HOT
NEU
GND
J8
J12
CD-RW, HDD
FDD
3
2107612
9522096
9341047
9522089
9522040
9H_9048f
CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
J1 SDM1 J6 NC SOL
9600930
1
SOL
2
3
4
5
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
7
J1 SDM2 J6
9600930
2
3
4
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
9520858
J1
J2
9520532
J4
9520532
J5
J10
NC
J7
NC
J8
J10 NC
J1 SDM3 J6
9600930
2
3
4
NC
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
6
7
8
S2
3
4
5
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
9522035
J15
9522035 J16
J14
9522080
9520750
J1
9520532
4
J2
2
J3
3
J4
J17
5
J5
J12
J15
9522080
S3
9520851
9520852
J22
J25
J11
J20
J3
9520849
9522020
9520839
J18
9520778
NC
J3
J4
9522017
9520874
DC Motor
9522017
9522095
9522020
Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 Level
9520835
9522013
9522094
9522011
9522005
J3 9522009
9522008
J1 SDM5 J6
9600930
1
2
J2
J7
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
6
J1 SDM9 J6
9600930
1
2
4
5
9522009
(SOL 91-98)
7
9520859
3
4
6
J1 SDM6 J6
9600930
1
2
J2
J7
9522017
J2
J7
J3
J8
8
J4
J9
9522053
J5
J10 9520861
7
TCM
9602980
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
6
9522051
7
J2
9522050
3
4
5
J3
J8
J4
J9
J5
J10
(SOL 61-68)
J6
9522095
9520860
J3
J5
NC
9522078
9522079 CCW
9212944
HTR-1 (HGB Right PL)
HTR-2 (WOC Left PL)
9522061
CW
9522005
9522036
SDM5 / J3
Motor
Rotary
Valve Assy
Bottom
View
2
J7
J4
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
9522094
J1
8
G
9522035 FCM J15, J16
(SOL 51-58)
5
F
9522011
J10 Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 Level
9520836
J11
E
J2
WBC LYSE Reservoir Level
J9 9522031
J5
HGB
9212922
9520862
A
NC
Over
P Pressure
Sensor
Shear Valve Dr.
9602220
J1 9520785
CDM2
External Waste Full
J4 9601080 J7 9520857
9520860 J2
D
9520862
Pres. Pump
J8
B
C
9522080
9520849 Peripheral BUS
J10
DAC 1
ADC1
3701818
Ultrasonic
Short Sample
Sensor
S1
J18
9520859 J1
A
3701818
Ultrasonic Short
Sample Sensor
9600910
Reagent Empty
In -Line Sensor
J26
FCM
9601320
J14 9520832
9520826 J6
(SOL 41-48)
J3
9520834
9522093
9520532
J21
J23
J24
J4
J5
J8
J13 9520831
J1
J2
J4
Pump Relay
9601201
Vac. Pump
J3
6
J12
J19
J1 VAC Press
9601221
9522093 J6
J1 SDM4 J6
9600930
2
J2
9601169 Short
Sample Sensor
1
VAC 1 OVFL
9520528 J10
VAC 2 OVFL
9520875
J11
Test Conn . J16
(SOL 31-38)
1
J7
Solenoid
9520858
J1
9212939
9522090
J9
9520870
SP
7
8
J6
9520826
(SOL 21-28)
1
9520838
J11 NC
J9
J5
5
6
9601920
Speaker &
Status BD.
J3
9522092
NC
9520825
CDM1
J9 9601080 J6
8
9522092
J3
9522008
NC
(SOL 11-18)
1
SDM Data, +5V 9522053
9522037
SDM5 / J8
1
MDM
9601940
9H_9048e_A
R
CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
9212939
A
Start SW
9520845
9600422 Chopper Driver
J1 J2 A Sample Injection Syr.
9600420 Chopper Driver
Motor
9520847 MPM Serial Link
J6
J5
DAC1 9520851
B
9520852
C
J8
9522080
D
9522081 Data Station * Serial Link
9522082
J14
9520500
J3
9522046
J11
J10 9520505
9520850
J12
9522054
J1
NC
J2
9522055
J17
J13 NC
J7
SPM
9601830
MPM
9601601
J3
J2
J1
DAC3
J5
ADC3
J7
9520849
Peripheral BUS
J16
J6
J9
ADC2
9520505
F
G
9522013
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
ATX PC Power
J11
H
9522095
J
9522020
K
9212130
Exhaust Fan
9522306
LH Intake
Fan
TCM
L
M
9522038
J13
9522012
J19
9522094
9522011
9522005
J15
J20
J14
9522008
J17
9522009
J18
9522017
J16
J12
J26
9522039
RH Intake Fan
9211956
N
J1 J2 C WBC Lyse Syr.
Motor
J1
D
Motor
J1 J2
J10
9522018
RBC/HGB
Diluent Syr.
9212941
9522047
J1 J2
E OTS
Motor
9522056
J1 J2
9520563
9522016
NC
NC
9522054
G Peristaltic Pump
Motor
NC
NC
9522016
9522018
NC
J15
J3
J1
9601000 PREAMP
0 DEG (CH1)
9601000 PREAMP
10 DEG (CH2)
J6
NC
J7
9522055
J1
9520853
J12
9520854
J14
J9
9522049 CTR
COV DPT
Sensor
J16
9520855
9520856
9212943
M
Tube
Spinner
Ext
Aspiration Tower Controller
SHM (2)
9602290
9522083
J1
VAL-1
9522083
VAL-2
9522083
VAL-3
9522083
VAL-4
9522083
VAL-5
J3
B
9522046
J10
J13
NC J11
9522075
J2
J4
NC
J14
SPRCSR
Motor Ext
M
NC
EXT. CPU BUS
+5V ± 15V
J5
9212942
NC
NC
J2
NC
9522072
9600420 Sensor &
Chopper
Driver
MAM 9601951
9522082
J12
9522085 GS2
SOL
9522087 SPRCSR
Sensor
J13
9522080
PDM
9603100
J1
J2
J3
J4
SHM (1)
9602290
9522848
MUX DAC
Control
9522017
J1 J2 B HGB Lyse Syr.
Motor
9600422 Chopper Driver
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J2
CPU / DCM
9601820
9520155
9520154
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J15
J4
J4
E
9520844
J1
PMT PREAMP
9601010
J1
J2
J3
J1
J3
PMT PREAMP
9601010
J2
J4
J5
9522018
(CH3)
9522084
J12
J13
9522032
9212940
9522045
2104220
Rack
Sensors
9522088
9522055 J11 Tube Sensor
J16
Assy
Sample
Loader
Controller
J9
(CH4)
Manifold
UPPOS
Mixer Home
Sensor
J10
PMT
PMT
9340117
9522086
Mixer
Motor
Bar
Code
Reader
M
Note: for Refurb Instruments with
PCB 9600920, make the
connections as follows:
9250847 to J1 9600920
9522016 to J2 9600920
Input Power
Status 0-3
O
9212928 Computer
Data Station
9341079
P
Q
9212909
Laser P/S
ATX
P/S
9312025
Laser
934107
1
SBC
R
COM 1
COM 2
Data Station Power Switch
9522024
- J18
Video Display
J27
9522042
9522005
9520255
J10
J26
J11
LPT1
Keyboard / Mouse / Hand Held Barcode Reader
HSSL
Power Signal to PDM / J11
BLK
WHT
GRN
9210462
AC In
9522091
5107518
9522043
3X USB
Ethernet LAN
APS
Audio
Door
+28V P/S
BLK 1
WHT
GRN
J8
HOT
NEU
GND
3
J12
9522089
2107612
9522096
CD-RW, HDD
FDD
9522040
9341047
9H_9048f_B
T o
V P M
T o
F C M
J 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
J 1 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
J 1 1
1
* A n a ly z e r 2
P o w e r
3
O ff
4
T o
F A N 3
J 1 2
1
2
J 1 3
1
T o
F A N 1 2
T o
L a s e r
P S
J 1 4
1
2
T o
T C M
J 1 5
1
2
T o
S V S B
J 1 6
1
2
T o
C D M 1
J 1 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
J 1 8
1
T o
C D M 2 ,
F C M
3
2
4
5
6
J 1 9
1
T o
F A N 2
T o
P R M
2
J 2 0
1
2
P o w e r D is tr ib u tio n M o d u le P o w e r C o n n e c to r s
+ 5 V
+ 1 5 V
G N D
-1 5 V
+ 5 V
G N D
+ 1 5 V
E 7
+ 5 V D C
E 1
+ 1 5 V D C
G N D
-1 5 V
E 2
+ 5 V _ A T X
+ 2 8 V
3
2
**T o
D a ta
S ta tio n
5
4
7
8
6
9
1 0
D
V
D
V
+ 5 V
+ 5 V
-1
+ 1
+ 2
G
G
G
+ 2 8 V
G N D
+ 5 V
+ 2 8 V
G N D
+ 2 8 V
+ 5 V
+ 1 5 V
-1 5 V
G N D
G N
+ 1
+ 2
+ 2
G N D
D
5 .5 V
8 V
8 V
G N D
+ 2 8 V
G N D
G N
+ 1
+ 2
+ 2
D
E 6
5 .5 V
8 V
8 V
+ 1 5 .5 V D C
+
+ 1
-1
G
5 V
5 V
5 V
N D
G N D
+ 2 8 V
E 5
G N D
+ 2 8 V D C
+ 2 8 V
E 8
G N D
+ 2 8 V
+ 5 V
G N D
+ 1 5 .5 V
G N D
+ 5 V
S T A
S T A
S T A
_ A
T U
T U
T U
T X
S 0
S 1
S 2
S T A T U S 3
N C
N C
N C
+ 5 V _ A T X
+ 1 5 .5 V
G N
+ 2 8
G N
G N
+ 2 8
D
V
D
D
G N D
G N D
V
+ 1 2 V _ A T X
1
2
3
F ro m
P D M -J 1 8
3
5
J 1
+ 2 8 V
+ 1 5 .5 V
G N D
4
1
2
J 2
8
J 3
1
2
3
3
N C
7
6
1
6
4
N C
N C
S S R
N C
2
N C
2
3
4
J 2 1
1
1
5
S 1
N O
1
3
2
IN H IB IT
5
J 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J 7
1
2
3
J 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
T o
S D M B
N C
J 4
1
2
3
8
J 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T o
S D M A
+ 5 V _ A T X
4
7
2
3
1
R 1
V
2 V
2 V
8 V
N D
N D
N D
* A n a ly z e r
P o w e r O F F
J 1 1
1 & 2 P o w e r C o n n e c to rs
J 3
N C
5
4
V
C D M
T o
M A M
S P M
C P U /D C M
2
D
D
B L O C K D IA G R A M
P o w e r D is tr ib u tio n M o d u le P o w e r C o n n e c to r s
1
4
D
D IS T R IB U T IO N
J 2
6
G N D
-1 5 V
G N
G N
+ 1 5
G N
-1 5
J 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
+ 5 V
+ 5 V
E 4
+ 1 2 V D C
E 3
-1 2 V D C
G N D
D
-1 5 V D C
G N D _ A T X
+ 2 8 V
G N D
+ 2 8 V
G N D
G N
G N
+ 1 5
G N
-1 5
G N D
G N D
+ 1 5 V
+ 1 2 V _ A T X
J 2 6
1
P O W E R
+ 5 V
+ 5 V
G N D
T o
S D M C
J 5
T o
M P M
1
* * T o D a ta S ta tio n
T o
S H M 1
S H M 2
J 2 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
+ 5
S T
S T
S T
V _
A T
A T
A T
A T
U S
U S
U S
2
3
R 2
X
0
1
2
1
S T A T U S 3
N C
N C
N C
+ 5 V _ A T X
2
3
4
5
N C
S S R
F C M
6
J 3
T o
S D M s -J 9
1 0
N O
J 4
N C
M o to r C o n tro l O u tp u t C o n n e c to r
J 3 -J 1 4
1
+ 2 8 V
T o
M D M
2
+ 5 V
3
M 0 I0
M 0 I1
M 0 P h 0
In p
P o w
F ro
A P
u t
e r
m
S
M 0 P H 1
T O
C D B
5
6
7
F B +
F B -
8
9
3
J 8
T o
S h e a r V a lv e
D r iv e r - J 2
3
J 1 1
J 5
1
6
3
5
4
F ro m
P D M -J 1 8
+ 5 V
G N D
J 1 4
+ 5 V
G N D
1
3
J 1 2
T o U tr a s o n ic
S h o r t S a m p le
S e n s o r (S 3 ) - J 3
T o
O v e rp re s s u re
S e n s o r
1
3
G N D
G N D
+ 1 5 .5 V
+ 2 8 V
+ 2 8 V
+ 5 V
G N D
1
T o U tr a s o n ic
S h o r t S a m p le
S e n s o r (S 1 ) - J 3
T o S h o r t S a m p le
S e n s o r (S 2 ) - J 1
4
+ 2 8 V
+ 1 5 .5 V
G N D
1
2
P o w e r C o n n e c to rs
+ 5 V
G N D
9
T o
S D M 9 -J 1 0
T y p ic a l M P M
T o
S D M D
3
1
+ 5 V
G N D
J 1 0
3
2
+ 5 V
G N D
1 0
N o te : P in c o n fig u r a tio n s o n t h e a s s e m b lie s th a t a r e n o t
s h o w n a re th e s a m e a s th o s e s h o w n .
9 H _ 9 0 4 9 a
S E N S O R B L O C K D IA G R A M
T y p ic a l F C M
E le c tr o d e
& V P M
R e a g e n t E m p ty
IF
D ilu e n t
E 1
E m
F lu id S e n s o r In p u t
+
F L U ID
L IN E
E le c tr o d e
E 2
-
E 4
W B C
In - L in e S e n s o r s
S B
J 1
/ S h e a th E 5
1
p ty
L y s e E m p ty
E 6
4
6
E x te r n a l W a s te F u ll
1
J 7
D ilu e n t / S h e a th
( Q u ie t) R e s e r v o ir 1 L e v e l
1
J 8
J 6
D ilu e n t / S h e a th
( N o is y ) R e s e r v o ir 2 L e v e l
1
L y s e R e s e r v o ir L e v e l
1 0
1 1
1 1
1 3
J 1 0
1
1 0
1 3
G N D
1 5
J 9
A la r m
1
J 4
S h o r t S a m p le S e n s o r B o a r d ( S 2 )
T P 4
8
6
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
F C M
1
J 1 5
T y p ic a l S H M
+ 5 V
1
2
1
A G N D
J 1 3
3
J 9
3
M ix e r L ifte r U p S e n s o r
6
F o u rth T u b e S e n s o r
J 3
2
1
2 J 1 2
A G N D
3
2
2 J 1 1
3
+ 5 V
2
2
J 1
3
V a lv e C C W
6
4
V a lv e C W
3
D G N D
J 1
6
4
+ 5 V
D G N D
1
T P 1
J 2
3
1
V a lv e C C W
7
D r iv e
In
A G N D
1
1
J 1 0
V P M
J 1 1
R o ta r y V a lv e S e n s o r s
C lo s e d M o d e S e n s o r
2
J 4
O p e n M o d e S e n s o r
2
J 5
M D M
O p tic a l S e n s o r In p u t
+ 5 V
J 4 -J 5
2
In
3
A G N D
3
V a lv e C W
6
D r iv e
2 5 k H z L E D
7
1
S h e a r V a lv e D r iv e r M o d u le
L im it S e n s o r B o a r d
# 2 W e t
5
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
T y p ic a l M D M
1
A G N D
3
V a c u u m A c c u m u la to r
O v e r flo w S e n s o r s
V a c u u m # 1 W e t
4
8
J 1 1
2 5 k H z L E D
In
3
6
8
+ 5 V
3
+ 5 V
1
In
1
2
J 1 0
4
T h ir d T u b e S e n s o r
J 1 1
S H M 2
M ix e r H e a d H o m e S e n s o r
V a c u u m
+ 5 V
1
U ltr a s o n ic S h o r t
S a m p le S e n s o r
B o a rd (S 3 )
J 3
J 1 4
2
In
T u b e S e n s o r In p u t
9
U . S . F o u rth R a c k S e n s o r
3
2
In
7
D G N D
U . S . F ifth R a c k S e n s o r
J 1 6
H T R 2
5
6
J 9
3
A G N D
U ltr a s o n ic S h o r t
S a m p le S e n s o r
B o a rd (S 1 )
A la r m
2
T P 2
R e f
H T R 1
In
4
3
L o a d S id e E m p ty S e n s o r
J 2
1
2
3
S a m p le L o a d e r S e n s o r s
1 5
T C M
+ 5 V
3
C o v e r S e n s o r
6
1
2
S H M 1
9
T u b e H e ig h t S e n s o r ( S 1 )
+ 5 V
J 9 -J 1 0
J 1 0
C D M 2
R e a g e n t & W a s te L e v e l S e n s o rs
W B C
J 2 6
4
G N D
6
T u b e H e ig h t S e n s o r ( S 2 )
2
O p tic a l S e n s o r In p u t
3
G S 1 H o m e S e n s o r
1
2
E 8
H G B L y s e E m p ty
T y p ic a l S H M
A s p ir a tio n T o w e r S e n s o r s
J 8
6
7
O v e rp re s s u re S e n s o r
N O
+ 5 V
G N D
2
3
J 1 0
9 H _ 9 0 5 0 a
M E A S U R E M E N T B L O C K D IA G R A M
T P 1
J 1
A m p lifie r s
6
J 1 0
4
L in
A m p lifie r s
T P 3
T P 2
A G N D
0 º P h o to d io d e
P re a m p
L o g
A m p lifie r s
2
C H
C H
C H
C H
C H
C H
T P 8
A m p lifie r s
J 1
6
1 0 º P h o to d io d e
P re a m p
J 1 2
4
L in
A m p lifie r s
1
1
7
5
3
7
3
9
1 1
5
9
1 1
C H
C H
C H
C H
C H
C H
1 L in
1 L o g
2 L in
2 L o g
3 L in
4 L in
P e a k
H o ld
C ir c u its
J 7
A m p lifie r
M U X
3
1
A D C 3
2 T o C P U /D C M
T P 4
L o g
A m p lifie r s
T P 7 T P 1
2
F C M
T P 9
H G B
F lo w
C e ll
A G N D
A G N D
T P 2
J 2
A m p lifie r s
A G N D
in
o g
in
o g
in
in
J 6
A G N D
T P 2
P M T
1 L
1 L
2 L
2 L
3 L
4 L
J 1 5
A G N D
T P 1
A G N D
S P M
M A M
4
J 1 3
4
L in
A m p lifie r s
T P 5
H G B V o lta g e
J 1 8
3
2
L E D
C u rre n t
A m p lifie r
1
M U X
4
A G N D
A m p lifie r
8
8
1
A D C 1
2 T o C P U /D C M
3
5
A G N D
T P 3
V D Y N /-1 0 0
J 2 5
A m p lifie r
J 2 4
1 A D C 4
2
F ro m
V P M
T P 1
9 0 º P M T
P re a m p
2
A G N D
T P 2
J 2
A m p lifie r s
P M T
4
J 1 4
4
L in
A m p lifie r s
T P 6
T P 3
V D Y N /-1 0 0
8
8
T P 2
T P 1
AG N D
9 0 º D P M T
P re a m p
2
+ 1 0 V R e fe re n c e
A G N D
9 H _ 9 0 5 1 a
SOLENOID CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
SDM3
J1
J2
J3
Solenoid Data /
+5V/5V Ret.
J9 J4
J3
J6
J7
J8
CLK
J1
FCM
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
Spare
CS Vent Trap Drain (WC-4)
CS Probe Drain (WC-4)
CS Vent Trap Vent
CLK
J4
J1
J9 J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J10 J7
J8
Peripheral
Bus
J16
CPU/DCM
J17 J1
ON/OFF
J7
J8
CW/CCW
From
PDM
J6
MDM
DC
Rotary
Valve
Motor
J5
SDM5
J1
J9 J2
J3
Shear Valve Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
J6
Sample Aspiration Vacuum
Shear Valve Drain (WC-4)
Open Sample Probe Drain (WC-4)
Open Sample Probe Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush (NC)
Spare
WC-2 VAC 2 Supply
WC-2 PRESS 1 Supply
J4
J5
J10 J6
J7
J8
From
FCM
J3
J4
5-1 HGB Flow Cell Vent
5-2 Staging Pump Input
5-3 Enable/Disable Control
HTR-1 (HGB/NOC)
5-4 RBC/PLT Sample Staging
5-5 WBC (WOC) Sample Staging
5-6 Optical Flow Cell Output
5-7 Optical Flow Cell Drain
5-8 Enable/Disable Control
HTR-2 WBC (WOC)
+28V
5 +15.5V
4
GND
3
1
1
2
To
3
5 SDMA
6
7
J6
J2
HTR-1
HTR-2
J6
CDM2
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
J2
J1
J1
J3
4-1 NOC Sample Staging
4-2 WBC (WOC) Bubble Mixing
4-3 RBC/PLT Bubble Mixing
4-4 HGB/NOC Bubble Mixing
4-5 WBC Lyse Reservoir VAC 1
4-6 WBC Lyse Reservoir PRESS 3
J1
J2
SDM1
J19
CDM Connectors
J1
J2
J3
J9 J4
J5
J6
TCM
CLK
J2
CDM1
J1
J2
J4
J5
J6
J10
J10
J15
J16
SDM4
3-1 WC-4 VAC 1 Supply
3-2 WC-4 PRESS 1
3-3 RBC/HGB Diluent/Sheath
Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Fill
3-4 Closed Probe Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush (NC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
On CLK A
Hi CLK A
On CLK B
Hi CLK B
On CLK C
Hi CLK C
On CLK D
Hi CLK D
Reset
J2
1
2
3 To
5 SDMB
6
7
J4
1
2
To
3
5 SDMC
6
7
SDM6
J1
J9 J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J10 J7
J8
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
6-1 Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 VAC 1
6-2 Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 VAC 1
6-3 Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 PRESS 3
6-4 Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 PRESS 2
6-5 Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Reservoir 2 Output (NC)
6-6 Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Reservoir 1 Output (NC)
6-7 WC-1 PRESS 1
6-8 WC-1 Vent
J1
J9 J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J10 J7
J8
SDM2
RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber Drain
Sample Injection Syringe Diluent/Sheath(noisy)
WBC Lyse Reservoir Output (NC)
HGB Lyse Syringe Output
WBC Lyse Syringe Output
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe HGB/NOC Dilution
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe RBC/PLT Dilution
Main HGB Lyse Supply (NC)
J5
1
2
To
3
5 SDMD
6
7
SDM9
9-1 Optical Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (noisy) Flow
9-2 WBC (WOC) Chamber/WOC Heater Drain (WC-3)
9-3 HGB Flow Cell Drain (WC-3)
9-4 HGB Flow Cell Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
9-5 RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber Diluent/Sheath (quiet) Flush
9-6 WBC (WOC) Chamber/WOC Heater WBC Lyse Flush
9-7 WC-3 VAC 1
9-8 WC-3 PRESS 1
J1
J9 J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J10 J7
J8
VPM
J17 J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
SHM1 Aspiration Tower
RS-485 Bus
RS-485 Bus
J16 J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
FCM Connectors
V1 (7-1) ACC 1, PRESS 1 Vent
V4 (7-2) ACC 4, VAC 1 Vent
V2 ACC 2, PRESS 2 Supply
V3 ACC 3, PRESS 3 Supply
V5 ACC 5, VAC 2 (Variable) Supply
GS2 Stop Solenoid
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
On/Off
SHM2 Sample Loader
V1 Rack Advance
J1
J16
V2 Load Side Cross Transfer
J2
V3 Mixer Lift
J3
V4 Mixer Bladders
J4
V5 Unload Side Cross Transfer
J5
Spare
J6
Spare
J7
Spare
J8
J1
SHM Solenoid Connector
+28V
J1-J8
R1-R7
DS1-DS7
Driver
On CLK 1
Hi CLK 1
On CLK 2
Hi CLK 2
On CLK 3
Hi CLK 3
On CLK 4
Hi CLK 4
Reset
1
1
2
3
4
To
5
6 CDM1
7
8
9
15
J3
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
+5V
1
2
3
4
To
5
6 SDMs
7
8
9
10
SDM Connectors & Driver Outputs
J9
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+28V
Q1-Q8
TP1
Hi/Lo
CR1-CR8
Driver
2
AGND
J2
On CLK 5
Hi CLK 5
On CLK 6
Hi CLK 6
Reset
AGND
1
2
3
To
4 CDM2
9
15
J4
+28V
+15.5V
UR RET
On CLK 9
Hi CLK 9
Reset
R1-R8
DGND
DGND
1
2
3
To
5 SDM9
6
7
+15.5V
J10
1
2
3
5
6
7
+28V
TP2
+15.5V
UR RET
On CLK
Hi CLK
Reset
DS1-DS8
On/Off
Driver
J1-J8
Solenoid Drive
1
2
9H_9052b
MOTOR CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
MPM Stepper Motor Control
Aspiration Tower Motor Control
MPM Serial Link
J6
CPU/DCM
J2
MPM
J1 CDB J2
A
Sample Injection Syringe
J4
J1 CDB J2
B
HGB Lyse Syringe
PH0 1
PH0 2
J5
J1 CDB J2
C
WBC Lyse Syringe
J6
J1 CDB J2
D
RBC/HGB Diluent Syringe
J13
J1 CDB J2
E
Open Probe
J8
J1 CDB J2
G
Microprocessor
&
Digital Control
Discharge
Discharge
Complete
Ramping
A/D
Converter
J3
FB+
8
FB-
9
TO
CDB
Digital Control Bus
J2
MPM
Serial
Link
M0
Phase
Control
Latch
J3
6
M0
TO Current
CDB Control
M0 PH1
7
Latch
M0 PH0
M0 I0
M0 I1
J3
4
M1-M11
TO Control
CDB Latches
5
J4-J14
PH1 4
5
PH1 6
J8
Sample Staging Pump
Barcode Spin Motor
+28V 1
Typical MPM Motor Control Output Connector
J3-J14
1
+28V
2
+5V
3
M0 I0
4
M0 I1
5 TO
M0 PH0
6 CDB
M0 PH1
7
FB+
8
FB9
DC
Shear Valve Motor Control
J8
FCM
J2
+5V
1
3
1
3
DGND
4
5
CW/CCW
On/Off
4
5
Shear
Valve
Driver
Module
TO
MPM
7
2
3
1
8
9
Stepper
Motor
Phase 0
Driver
Stepper
Motor
Phase 1
Driver
J7 2
On/Off
2 J2
+28V
+5V
TP1
GND
FB+
FB-
FB+
FB-
Winding
Voltage
Feedback
(Diagnostics)
DC
CW/CCW
Rotary Valve Motor
2 J1
DC
2
J2
MA
MB
PH0
MB
- Drive
1
MDM
J8 2
PH0 1
MA
3
+ Drive
J14
10
Vacuum & Pressure Pump Control
Motor
2
PRM
F1
PH1
1
Rotary Valve Motor Control
SDM
Chopper Driver Board
J4
Shear Valve Motor
CDB Block Diagram
J1
PH0
6
I0
4
I1
5
Motor
PH0 2
Driver 2
MPM Motor Control Block Diagram (Motor 0)
Mixer Stepper Motor
PH0 1
Motor
PH1 4
PH1
J9
J13
SHM2
SHM1
J7
Sample Loader Motor Control
GS1 Stepper Motor
J3
PH1
PH1
+5VDC
4
5
R2
J18
1
VPM 4
3
+5VDC
R10
J1
Pressure Pump On
1
Pressure Pump On
4
3
J4
1 +28VDC
2 GND
Pressure Pump
J2
DC
1
2
3
Vacuum Pump
J3
ISO2
MP
R3
ISO1
R9
1
2
DC
3
9H_9053b
System Flow Diagrams
Links
Diagnostic Flow System Diagram
9H_9056.PDF
Diagnostic Flow System Diagram (Color)
9H_9058.PDF
Flow Panel Diagram
9h_9057.PDF
Integrated Auto Loader, Sample Processor Flow Diagram 9H_9054.PDF
Vac/Press Supply Flow Diagram
9H_9055.PDF
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-111) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
INTEGRATED SAMPLE LOADER, SAMPLE PROCESSOR FLOW DIAGRAM
S2 1.0" /
2.54 cm
To Ultrasonic Short
Sample Sensor (S1)
C1
R4
3x 9340955
Modified Lengths
Torque to 32 ozf in /
0.226 Nm
2.50" /
6.35 cm
Rotary
Valve Block
Y543 4.0" /
10.16 cm
Front
9400226
Vent /
Liquid
Isolator
AIR
WC-4
WC-4
Back
1
VAC 1
5.70" /
14.98 cm
L
DI
2.7" /
6.86 cm
S2 1.0" /
2.54 cm
N1 29.0" /
73.66 cm
W
N1 24.0" /
60.96 cm
C1
NOTE: Tubing Should
be Against Port.
PR
ES
S
4
C-
1
DI
L
S2 1.0" /
2.54 cm
9341074
Multi-Port Coupler-2
Sample Loader
N1 30.5" /
77.47 cm
Y532 1.0" /
2.54 cm
N1 26.0" /
66.04 cm
Y633 12.0" /
30.48 cm
PRESS 1
Closed Tube
Probe / Wash
Block
Open Tube
Probe / Wash
Block
R2
S2 0.8" /
2.03 cm
N2 9.0" /
22.86 cm
VAC 1
R2
N1 2.0" /
5.08 cm
N2 11.0" /
27.94 cm
N2 6.0" /
15.24 cm
Rack Advance
Load Side
Cross Transfer
Unload Side
Cross Transfer
N2 14.0" /
35.56 cm
N2 2.0" /
5.08 cm
Mixer Lift
Tube
Gripper
F3
N1 10.0" /
25.40 cm
C1
V1
2
FO
V2
V5
V3
V4
3
1
1
FO " / FO
/
FO
0
0" m
.
6. c m
4 c
N 2 5. 24
N 2 0. 16
1
"/
1
CV3
25 cm
.
7 2
CVO 1
N 2 8. 4
1
FO
3
REG
FO
1
N2 1.0" /
2.54 cm
N2
5.0" /
12.7 cm
T9
R1
N1 12.0" /
30.48 cm
Y535 15.0" /
38.10 cm
Sample Loader Manifold
Y535 26.0" /
66.04 cm
9H_9054d
VAC / PRESS SUPPLY FLOW DIAGRAM
Y634 11.0" / 27.94
cm
Y6.0" / 15.24 cm
Y635 7.0" / 17.78 cm
CV
CLP2
Y638 1.5" / 3.81 cm
CLP2
Y638 9.5" / 24.13 cm
Y635 2.0" /
5.06 cm
Y638 4.5" /
11.43 cm
T3
PS5
B A
VAC 2
Vacuum
Y638 1.5" /
3.81 cm
PS4
VAC 1
Vacuum
D
B
Y635 4.5" /
11.43 cm
Y635 4.0" /
10.16 cm
Y631 14.5" /
36.83 cm
A
B
C
B
A
Y13.0" /
33.02 cm
C
9211734
ACC 5
VAC 2
B A PS1
IN
C5
C5
IN
C5
Y635 17.0" /
43.18 cm
C5
F1
V2
Y631 7.0" /
17.78 cm
Pump 1
(Vacuum)
S2 4.0" /
10.16 cm
Y633
1.0" /
2.54 cm
Y5 1.8" /
4.57 cm
Y634 2.5" /
6.35 cm
CV
R2
CLP2
T4
Y633 1.0" / 2.54
cm
Y638 15.0 /
38.10 cm
Y635 6.0" /
15.24 cm
Y635
5.0" /
12.70 cm
CLP2
Y5 24.0" /
60.96 cm
S2 4.0" /
10.16 cm
T3
CV
T3
CLP2
Y634
12.0" /
30.48 cm
V5
T4
(7-2)
Yellow
D
IN
OUT
REG
C
ACC 2
PRESS 2
Y634 1.5" /
3.81 cm
P1
9211732
A
P1
Y635 9.0" /
22.86 cm
SY 3.0" /
7.62 cm
SY 8.0" /
20.32 cm
T7
A
C
D
ACC 1
PRESS 1
Y634 1.5" /
3.81 cm
P1
Y633 15.0" /
38.10 cm
Y633
17.5" /
44.45 cm
B
9211732
Y634 1.5" /
3.81 cm
B
OUT
OUT
Y634 4.0" /
10.16 cm
IN
REG
CLP2
Y633 5.0" /
12.70 cm
Y633 6.0" /
15.24 cm
CV CLP2
Orange
Y634 3.5" /
8.89 cm
CLP2
T3
Y633 3.0"
7.62 cm
V1
V4
Y633 7.5" / 19.05 cm
CLP2
(7-1)
Y631 21.0" /
53.34 cm
CLP2
3
S1 10.0" /
25.40 cm
Vent
VAC 2
S
P1
CV
Y5 24.0" /
60.96 cm
R2
R4
CLP2
T5
Y633 7.0" /
17.78 cm
ES
9601220
VPM PCB
OUT
OUT
Pump 2
(Pressure)
Y638 7.0" /
17.78 cm
Y638 1.5" /
3.81 cm
V3
CLP2
PR
PRESS 1
(Pressure)
S2 1.5" /
3.81 cm
CLP2
E
E
E
REG
OUT
IN
Brown
OUT
REG
IN
ACC 4
VAC 1
9211734
PRESS 2
(Pressure)
Green
IN
ACC 3
PRESS 3
R4
Y5 3.0" /
7.62 cm
CV
C
OUT
REG
Gray
PS2
Vent
Vent
A
PS3
B A
PRESS 3
(Pressure)
B A
R2
P1
9211732
B A
Y635 4.5" /
11.43 cm
CLP2 CV CLP2
T3
VAC 1
CV
1
CLP2
PRESS 1
VAC 1
Y635 19.5" /
49.53 cm
PRESS 1
Drain ACC-5
Y631 28.0" /
71.12 cm
Y635 25.0" /
63.50 cm
Drain ACC-4
Y634 16.0" /
40.64 cm
SS 2
PRE
Waste
3109000
MULT-PORT Coupler-1
VAC/PRESS Supply
9H_9055b
.007
orifice
9H_9056c
Y1
CLP
2
CV2
WC3
97
Y630
8.0
(20.32)
S2 0.75 (1.90)
Y630
10.0
(25.40)
Y633 7.5 (19.05)
R2
96
Y630 1.5
(3.81)
P3
V1
P2
DI
L
WAST
E
Y630 6.0
(15.24)
P1
L4
Y630 6.0
(15.24)
Y1
Y633 12.0
(30.48)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
Y638 27.0
(68.58)
Y632 37.0
(93.98)
Y630 1.0
(2.54)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T2
T1
T1
N1
2.3
(5.84)
Y630
21.0
(53.34)
Y630
27.0
(68.58)
Y1
Y1
Y630 1.0
(2.54)
T1
CLP
2
CV2
CLP
2
Y63
CLP
2
N1 5.0
(12.70)
N1 6.0
Y63(15.24)
7
R2
R2
R2
A
Y532
1.0
(2.54)
P2
WBC
LYSE
A
R2
WC-4
B
45
T1
P1
S2
Y637
1.0
2.0
(2.54)
(5.08
)
6
PRESS
3
46
S2 1.3
(3.30)
Y622
5.2
(13.21)
WBC
LYSE
RESERVOIR
C
N1 10.0
(25.40)
D
R2
C B
PRESS
1
WC-2
D
VAC 1
R2
VAC 2
CLP
2
T5
Y633 22.0
(55.88)
Y638 36.0
(91.44)
Y634 41.0
(104.14)
Y630
9.5
Y630 9.5
(24.13) (24.13)
Y633 48.0
(121.92)
Y630 16.0
(40.64)
CLP
CV2 2
N1
10.0
(25.4)
T1
S2 1.3
(3.30)
34
L1
T1
N1 0.6
(0.15)
C1
S2 1.5
(3.81)
HGB LYSE
CLP
2
CV2
S2 1.3
(3.30)
N1 6.5
(16.51)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
C2
L2
Y535 18.0
(45.72)
N1 10.5
(26.67)
Y535 17.8
(45.21)
N1 2.2
(5.59)
S2 1.3
Y622
T1
(3.30)
0.5
(1.27)
C1
Y637
33
5.0
(12.7)
R2
CV2
18
C2
N1 9.5 (34.13)
N1 3.8
(9.65)
LL
1
27
37
Y622 7.0
(17.78)
N1
2.0
(5.08)
N1
1.0
(2.54)
14
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T1
Y522
1.0
(2.54)
N1 6.3
(16.00)
T1
CV1
CLP
2
17
S2 1.3
(3.30)
N1 11.5
(29.21)
S2 3.0
(7.62)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
36
S2 1.3
(3.30)
N1 8.3
(21.08)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
38
P1
Y630 30.0
(76.20)
CV2
L1
N1 23.0 (58.42)
Y630 13.0
(15.24)
Y630 4.0 (10.16)
Y630 5.5 (13.97)
Y632 59.0
(149.86)
Y633
R2
Y63
5
Y63
1
WASTE
Y635 23.0
(58.42)
Y633 21.0
(53.34)
T5
Y632 11.5
(29.21)
3109001
MULTI-PORT COUPLER-2
VAC/PRESS SUPPLY
Y630 6.0
(15.24)
Y632 59.0
(149.86)
WASTE
T5
Y631 42.0
Y635 23.0 (106.68)
(58.42)
Y635 48.0
(121.9)
HGB LYSE
Y635 19.0
(48.26)
Y637 12.5
(31.75)
Y635 19.0
(48.26)
WBC LYSE
DILUENT/
SHEATH
Y630 21.0
(53.34)
WASTE
DRAIN ACC-4
DRAIN ACC-5
N1
1.5
(3.81)
DILUEN
T
CLP
2
T1
AIR
T2 Y535
1.4
(3.56)
Y535 9.0
(22.86)
L1
L1
WASTE
Y638 7.0
(17.78)
T5
1
T1
CLP
2
Y635 2.5
(6.35)
T5
N1 1.4
(3.55)
L1
N1 20.3
(51.56)
L2
LL
1
32
R1
S2
1.5
(3.81)
LL
1
15
L1
Y535 9.0
(22.86)
S2
1.0
(2.54)
CV2
Y630 0.75
(1.90)
VAC 2
VAC 1
VAC 1
R1
N1
1.0
(2.54)
N1 20.2
(51.31)
N1 21.7
(55.12)
Y63
2
R2
Y630 13.0
(15.24)
PRESS 3
PRESS 2
PRESS 1
PRESS 1
S2
1.5
(3.81)
L1
31
T1
C1
CV2
S2 1.5 (3.81)
N1 5.0 (12.7)
N1 9.0
(22.86)
C1
R1
N1 8.3
(21.08)
C D A B
S2 3.5
(8.89)
T1
S2
0.75
(1.90)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
Y543 7.13
(18.11)
22
N1
2.0
(5.08)
23
L2
LL
1
T1
B
WC1
Y543 12.5
(31.75)
L1
98
T6
N1
0.5
(1.27)
28
TO ROTARY
VALVE BLOCK
ULTRASONI
C
SHORT
SAMPLE
SENSOR
(S1)
Y543 7.75
(19.69)
Y543
1.5
(3.81)
L1
26
RBC/
HGB
DILUENT
C1
L1
L1 T6 N1 2.0
(5.08)
S2 1.5
(3.81)
42
25
Y627 12.0
(30.48)
Y626 2.0 (5.08)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
24
WBC
LYSE
56
N1
1.3
(3.30)
Y626 6.0
(15.24)
Y626 9.25
(23.49)
S1 5.0
(12.7)
WBC/
(WOC)
WOC
HEATER
N1 7.5
(19.05
)
L2
HGB
HEATER
Y532 1.0
(2.54)
S2
1.0
(2.54)
A
R1
L1
N1 8.5
(21.59)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
N1 1.0
(2.54)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
C
D
92
S2 1.0
(2.54)
N1 2.0
(5.08)
R1
N1
10.5
T1 (26.67)
FRON
T
VALVE
T1
S2
1.5
(3.81)
L1
N1
3.7
(9.39)
L1
S2
1.0
(2.54)
N1 5.0
(12.7)
S2
1.0
(2.54)
N1 3.8
(9.65)
HGB
LYSE
L1
N1 1.4
(3.55)
S2
N1 4.0
2.0
(10.16
) T1 (5.08)
T1
43
SAMPLE
INJECTIO
N
L1
57
44
N1 1.8
(4.57)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 0.6
(1.52)
S2 0.6
(1.52)
L1
Y532 1.0
(2.54)
N1
0.8
(0.20)
T1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
N1 9.0
(22.86)
94
L1
N1 13.0
(33.02)
S2
1.3
(3.30)
N1 6.0
(15.24)
0.7 (1.78)
S1 5.0
(12.70)
S2 0.6
(1.52)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
N1 5.0
(12.7)
21
Y532 12.3
(31.24)
L1
S2
1.0
(2.54)
L1
Y543 2.3
(5.84)
N1 8.2
(20.82)
R1
CLP2
L2
Y622 3.5 (8.89)
L1
CV
2
T1
CV1
N1 15.0
(38.1)
11
C1
L1
C1
L1
C1
REAR
VALVE
C1
12
Y631 42.0
(106.68)
Y630 0.75
(1.90)
T1
N1 11.0
(27.94)
13
L1
R2
L1
S3 2.0
(5.08)
P2
Y635 11.0 (27.9)
CLP
2
N1 4.7
(11.94
)
S2
1.3
(3.84)
T1
N1 0.8
(0.02)
55
L1
68
C3
CLP
CV2 2
C1
41
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.5 (3.81)
ACC-5
ACC-4
S2
1.0
(2.54)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
C3
Y630 1.0 (2.54)
CLP
2
Y532 P2
1.0
(2.54)
T3
Y631 38.0
(96.52)
P2
T1
T3 N1
1.3
(3.30)
54
L1
CV1
L1
T1 N1 1.3
(3.30)
N1 8.2
(20.82)
N1 6.0
(15.24)
C1
S1
5.0
(12.70
)
N1
2.30
(5.84)
93
T1 N1 1.3
(3.30)
SHORT
SAMPLE
SENSOR
(S2)
N1 9.5
(24.13)
N1 1.0
T1 (2.54)
N1 2.0
(5.08)
B CA
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T3
F2
CV2
N1
0.8
(0.20)
N2
1.0
(2.54)
L1
67
S2 0.75
(1.90)
T1
Y543 4.10
(10.41)
ULTRASONI
C
SHORT
SAMPLE
SENSOR
(S3)
HGB
S2 1.3
(3.30)
5
S2 0.75
(1.90)
N1 30.0
(76.20)
S2
N1 2.0
(5.08)
N1 5.3
(13.46
)
R1
R
1
4
T1
N1 3.5 (8.89)
Vent
ACC
T1
95
R
1
3
N1
2.3
(5.84)
T1
N1 0.6
(1.52)
S2 1.3
T1 (3.30)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
N1
1.5
(3.81)
L1
R2
N1
1.5
(3.81)
LL
2
Y633 7.5 (19.05)
Y632 37.0
(93.98)
C A BDE
R1
S2 0.6 (1.52)
N1 13.3
(33.78)
N1 13.5
(34.29)
N1 10.5
(26.67)
N1 1.7
(4.32)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
C1
S2 1.0
(2.54)
C1
S2
1.0
(2.54)
C1
L1
N1 1.0
(2.54)
64
N1 7.0
(17.78)
C1
Y635 39.0
(99.06)
S2
3.5
(8.89
) S2
1.3
(3.30)
2
L1
CV1
T3
C1
S2
1.0
(2.54)
R2
65
R
1
N1 4.5
(11.43)
Y634 11.0
(27.94)
Y635
3.3
(8.38)
66
C1
RBC/
PLT
C1
R
1
1
N1 1.0
(2.54)
N1 1.6
(4.06)
63
L1
N1 4.0
(10.16)
T3
S2 1.3
C1 (3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
91
L1
L1
R
1
52
C1
S2
1.3
(3.30)
R2
T4
L1
51
62
S2
5.5
(13.97
)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T4 61
N1 12.5
(31.75)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
L1
N1
3.0
(7.62)
Y632 59.0
(149.86)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
N1 7.5
(19.05
)
S2 0.6
(1.52)
N1 20.0
(50.8) N1 5.2
(13.21)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T5
B
4
R4
Y543 1.5
(3.81)
Y543 7.75
(19.69)
R6
S2
CLP
2
Y632 2.5
(6.35)
Y54 7.5 (19.05)
B
4
S2 0.6
(1.52)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
CLP
2
Y632 1.0
(2.54)
CLP
2
CV2
Y54 7.5 (19.05)
Y54 8.75
(22.23)
Y54 7.5 (19.05)
B
4
L1
.082 DIA
TUBE
B RINS
VEN C
E
T
A
SAMPL .050 DIA
B
E TUBE
WBC WOC MIXING
4
CHAMBER
Y54 11.5
(29.51)
B
4
Y633
3.5
(8.89)
CLP
2
CV2
Y638 8.0
(20.32)
DILUENT/SHEATH
(QUIET)
RESERVOIR 1
Y632
3.0 (7.62)
DILUENT/SHEATH
(NOISY) RESERVOIR 2
Y632
5.0
(12.7)
Y632 2.0 (5.08)
L4
FLOW PANEL DIAGRAM
OPTICA
L
FLOW
CELL
S2 0.6
(1.52)
S2
0.75
(1.90)
Y636 12.0
(30.48)
N1 21.7
(55.12)
N1 20.3
(51.56)
REAGENT EMTPY
IN-LINE SENSORS
Y636 49.0
(124.46)
Y637 54.0
(137.16)
Y535 17.8
(45.21)
Y535 18.0
(45.72)
Y635 48.0
(121.92)
Y633 48.0
(121.92)
WC-4
WC-4
VAC 1
PRESS
1
N1 12.8
(32.51)
N1 20.2
(51.31)
1
AIR
DIL
WC-4
DIL
9341075
MULTI-PORT COUPLER-1
SAMPLE LOADER
9H_9057c
R2
FLOW PANEL DIAGRAM
L1
N1 1.0 (2.54)
64
N1 0.8
T1 (0.20)
C1
Vent
ACC
F2
T1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
67
T3
ACC-5
ACC-4
S2 1.0
(2.54)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
C3
68
C3
L1
S3 2.0 (5.08)
CV3
P2
C
D
A
98
B
97
R2
P2
Y635 11.0 (27.9)
S2 0.6 (1.52)
S2 0.6 (1.52)
S2 0.6 (1.52)
57
L1
94
C1
N1 4.0
(10.16) T1
Y532 1.0 (2.54)
N1 3.7
(9.39)
WOC HEATER
S1 5.0 (12.7)*
N1 2.0 (5.08)
N1 11.0 (27.94)
Y543 7.13 (18.11)
A17
S2 1.0
(2.54)
92
S2 1.0
N1 2.0 (2.54)
(5.08)
N1 1.0
(2.54)
R1
S2 2.0
(5.08)
N1 7.5
(19.05)
L1
56
N1 8.5 (21.59)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
C1
Y543 12.5 (31.75)
L1
T1
S2 0.75
(1.90)
C D A B
96
CV2
WC-3
Y630 8.0
(20.32)
Y630 10.0
(25.40)
A18
22
C1
Y633 7.5 (19.05)
A16
C1
T1
S2 1.0 (2.54)
L1
A15
L1
93
T1
CV1
N1 0.8
(0.20)
T1
L1
S2
1.3
(3.30)
L1
N1 1.4 (3.55) S2 1.5
(3.81)
L1
N1 5.0 (12.70)
N1 9.0 (22.86)
L1
N1 23.0 (58.42)
A19
A20
S2 0.75 (1.90)
CV2
R2
CLP2
T5
N2 1.0
(2.54)
N1 1.0 (2.54)
T1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
C1
L1
S2 1.3 N1 4.5
(3.30) (11.43)
L1
L1
N1 0.8 (0.02) S2 1.3
(3.84)
21
S2 3.5 (8.89)
WC-1
B CA
N1 4.7
(11.94)
55
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T1
R1
5
T1
L1
Y532 1.0 P2
(2.54)
A14
N1 2.0 (5.08)
N1 5.3
(13.46)
R1
4
T1
T3
Y631 38.0
(96.52)
Y635 39.0
(99.06)
N1 1.3
(3.30)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
CA BDE
N1
1.5
(3.81)
LL2
T3
L1 N1 1.5 (3.81)
R2
Y633 3.5 (8.89)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
R1
S2 1.5 (3.81)
Y632 37.0 (93.98)
C1
Y633 7.5 (19.05)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
N1 3.5 (8.89)
C1
S2 1.0
(2.54)
R1
3
54
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T1
T1
2
R1
N1 1.7
(4.32)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
N1 2.3
(5.84)
T1
N1 0.6
41
(1.52)
L1
CV1
95
A13
S2 0.75 (1.90)
N1 10.5 (26.67)
N1 13.0 (33.02)
T4
N1 13.3 (33.78)
N1 13.5 (34.29)
N1 9.0 (22.86)
C1
Y543 1.5 (3.81)
HGB
S2 1.3 (3.30)
C1
R1
1
N1 1.0
(2.54)
N1 1.6 (4.06)
R2
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.3
T3 (3.30)
N1 7.0 (17.78)
C1
RBC/
PLT
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2
3.5
(8.89)
S2 5.5
(13.97)
S2 1.3 (3.30) L1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
65
R1
C1
S2 0.6 (1.52)
C1
N1 5.0 (12.7)
66
L1
63
N1 3.0
(7.62)
Y634 11.0 (27.94)
Y635 3.3 (8.38)
R2
Y632 59.0 (149.86)
S2 1.3
(3.30)
T3
52
N1 4.0 (10.16)
C1
61
S2 1.3 (3.30)
91
A12
R6
L1
51
N1 7.5
(19.05)
T4
L1
S2
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
62
B4
B4
N1 20.0 (50.8)
N1 5.2 (13.21)
N1 12.5 (31.75) L1
S2 1.3
(3.30)
B4
WBC/(WOC)
Y632 2.5 (6.35)
Y543 7.75 (19.69)
RINSE
SAMPLE
.050 DIA TUBE
WBC WOC MIXING
CHAMBER
N1 6.0 (15.24)
T5
CLP2
S2 0.6 (1.52)
S2 0.6 (1.52)
A
S2 0.6 (1.52)
Y632
1.0 (2.54)
CV2
B4
0.7 (1.78)
S1 5.0
(12.70)
CLP2
CLP2
S2 1.3 (3.30)
CV2
B
C
VENT
B4
Y54 7.5 (19.05)
L1
.082 DIA TUBE
S2 11.0 (27.94)
Y54 7.5 (19.05)
Y54 8.75 (22.23)
Y54 7.5 (19.05)
S2 1.5 (3.81)
CLP2
DILUENT/SHEATH
(NOISY) RESERVOIR 2
DILUENT/SHEATH
(QUIET)
RESERVOIR 1
Y632
3.0 (7.62)
Y632 5.0 (12.7)
Y632 2.0 (5.08)
L4
Y638 8.0 (20.32)
OPTICAL
FLOW
CELL
Y635 2.5 (6.35)
*Critical Length x.xx±.05"
Y630 6.0 (15.24)
A4
A2
A1
A3
Y630
1.0 (2.54)
A5
Y638
7.0 (17.78)
A6
Y635
19.0 (48.26)
A7
Y630
1.5
(3.81)
A8
Y634
41.0 (104.14)
A9
A10 A11
9H_9057c_A
FLOW PANEL DIAGRAM
12
N1 15.0 (38.1)
L1
Y622 3.5 (8.89)
L1
L1
R1
S2 1.0
(2.54)
HGB
HEATER
= Critical Length x.xx ±.05"
B1
B5
B4
B3
B2
Y535 9.0 (22.86)
B6 B7 B8
Y627
12.0
(30.48)
B9
N1 6.5 (16.51)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
N1 2.3 (5.84)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
N1 9.5 (34.13)
Y622
5.2 (13.21)
CLP2
CV2
45
T1
N1 10.0 (25.4)
N1 6.0 (15.24)
R2
P1
B10
46
T1
WBC
LYSE
RESERVOIR
C1
R2
L1
N1 0.6 (0.15)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
34
18
T1 N1 10.0 (25.4)
Y622 7.0 (17.78)
C1
S2 1.5
(3.81)
17
T1
T1
C2
Y622 0.5
(1.27)
T1
Y637 5.0
(12.7)
Y522 1.0
(2.54)
33
N1 11.5 (29.21)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
N1 8.3 (21.08)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
C1
Y636
49.0
(124.46)
37
C2
R2
N1 23.0 (58.42)
T2
14
N1 2.2
(5.59)
S2 1.3 (3.30) T1
LL1
LL1
27
Y535 1.4
(3.56)
L2
Y535 18.0 (45.72)
N1 10.5 (26.67)
Y535 17.8 (45.21)
N1 3.8
(9.65)
LL1
AIR
36
L1
R2
Y637
2.0
(5.08
)
B11
R2
P1
S2 1.0
(2.54)
B12
P2
Y532 1.0
(2.54)
Y637
54.0
(137.15)
B13
B14
B15
N1 11.5 (29.21)
A20
T1
N1 2.0
(5.08)
N1 1.0
(2.54)
Y632 37.0
(93.98)
A19
L2
CV1
LL1
N1 5.0 (12.7)
T1
L1
L1
38
T2
Y535 9.0 (22.86)
N1 12.8 (32.51)
*
N1 1.0
(2.54)
N1 1.5
(3.81)
T1
N1 1.4
(3.55)
32
T1
15
L1
N1 20.3 (51.56)
R1
Y535 18.0 (45.72)
Y543 1.5
(3.81)
N1 21.7 (55.12)
N1 20.2 (51.31)
Y543 7.75
(19.69)
TO ROTARY
VALVE BLOCK
ULTRASONIC
SHORT
SAMPLE
SENSOR (S1)
S2 1.5
(3.81)
L1
N1 20.2 (51.31)
R1
S2 1.5
(3.81)
L2
31
T1
Y535 17.8 (45.21)
FRONT
VALVE
A18
42
N1 10.5
T1 (26.67)
N1 8.2 (20.82)
Y543 12.5 (31.75)
L1
L1
N1 2.0 (5.08)
N1 2.0
T6 (5.08)
S2 1.5 (3.81)
N1 0.5
(1.27)
T1
S2 1.0
(2.54)
23
28
L1 T6
S2 1.0
(2.54)
26
N1 20.3 (51.56)
Y543 2.3 (5.84)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
*
7.13
A17 Y543
(18.11)
N1 1.8 (4.57)
L1
N1
1.3
(3.30)
25
R1
N1 21.7 (55.12)
T1
L2
Y627 12.0 (30.48)
Y626 2.0 (5.08)
REAR
VALVE
N1 6.3 (16.00)
A16
44
24
WBC
LYSE
N1 11.0 (27.94)
43
N1 3.8 (9.65)
R1
L2
Y626 9.25 (23.49)
*
Y626 6.0 (15.24)
N1 2.30
(5.84)
C1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
C1
HGB
LYSE
CV1
C1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S1 5.0
(12.70)
SAMPLE
INJECTION
N1 1.0 (2.54)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
A15
N1 6.0 (15.24)
RBC/
HGB
DILUENT
A14
N1 9.5 (24.13)
N1 5.0 (12.70)
N1 8.2 (20.82)
N1 10.5 (26.67)
L1
S2 1.3 (3.30)
Y532 12.3 (31.24)
N1 5.0
(12.7)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
CLP2
S2 1.3 (3.30)
CV2
N1 8.3 (21.08)
SHORT
SAMPLE
SENSOR (S2)
11
S2 1.3 (3.30)
13
L1
Y532 1.0 (2.54)
S2
*
Y543 4.10 (10.41)
ULTRASONIC
SHORT
SAMPLE
SENSOR (S3)
A13
S2 3.0 (7.62)
A12
T1 N1 1.3 (3.30)
N1 1.3 (3.30)
S2 1.0
(2.54)
T1
Y543 7.75 (19.69)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
S2 0.75 (1.90)
N1 30.0 (76.20)
S2 1.3 (3.30)
R4
Y543 1.5 (3.81)
B16 B17
9H_9057b_B
FLOW PANEL DIAGRAM
A11
A4
A6
A5
A3
Y635
19.0
(48.26)
Y630
1.5
(3.81)
Y630 1.0 (2.54)
CLP2
CV2
CLP2
CLP2
Y630 0.75 (1.90)
Y1
A9
V1
P3
Y632 37.0 (93.98)
Y634
41.0
(104.14)
CLP2
CV2
Y633
7.5
(19.05)
P2
Y630 6.0
(15.24)
DIL
WASTE
P1
Y630 0.75 (1.90)
C1
Y630 30.0 (76.20)
CLP2
CV2
Y630 6.0 (15.24)
L4
Y630 21.0
(53.34)
Y630 27.0
(68.58)
Y1
Y630 1.0 (2.54)
CLP2
Y1
Y630 1.0 (2.54)
Y1
CV2
C2
CLP2
CV2
CLP2
C3
CLP2
Y630 13.0 (15.24)
Y638 27.0 (68.58)
C4
Y633 12.0 (30.48)
T5
Y630 13.0 (15.24)
T5
Y632 59.0 (149.86)
Y635 48.0 (121.92)
C5
Y633 48.0 (121.92)
C6
Y635 23.0 (58.42)
C7
Y633 21.0 (53.34)
C8
Y631 42.0 (106.68)
C9
Y630 16.0 (40.64)
Y630 4.0 (10.16)
Y630 5.5 (13.97)
CLP2
CV2
CLP2
Y633 22.0 (55.88)
T5
Y638 36.0 (91.44)
Y634 41.0 (104.14)
Y637 12.5 (31.75)
Y630 21.0 (53.34)
Y632 11.5 (29.21)
WASTE
DRAIN ACC-4
DRAIN ACC-5
1
VAC 2
VAC 1
VAC 1
Y635 19.0
(48.26)
Y635 19.0
(48.26)
T5
3109001
MULTI-PORT COUPLER-2
VAC/PRESS SUPPLY
Y631 42.0 (106.68)
Y635 23.0 (58.42)
Y635 48.0 (121.9)
Y630 6.0 (15.24)
WASTE
PRESS 3
PRESS 2
PRESS 1
PRESS 1
HGB LYSE
Y636 12.0 (30.48)
DILUENT/SHEATH
Y632 37.0 (93.98)
Y632 59.0 (149.86)
Y635 39.0 (99.06)
Y631 38.0 (96.52)
A1
Y638
7.0
(17.78)
A10
WBC LYSE
A2
A8
A7
REAGENT EMTPY
IN-LINE SENSORS
Y636 49.0 (124.46)
Y632 59.0 (149.86)
Y637 54.0 (137.16)
C10
C11
9H_9057a_C
FLOW PANEL DIAGRAM
Y636
49.0
(124.46)
B2
N1
21.7
(55.12)
B3
N1
20.3
(51.56)
B4
Y535
17.8
(45.21)
B5
N1
20.2
(51.31)
B6
Y535
18.0
(45.72)
B7
B8
B9
Y627 12.0 (30.48)
B1
N1
12.8
(32.51)
B11
A
C
Y632
B13
Y637
2.0
(5.08)
B10
R2
WC-4
N1
10.0
(25.40)
B12
D
A
B14
C B
Y637
54.0
(137.15)
WC-2
DILUENT
C1
C2
B
Y632 37.0 (93.98)
Y630 9.5 (24.13)
B15
D
N1
6.0
(15.24)
WBC
LYSE
HGB LYSE
B16
R2
N1
5.0
(12.70)
B17
Y636
C3
Y630 9.5 (24.13)
C4
Y638 27.0 (68.58)
PRESS 1
R2
PRESS 3
C7
Y635 23.0 (58.42)
Y633 48.0 (121.92)
C8
Y633 21.0 (53.34)
C9
Y631 42.0 (106.68)
C10
Y636 49.0 (124.46)
C11
Y637 54.0 (137.16)
Y630 9.5
(24.13)
VAC 2
WASTE
Y630 9.5 (24.13)
Y635
R2
Y631
Y631 42.0 (106.68)
C5
C6
Y635 48.0 (121.92)
R2
Y633
VAC 1
N1
11.5
(29.21)
WASTE
N1 12.8 (32.51)
N1 21.7 (55.12)
N1 20.2 (51.31)
N1 20.3 (51.56)
Y535 17.8 (45.21)
Y535 18.0 (45.72)
Y635 48.0 (121.92)
Y633 48.0 (121.92)
WC-4
WC-4
VAC 1
PRESS 1
1
AIR
DIL
WC-4
DIL
9341075
MULTI-PORT COUPLER-1
SAMPLE LOADER
9H_9057a_D
.007
orifice
9H_9058b
A1.01 Left Access (Front) Cover
Version - 201962-103_2783_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921291201
DOOR ASSY, LF ACCESS, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.01 Left Access (Front) Cover
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:05 min
Flat Blade Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power OFF.
Remove Left
Front Cover
1. Open the Left Front Cover.
2. Disconnect the ground wire from the instrument
chassis.
3. Use a flat blade (small) screwdriver to remove the
C-Clip [2] from the lower hinge.
Note
Retain the clip for reassembly. Be careful
when removing the C-Clip. The hinge
contains hardware, which can be lost.
4. Lift and remove the cover.
Reference
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Install Left Front Cover
1. Install in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
1
G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels
Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
A1.02 Right Access (Front) Cover
Version - 201962-103_2780_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921291101
DOOR ASSY, RF ACCESS, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.02 Right Access (Front) Cover
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:05 min
Flat Blade Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
Open Right
Front Cover
Remove Right
Front Cover
1. Open Right Front Cover.
1. Locate the status alert PCB [1] (mounted on the
cover) and disconnect cable connector J1.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw
securing the clamp [3] and cable to the cover.
3. Use a flat blade (small) screwdriver to remove the
C-Clip [2] from the lower hinge. Retain the clip for
reassembly.
Note
Reference
Be careful when removing the C-Clip. The
hinge contains hardware, which can be
lost.
4. Lift and remove the cover.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Install Right Front Cover
1. Install in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
3
G9 - System Power
Verify system powers ON and starts up/
initializes successfully.
2
G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels
Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
4
G19 - Prime
Verify reagents prime. Check to ensure no
leaks and/or bubbles are prevalent in the line.
5
G21 - Status Alert Indicator
Verify status alert indicator lights are on.
1
G121 - J1 Cable Connector
Verify cable connector J1 is secure.
N/A
Expected Results
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
A1.03 Tower (NoIse) Cover
Version - 201962-103_2784_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921291801
NOSE SECTION COVER ASSEMBLY, CDRUBY
8921291802
NOSE SECTION COVER ASSEMBLY, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.03 Tower (NoIse) Cover
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:01 min
None
Removal
Action
Steps
Reference
Preparation
1. Be sure instrument is in the Open Mode.
Note
Error message displays if cover is
removed while in the Closed Mode.
Remove Tower
Cover
1. Open both left and right access (front) covers.
2. Grasp both sides of the tower cover, and lift
cover off of the locating pins.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Install Tower Cover
1. Install in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
1
G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels
Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
A1.04 Top Cover
Version - 201962-103_2785_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8931393101
COVER, TOP, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.04 Top Cover
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:05 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Remove Top
Cover
Steps
Reference
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four (4)
screws securing the top cover. [1]
2. Carefully lift and remove the cover from the top of
the instrument.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Install Top Cover
1. Install in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
1
G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels
Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
A1.05 Right Side Cover
Version - 201962-103_2786_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8931393201
COVER, SIDE, RIGHT, CDRUBY
8931397501
COVER, SIDE, RIGHT, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.05 Right Side Cover
Time Required
00:05 min
Tools/Materials
Removal
Action
Remove
Right Side
Cover
Steps
Reference
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four (4)
screws securing the right side cover [1] to the
instrument.
2. Carefully lift and remove the cover from the right
side of the instrument.
Replacement
Action
Install Right Side Cover
Steps
Reference
1. Install in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
1
G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels
Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
A1.06 Left Side Cover
Version - 201962-103_2787_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8931393301
COVER, SIDE, LEFT, CDRUBY
8931397401
COVER, SIDE, LEFT, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.06 Left Side Cover
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:05 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Remove Left
Side Cover
Steps
Reference
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four (4)
screws securing the left side cover [1] to the
instrument.
2. Carefully lift and remove the cover from the left side of
the instrument.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Install Left Side Cover
1. Install in reverse order.
Reference
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
1
G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels
Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.01 Shear Valve Driver
Version - 201962-103_2788_3
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921204901
SHEAR VALVE DRIVER ASSEMBLY
8921204902
SHEAR VALVE DRIVER ASSEMBLY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.01 Shear Valve Driver
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 40 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY
and power OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
access covers and remove the
tower cover. [3]
3. Remove the top cover to the
instrument. [4]
Reference
VIDEO
Note
Remove Shear
Video contains no audio sound.
Valve Ceramics
and the Shear
Valve Driver
Assembly
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove Shear
Valve Ceramics
1. Remove the shear valve retaining
screw [1] from the center of the
shear valve.
2. Carefully remove the three (3)
ceramic pieces from the shear
valve. [2]
Note
Do not disconnect the
tubing from the front and
back ceramic pieces.
3. Set the center ceramic piece
aside.
Note
Be careful when handling
the center ceramic piece.
The part is fragile and can
break.
Remove Shear
Valve Driver
Assembly
1. Remove the four (4) screws [1]
that secure the shear valve driver
assembly in place.>
2. Disconnect cable connectors J2
and J3 from the driver PCB [2]
(mounted on the shear valve
driver assembly).
3. Angle the assembly and remove it
from the back. [3]
Note
The preamplifier cables
may need to be moved out
of the way prior to
removing the assembly.
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Install
Shear
Valve
Driver
Steps
Reference
Note
Video contains no audio sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install
Shear
Valve and
Shear
Valve
Driver
1. Angle the Shear Valve Driver
Assembly and place it in from the
back. [3]
2. Connect cable connectors J2 and J3
from the driver board [2] mounted on
the shear valve driver assembly.
Note
Reconnect preamplifier cables
if disconnected for removal.
3. Install the four (4) screws [1] that
secure the shear valve driver
assembly in place.
Install
Shear
Valve
Ceramics
1. Replace the three (3) ceramic pieces
from the shear valve. [2]
Note
Shear Valve ceramic pieces
should be put back together
wet.
2. Install the shear valve retaining screw
[1] from the center of the shear valve.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the top cover and four (4) cover
screws. [4]
2. Install the Tower cover [3] and close
the left [1] and right [2] access covers.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-01 System Voltage Verification
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document the following Power
Distribution Module Voltages:
E1=+15V±0.4
E2=-15.0V±0.4
E3=-12.0V±0.5
E4=+12.0V±0.
E5=+28V±0.5
E6=+15.5V±0.5
E7=+5.1V±0.2
E8= GND
2
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.02 Y-Valve
Version - 201962-103_2789_3
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921294501
Y VALVE ASSY, PRE-ALIGNED WITH FLAG AND WHEEL
8921294601
Y-VALVE MOTOR ASSY W-COUPLER
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.02 Y-Valve
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 30 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
1/2" Wrench or Adjustable Wrench or Needle-nose Pliers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY
and power OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
access covers and remove the
tower cover. [3]
VIDEO
Remove YValve cover
and Remove
Note
Video contains no audio sound.
Reference
Y-Valve and
Encoder
Assembly
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove YValve Cover
Remove the two (2) screws securing the
Y-Valve cover to the assembly. [1]
Note
The Encoder tabs [2] must be in
the vertical position to remove the
assembly.
Remove YValve and
Encoder
Assembly
1. Locate the Y-Valve assembly. [1]
2. Disconnect the tubing from the top
of the Open Mode Probe and
unscrew the fittings from the three
(3) valve ports. [2]
3. Use needle-nose pliers, a 1/2"
wrench, or adjustable wrench to
loosen the nut [3] securing the YValve assembly to the bracket.
4. Lift assembly up and out.
Caution
Do not loosen the set
screw [4] securing the
Encoder wheel to the YValve. This is set at the
factory, and loosening the
screw results in
misalignment of the two
parts.
Remove YValve Motor
1. Disconnect the motor in-line cable
connector.
2. Using a thin-shaft Phillips
screwdriver, locate and remove
the three (3) screws [1] securing
the motor to the bracket.
Note
Remove the screws by
inserting the screwdriver
through the holes in the
bracket.
3. Lift motor up and out.
Replacement
Action
Install Y-Valve
Motor
Steps
1. Mount the Y-valve Motor to the
bracket with the 3 screws. [1]
2. Connect the Motor Inline cable.
Reference
VIDEO
Note
Install YVideo contains no audio sound.
Valve,
Encoder
Assembly and
Install Y-Valve
Cover
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Y-Valve
Note
and Encoder
Tubing lengths leading to and
Assembly
from the y-valve assembly are
critical to system performance.
1. Install the Y-Valve and Encoder
Assembly by seating the
assembly back into the bracket.
2. Tighten the nut [3] with needle
nose pliers to secure the Y-Valve
assembly to the bracket.
3. Screw the fittings from the three
(3) valve ports [2] into place and
reseat tubing to Open Mode
Probe.
Install Y-Valve Secure the Y-Valve cover with 2 screws.
Cover
[1]
Completion
1. Replace the tower cover. [3]
2. Close the left [1] and right [2]
access doors.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
2
G5 - Precision
Verify precision is within instrument
specifications.
Precision within specifications = Pass
1
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.03 Ultrasonic Sensor
Version - 201962-103_2790_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8370181802
SENSOR, AIR BUBBLE (BLOOD), CD3200
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.03 Ultrasonic Sensor
Time Required
00:40 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Tools/Materials Wire Cutters
Tie Wraps
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Power down instrument and remove power cord.
Remove
Ultrasonic Note
The Ultrasonic Sensor 1 PCB, used for sample detection
Sensor 1
prior to the shear valve, is mounted on the front flow
PCB Cover
panel. Ultrasonic Sensor 2 PCB, used for open mode
sample detection after the shear valve, is mounted behind
the flow panel. For Ultrasonic Sensor 2 removal, go to
Remove Ultrasonic Sensor 2.
1. Remove the tower cover, and open the right front access
door.
2. Locate the ultrasonic sensor 1 PCB Cover [1] mounted on
the PCB.
3. Squeeze the left side of the sensor cover at the top and
bottom, and pull outward to disengage the left locking tab.
4. Squeeze the left top and the right sides of the cover and
pull outward to disengage the upper tab.
5. Gently pull the upper portion of the cover away from the
panel, and disengage the lower tab by gently pulling the
cover downward.
Remove
Ultrasonic
Sensor 1
1. Disconnect the sensor cable from J1 on the ultrasonic
sensor 1 PCB. [1]
2. Remove tie wraps securing sensor cable to wire harness.
3. Disconnect the tubing to both inlet and outlet ports [2] on
the sensor port head.
Reference
Note
Be sure not to break the sensor head port(s) when
disconnecting tubing.
4. Remove and discard the ultrasonic sensor.
Remove
Ultrasonic
Sensor 2
1. Remove the top cover from the instrument (4 screws), to
allow access to the ultrasonic sensor 2 PCB [1] mounted
behind the flow panel.
2. Disconnect the sensor cable to J1 on the ultrasonic
sensor 2 PCB. [1]
3. Remove the tie wraps securing the sensor cable to the
wire harness.
4. Route and remove the sensor cable through the grommet
in the front flow panel. [2]
Note
Utrasonic Sensor 1 PCB may need to be removed
to allow enough room to route cables past the
grommet.
5. Disconnect the tubing to both inlet and outlet ports [3] on
the sensor head.
Note
Be sure not to break sensor head port(s) when
disconnecting tubing.
6. Remove and discard the ultrasonic sensor.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Replace Ultrasonic Sensor
1. Install the new ultrasonic (sensor 1 and/or 2) in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
1
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
2
G4 - Control Run
Verify controls are within specifications for
assay(s)/ parameter(s).
Controls within specifications = Pass
3
G24 - Normal Operation
Run three cycles/samples in open and/or
closed mode and verify normal operation, e.g.
binding, liquid leaks, etc.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.04 Open Probe Drive Assembly
Version - 201962-103_2771_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921291401
OTS ASSEMBLY, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.04 Open Probe Drive Assembly
Time Required
00:40 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Tools/Materials 7/64" Hex Wrench
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2] access covers
and remove the tower cover [3].
Remove Open
Probe Drive
Assembly
1. Disconnect the aspiration tubing from the top
of the open probe.
2. Disconnect the wash block tubing.
Reference
3. Mark the tubing.
4. Locate the sample loader right access
panel [1] and remove the two (2) screws.
Note
The access panel is located
underneath the sample loader.
5. Locate and disconnect the OTS motor in-line
cable connector (located underneath the
sample loader).
6. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the
assembly to the sample loader platen.
Replacement
Action
Replace Open Probe Drive
Assembly
Steps
Reference
1. Replace the Open Probe Drive Assembly by following the steps above in
reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
2
G4 - Control Run
Verify controls are within specifications for
assay(s)/ parameter(s).
Controls within specifications = Pass
1
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.05 Open Probe Wash Block
Version - 201962-103_6123_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.05 Open Probe Wash Block
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 30 min
Tools/Materials Pliers
3/32" Hex Wrench
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Select the following in the Ruby
Software:
Maintenance
As-Needed
Clean or Replace Open
Mode Probe
Disable Analyzer for the
Pop-up window
2. Open the front left (1) and right (2)
access covers. Remove the Tower
cover (3) on the Ruby to expose
the Aspiration tower.
VIDEO
Remove Open Note
Video contains no audio sound.
Mode Probe
Wash Block
Reference
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove the
Open Mode
Probe Wash
Block
1. Remove the tubing carefully from
the top of the Open Mode Probe.
[1]
2. Use a 3/32" Hex Wrench to
remove the two (2) screws from
the top of the assembly and
remove the Open Mode Probe. [2]
3. Remove the small metal bar that
holds the screws in place. [3]
4. Lift the Open Mode Probe upwards
to remove it from the assembly. [4]
5. Place the bar and the Probe to the
side.
6. Use a 3/32” Hex Wrench, remove
the two (2) screws [5] from the
bottom side of the plate and
remove the Wash Block.
7. Pull the Open Mode Wash Block
downward carefully to remove it
from the housing.
8. Use Pliers to remove the Wash
Block from the two (2) tubing
connections. [6]
Note
Mark tubing to note which
tubing goes on top and
which one goes on the
bottom of the wash block.
Discard the old Wash Block
in the Biohazard waste.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
VIDEO
Install the
Open Mode
Probe Wash
Block
Note
Video contains no audio sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install the
Open Mode
Probe Wash
Block
1. Connect the new Open Mode
Probe Wash Block to the two (2)
tubing connections while verifying
the correct location of each tubing.
[6]
2. Push the Wash Block up to the
metal plate to secure it.
3. Screw in the two (2) screws from
below using the 3/32" Hex
Wrench. [5]
4. Lower the Open Mode Probe from
above through the Wash Block.
[4]
5. Line up the small metal bar to the
screw holes and place on top of
the Probe to secure it.
6. Use a 3/32" Hex Wrench, screw in
the two (2) screws from the top of
the assembly to secure the Open
Mode Probe. [2]
7. Plug the tubing carefully from the
Y-Valve to the top of the Open
Mode Probe. [1]
Completion
1. Put the front tower cover on the
Ruby (3) and close the left (1) and
right (2) front access doors.
2. Select the following from the Ruby
Software screen:
Enable Analyzer from the
visible pop-up window
Log Task Complete
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
1
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
2
G24 - Normal Operation
Run three cycles/samples in open and/or
closed mode and verify normal operation, e.g.
binding, liquid leaks, etc.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.06 Closed Mode Needle Wash Block
Version - 201962-103_6118_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.06 Closed Mode Needle Wash Block
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 30 minutes
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
Pliers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Select the following from the
Ruby Software screen::
Maintenance
As-Needed
Clean or Replace Closed
Mode Needle
Disable Analyzer for the
Pop-up window
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
(front) access covers and
remove the tower cover. [3]
VIDEO
Note
Remove Closed
Video contains no audio sound.
Mode Needle and
Closed Mode
Needle Wash
Block
Reference
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove Closed
Mode Needle
Note
Prior to disconnecting the
tubing, you may want to label
the tubing to ensure it is
properly reconnected to the
correct position.
1. Slide the two (2) tubings from
the top of the closed mode
needle carefully. [1]
2. Loosen the thumbscrew [2] on
the closed mode needle
bracket.
3. Remove the bracket and needle
and set both aside.
Remove Closed
Mode Needle
Wash Block
1. Remove the two (2) screws
securing the Wash block to the
Spin Cone bracket. [1]
2. Disconnect the two (2) tubings
from the connectors on the side
of the Closed Mode Wash
Block. [2]
3. Unscrew the two (2) connectors
from the Closed Mode Needle
Wash Block. [3]
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
VIDEO
Install Closed Mode
Needle Wash Block
and Install Closed
Mode Needle
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Closed Mode
Needle Wash Block
1. Screw the two (2)
connectors into the side of
the Closed Mode Needle
Wash Block. [3]
2. Connect the two (2) tubings
to the connectors on the
side of the Closed Mode
Wash Block. [2]
3. Mount the Wash Block to
the Spin Cone bracket and
secure the two (2) screws.
[1]
Install Closed Mode
Needle
1. Insert the Closed Mode
Needle. [3]
2. Verify the needle goes
through the Wash Block.
3. Verify angled port on top of
Close Mode Needle is
facing the instrument.
4. Mount the Closed Mode
Needle bracket and tighten
the thumbscrew. [2]
5. Connect the two tubings to
the top of the Closed Mode
Needle. [1]
6. Verify the vent tubing is
connected to the angled port
of the Closed Mode Needle.
Completion
1. Install the tower cover. [3]
2. Close the left [1] and right
[2] front access covers.
3. Select the following from the
software screen:
Enable
Log Task Complete
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
1
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
2
G24 - Normal Operation
Run three cycles/samples in open and/or
closed mode and verify normal operation, e.g.
binding, liquid leaks, etc.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.07 Overpressure Sensor
Version - 201962-103_6122_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.07 Overpressure Sensor
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 30 min
Tools/Materials Needle Nose Pliers
Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Power down instrument and
remove power cord.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
front access covers and
remove the Tower cover. [3]
Reference
VIDEO
Remove
Overpressure
Sensor
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove
Overpressure
Sensor
1. Locate the overpressure
sensor on right side of panel.
[1]
2. Remove silicon tubing
attached at port. [2]
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
unscrew the two (2) screws
that hold the overpressure
sensor. [3]
4. Use the needle nose pliers
to remove the red and
orange connectors attached
to the side of the
overpressure sensor. [4]
Note
Label the wires to
identify for correct
reconnection.
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Install
Overpressure
Sensor
Steps
Reference
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install
Overpressure
Sensor
1. Using the needle nose
pliers, connect the orange
and red wires to the
overpressure sensor. [4]
2. Seat the new overpressure
sensor and install with the
two (2) saved Philips
screws. [3]
3. Connect the silicon tubing
to the port on the front of
the overpressure sensor.
[2]
Completion
1. Install the Tower cover of
the Ruby. [3]
2. Close the right [2] and left
[1] side covers.
3. Power on the instrument.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
1
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
2
G24 - Normal Operation
Run three cycles/samples in open and/or
closed mode and verify normal operation, e.g.
binding, liquid leaks, etc.
3
G138 - Run Control - Verify controls are within
specifications for assayparameter(s).
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B1.08 Tube Sensor PCB
Version - 201962-103_6120_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
B1.08 Tube Sensor PCB
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 30 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
Side Cutters or Scissors
TIE WRAP NYL .09"W 4.00"L (6005321) Qty: 1
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in
STANDBY and power OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and
right [2] access covers and
remove the tower cover. [3]
3. Remove the front Drip
Plate. [4]
Reference
VIDEO
Remove Tube Note
Video contains no audio
Sensor PCB
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove Tube
Sensor PCB
1. Locate the Tube Sensor
PCB assembly. [1]
2. Cut the tie wrap holding the
Tube Sensor PCB Cover in
place.
3. Remove the Tube Sensor
PCB Cover and unplug the
Tube Sensor PCB Cable.
[2]
4. Unscrew the two (2) screws
holding the Tube Sensor
PCB in place and remove
the Tube Sensor PCB. [3]
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Install Tube
Sensor PCB
Steps
Reference
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Tube
Sensor PCB
1. Mount New Tube Sensor
PCB to the Loader and
secure it with two (2)
screws. [3]
2. Connect cable to the tube
sensor PCB. [2]
3. Loop a new tie wrap around
the cable through two (2)
holes on back side of cover
with the tie wrap lock on
the outside. DO NOT
TIGHTEN. [3]
4. Lift mixer assembly and
slide cover over tube
sensor PCB.
5. Ensure cover is sitting flush
on top of the tube sensor
PCB, and the two (2)
sensors are protruding
through the sensor cover.
[4]
6. Secure the tie wrap once
the sensor cover is in
place. [5]
Completion
1. Install the Front Drip plate.
[4]
2. Reseat Tower Cover [3],
and close left [1] and right
[2] access covers.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-58 Tube Sensor Adjustment
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
C1.01 Optics Bench
Version - 201962-103_2770_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921206404
OPTICAL BENCH ASSEMBLY, CD3200
8921206406
ASSY, OPTIC BENCH, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
C1.01 Optics Bench
Time Required
02:00 hr
Phillips Screwdriver
Tools/Materials 11/32" Nut Driver
Flat Blade Screwdriver
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
2. Remove the top cover (4 screws) [1].
3. Locate the dust cover assembly [2] for the
optical flow cell.
4. Lift the square plug from the top of the cover
(plug seals flow cell tubing at the top of the
assembly) and carefully compress the springloaded end caps.
5. Lift the dust cover assembly up and forward to
remove it from the instrument.
6. Locate the black L-shaped cover on the left
side of the optics bench.
7. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two
(2) screws and remove the cover.
Reference
Remove Optics
Bench Base Plate
Mounting Screws
Remove Optics
Bench Connectors
1. Using an 11/32" nut driver, locate and remove
the four (4) optics mounting screws [1] from
the base plate.
1. Locate and disconnect cable connector J1
from each of the 0 and 10 degree photo
detector PCBs. [1]
2. Locate and disconnect cable connector J2
from each of the PMT pre-amplifier PCBs. [2]
3. Locate the large, white laser tube
connector [3] at the right rear of the optics
bench.
4. Use a flat blade screwdriver to dislodge the
connector at the joints.
WARNING
Do not touch the connector contacts
until the Ground Laser Tube
Connector Action is performed.
Ground Laser
Tube Connector
1. Take the laser tube side of the connector
(with exposed contacts) and ground it to the
instrument chassis (this discharges the laser
tube).
Disconnect Flow
Cell Tubing
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] on the flow
cell cover.
2. Lift and remove flow cell cover.
3. Disconnect the flow cell tubing (1 - 5) from
the manifold.
Note
Use a paper towel to absorb any
residual liquid from the tubing.
Remove Optics
Bench
1. Lift the optics bench out and place it on top of
the back left corner of the chassis.
2. Find a suitable location to set the optics
bench down.
Note
Be sure not to set the optics bench
down on the PMT tubes and the flow
cell. Place supports under the bench to
protect these areas.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Replace Optics Bench
1. Replace the Optics Bench by following the steps above in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
3
VP-18 Optics Bench Alignment Procedure
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document the following:
EOS =³ 98%.
CV% = < 3.0 for 0D/10D and < 12.5 for
90D/90DP.
2
VP-19 PMT Dynode Voltage
Verification/Adjustment
Verify and document the following:
WBC Specs:
Ch 0 Mean 35, Range 32-38, Expected CV
5.0%, Final CV <6.0%
CH 10 Mean 65, Range 60-70, Expected CV
4%, Final CV < 5%
Ch 90 Mean from Opt-Cal, Range ± 6
Channels, Expected CV 13%, Final CV <18%
Ch 90 Dep Mean from Opt-Cal, Range ± 10
Channels, Expected CV15%, Final CV <18%
Dynode Voltage:
Ch 3-Vdyn/100 and Ch 4-Vdyn/100 <9.00
(900 volts).
4
VP-20 System Gains Verification/Adjustment
Verify and document the following:
WBC Specs:
Ch 0 Mean 35, Range 32-38, Expected CV
5.0%, Final CV <6.0%
CH 10 Mean 65, Range 60-70, Expected CV
4%, Final CV < 5%
Ch 90 Mean from Opt-Cal, Range ± 6
Channels, Expected CV 13%, Final CV <18%
Ch 90 Dep Mean from Opt-Cal, Range ± 10
Channels, Expected CV15%, Final CV <18%
RBC/PLT Specs
Target Ch.
Target Ch.
Target Ch.
±1
Target Ch.
5
for RBC/PLT 0° (7 µm) = 180 ±1
for RBC/PLT 0° (5 µm) = 129 ± 1
for RBC/PLT 10° (3.3 µm) = 121
for RBC/PLT 10° (7 µm) = 202 ±
Retic gains equal WBC gains
NOC 0° /10° Gains = WOC 0° /10° Gains
5
VP-21 WBC OPTI-CAL Verification/Adjustment
Verify and documente the following:
0° channel mean = 35 ± 3
10° channel mean = 65 ±5.
1
VP-35 Optical Flow Cell Wetting Procedure
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Verify and document that the backgrounds
results are within specificaion:
WOC £ 0.10
NOC £0.10
RBC £0.02
HGB £0.10
PLT£5.0
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
D1.01 Power Supply
Version - 201962-103_2772_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8934104701
POWER SUPPLY, SPEC, LAMBDA, CUSTOM, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
D1.01 Power Supply
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:45 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place the instrument in STANDBY and power OFF.
Disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
Remove the optics bench. (C1.01 Optics Bench)
Disconnect laser power supply connector.
Remove Optics Bench baseplate (four screws).
Reference
Remove
Power
Supply
1. Loosen the four (4) screws at the base of the
power supply assembly [1].
2. Slide the power supply assembly toward the front of
the instrument, until the mounting cutouts clear the
screws and lift up.
3. Tilt the front end of the assembly upward to remove
the cable connectors.
Disconnect
Connectors
1. Disconnect the following cable connectors on the
power supply.
AC Inputs (Front of assembly - as seen from the
front - left to right) [1]
Black (ACIn1)
White (ACIn2)
Green (gnd)
Power Distribution Module (PDM)
J8
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Replace Power Supply
1. Replace the power supply by following the steps above in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-01 System Voltage Verification
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document the following Power
Distribution Module Voltages:
E1=+15V±0.4
E2=-15.0V±0.4
E3=-12.0V±0.5
E4=+12.0V±0.
E5=+28V±0.5
E6=+15.5V±0.5
E7=+5.1V±0.2
E8= GND
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
E1.01 Vacuum/Pressure Assembly
Version - 201962-103_2773_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
E1.01 Vacuum/Pressure Assembly
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:45 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
2. Remove the left side cover (4 screws).
Remove
Vacuum/Pressure
Assembly
Note
The Vacuum/Pressure Assembly is mounted on
slide rails for ease of access and serviceability.
1. Loosen the two (2) knurl capture screws from the
inner (SHM) panel and open the panel toward the
front of the instrument.
2. Remove the locking screw [1].
3. Press the rail latch while sliding the assembly out
toward the left of the instrument.
Note
The rail latch is located under the right
rail. [4]
Reference
4. Disconnect cable connector J4 on the pump relay
PCB. [2]
5. Disconnect cable connectors J6, J12 thru J15,
and J17 on the VPM PCB. [3]
6. Locate the air supply line coupler.
7. Move the red switch [5] to the OPEN position and
disconnect the coupler.
Replacement
Action
Replace
Vacuum/Pressure
Assembly
Steps
Reference
1. Install all cable connectors, air supply line coupler, and components by following the
steps above in reverse order.
2. To return the assembly to the normal position, push up on the rail latch and push the
assembly back in place.
Note
Avoid potential harm from splashing biohazard by positioning the vacuum pump
coiled vent line away from critical components.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
2
VP-16 Vacuum & Pressure Level
Verification/Adjustment
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document the following:
Pressure 1 = 12.5-13.5psi
Pressure 2 = 8.5-9.5psi
Pressure 3 = 4-4.5psi
Vac 1 = 12.5-13.5 Hg
Vac 2(open) = 2.6-3 Hg
Vac 2 (closed) = 3.1-3.5Hg
Note: Monitor while instrument is in Closed
Mode.
Vac 2(retic) = 300Hg
Note: This is a set point values found on
Setpoint screen.
1
VP-04 VPM Reference Voltage
Verification/Adjustment
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Verify and document that the VPM voltage =
10.0 V (± 0.01 V).
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.01 Sample Loader
Version - 201962-103_2774_2
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.01 Sample Loader
Time Required
00:90 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Tools/Materials 7/64" Hex Wrench
Removal
Action
Preparation
Steps
Note
The removal of this assembly allows access to
all major sample loader components, thus
making it easier to service.
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front) access
covers and remove the tower cover [3].
Remove Sample
Loader Covers and
Tower Securing Screw
1. Remove the left [1] and right [2] panels from
the rear rail of the sample loader.
2. Remove the screw [3] at the top of the tower
assembly.
3. Unscrew aspiration fitting from top Y-Valve
port [4].
Reference
Separate Sample
Loader from Analyzer
1. Lift the sample loader center/drip tray
cover [1] and remove it from the instrument.
2. Remove the four (4) screws from the sample
loader skirt cover [2].
3. Slide the cover toward the front of the
instrument and remove the cover.
4. Locate the sample loader slide bracket [3] (on
both sides of the unit) and remove the front
screw [4] and loosen rear screw [5].
5. Grasp the sample loader and carefully pull it
toward the front of the instrument.
Note
Be sure not to catch or disconnect any
tubing in the process.
Note
The Sample Loader should pull away
from the instrument approximately three
to four inches.
Disconnect Tubing
Coupler and SHM PCB
Cable Connections
1. Locate and disconnect the vacuum and
pressure tubing coupler [1].
2. Remove the left side cover. (A1.06 Left Side
Cover)
3. Locate the SHM 1 [2], SHM 2 [3] and OTS
Chopper Driver [4] PCBs.
4. Disconnect the following cable connectors:
SHM 1
J1, J9, J10, J12, J13, J14, and
J16.
SHM 2
J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J9, J10, J11,
J12, J13, J15, and J16.
OTS Chopper Driver
J2
Remove Sample
Loader
1. Guide all required cables between the SHM
PCBs and sample loader through the opening
in the lower left side of the flow panel [1].
2. Remove the rear screw on both the left and
the right side sample loader slide brackets.
3. Grasp the sample loader by the ends and
carefully slide it out of the brackets and place
it on a flat surface.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Replace Sample Loader
1. Replace the Sample Loader by following the steps above in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-26 Mixer Up/Down Verification
2
VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation Verification
3
VP-28 Mixer Bladders Verification
4
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors
Verification
6
VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure
Verification/Adjustment
5
VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack Sensors
Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document that the pressure 1 psi =
12.5-13.5 psi.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.02 Bladder Grippers
Version - 201962-103_2775_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8930114401
SLEEVE, .875"OD
9130647
MIX HEAD REPAIR SERVICE KIT
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.02 Bladder Grippers
Time Required
00:50 min
Feeler Gauge
Tools/Materials 9/64" Hex Wrench
3/32" Hex Wrench
1/4" Socket or Wrench
Phillips Screwdriver
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge or Meter
DI Water
Q-TIPS
Soap Solution (for leak test)
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front) access
covers and remove the tower cover [3].
Remove Mixer
Head
1. Remove the closed mode needle from the
mounting arm by loosening the thumbscrew.
Reference
2. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] to release the mixer
head and allow to pivot forward.
3. Remove vacuum/pressure tubing from the elbow
fitting on the mixer head body.
4. Remove the screw [1] holding the tubing clamp.
5. Disconnect the cable connector from the mixer
head home sensor.
6. Loosen the set screws [2] on the mixer cap
holding the mixer head to the motor shaft by
using a 3/32" hex wrench and remove the mixer
head.
Note
Remove the mixer head by rotating it
forward until it is horizontal with the
platen.
7. Remove the four (4) Phillips screws [3] from the
mixer cap.
Remove ORings and
Bladder
Grippers
1. Loosen the two (2) hex screws [3] by using a
9/64" hex wrench until the mixer cap separates
from the mixer body.
Note
Do not remove the two (2) hex screws
from the mixer cap just loosen the hex
screw until the cap and body separates.
2. Remove and discard the two (2) O-rings. [1]
3. Remove the two (2) sleeves from the body of
the mixer head.
4. Remove the bladder grippers [2] from the two
(2) sleeves and discard.
Replacement
Action
Replace ORings and
Bladder
Grippers
Steps
1. Insert the O-rings into the two (2) recesses in the mixer
cap.
2. Insert the bladder grippers [2] through the sleeve and
fold each end evenly over the sleeve.
Note
The fold should be between 0.30" - 0.40" over
the outer sleeve.
3. Repeat above step for the remaining sleeve.
4. Insert the sleeves into the mixer body using DI water,
twisting gently if necessary. Do not force.
5. Mount the mixer cap to the mixer body.
6. Tighten the four (4) Phillips screws in an "X" pattern to
uniformly mount the mixer cap to the body.
Reference
7. Tighten the two (2) hex screws snugly, but do not over
tighten.
8. Re-tighten the four (4) Phillips screws, and make sure
that there is no gap between the mixer cap and the
mixer body.
Install Mixer
Head
1. Slide the mixer head back onto the motor shaft, and
make sure a gap of about 0.020" ± 0.005" exists [1]
between the tip of the screw head and the mixer body.
2. Tighten the setscrew on the mixer assembly to the
motor shaft.
3. Install the close mode sample needle.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
2
VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation Verification
1
VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure
Verification/Adjustment
3
G22 - Sample Loader / Autoloader
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document that the pressure 1 psi =
12.5-13.5 psi.
Place ten (10) test tubes in a rack and run
samples in closed mode. Verify no errors
occur.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.03 Spinner Motor Assembly
Version - 201962-103_2776_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921294701
TUBE SPINNER MOTOR ASSY W-PULLEY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.03 Spinner Motor Assembly
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 17 min
Tools/Materials Allen Wrench
Phillips Screwdriver
Cutters
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the
instrument
in
STANDBY
and power
OFF.
2. Open the
left [1] and
right [2]
(front)
access
covers and
remove the
tower
cover [3].
VIDEO
Reference
Disconnect Note
Video
Spin Motor
contains no
In-Line
audio
Cable and
sound.
Remove
Spin Motor
Assembly
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Disconnect
Spin Motor
In-Line
Cable
1. Remove
the left side
metal panel
under the
autoloader.
[1]
2. Disconnect
the motor
in-line
cable
connector
under the
autoloader.
[2]
Remove
Spinner
Motor
1. Remove
Assembly
the screw
securing
the cable
and
tubings. [1]
2. Clip the tie
wrap
holding the
cable in
place. [2]
3. Remove
the two (2)
set screws
securing
the Spinner
Motor
Assembly
to the
bracket. [3]
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Install
Spinner
Motor
Assembly,
Secure
Spin Motor
Cable and
Connect
Spin Motor
In-Line
Cable
Steps
Reference
Note
Video
contains no
audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install
Spinner
Motor
Assembly
1. Install the
motor on
the
bracket. [1]
2. Install the
belt around
the cone
and motor.
[2]
3. Replace
the two set
screws to
hold the
motor in
place. [3]
4. Verify the
tension of
the belt.
Secure
Spin Motor
Cable
1. Reroute
the cable
to under
the
autoloader.
2. Replace
the tie
wrap to
hold the
cable in
place. [2]
3. Secure the
cable and
tubings
with holder
and screw.
[1]
Connect
the Spin
Motor InLine Cable
1. Connect
the cable
under the
autoloader.
[2]
2. Install the
cover
under the
autoloader.
[1]
Completion Install the Tower
cover [3] and
close the left [1]
and right [2]
access covers.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-24 Bar Code Spin Assembly Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.04 Mix Head & Mixer Lifter Assembly
Version - 201962-103_2777_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921292101
MIXER ASSY, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.04 Mix Head & Mixer Lifter Assembly
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Not Assessed
None
Note
The mixer lifter FRU comes with the slider bearing taped, or rubber banded, to fasten it in position on the track (Mixer Lifter
Assembly). Do Not allow the slider bearing to slide off of the track. If this happens, the tiny ball bearings can escape, and the
FRU cannot be restored to operational state. The air cylinder w/piston rod can be ordered separately, but does not include the
air fitting. The mix head sensor (magnetic, reed), and the 'Z' up sensor (photo-interrupter), and the stepper motor, can also be
ordered separately. Refer to the following illustrations.
Mixer Lifter Assembly
Sample Loader Mixer
Note
When the FRU is ordered, the adjustments shown in Verify Clearances [5] are already done.
Note
The head stop adjustment is verified with the mixer and lifter assemblies mounted on the platen. Refer to FRU instructions.
Note
The proper bladder pressure is 6.5 PSI ± 0.2PSI.
Removal
Action
Steps
Reference
Preparation
1. Remove the sample loader from the system. (F1.01 Sample
Loader)
2. Clean the platen and racks with water.
Note
To work with the sample loader on a flat surface, two
small part boxes placed underneath at the ends can be
used to rest the assembly on. This helps prevent
inadvertent damage to loader components.
Remove
Mixer and
Lifter
1. Remove the plastic cable clamps secured to the front of the
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
lifter support, and remove the coiled wrap on the cables and
tubing at the top of the assembly.
Disconnect the cable from the upper position (Z) sensor, and
disconnect the air line from the fitting on the mix head.
From the underside of the sample loader baseplate [1],
disconnect the tubing from the air cylinder.
Locate the quick connections on the motor cable and the mix
head sensor cable and disconnect them. Feed the two (2)
cables through the hole in the baseplate to the top.
From the underside, remove the three (3) screws securing the
lifter assembly to the sample loader baseplate. Remove the
mixer and lifter assemblies together as a unit. [1] [2]
To separate the two (2) assemblies, remove the nyloc nut at
the very top of the piston rod. Be sure to save the nut. [2]
Remove the four (4) screws holding the mixer assembly to the
slider bearing on the lifter. Be sure to save the screws. [2]
Note
When the mixer assembly is removed, the slider
bearing is free. Be sure to keep the slider bearing from
sliding off the end of the track. Use tape or a rubber
band to hold the slider in place. If the slider is allowed
to slide off the track, the tiny ball bearings can escape,
and the slide cannot be restored to operational
condition. Also take care with the new assembly when
it is unpacked and prepared for use.
Replacement
Action
Install Mixer
and Lifter
Steps
1. To assemble the mixer assembly, use the same four (4)
screws to attach the mixer assembly to the slider bearing on
Reference
the lifter.
Note
Be sure to align the mixer bracket to the slider bracket
so they are square to each other before tightening the
screws. [2]
2. Re-attach the piston rod using the nyloc nut. Using a feeler
gauge, adjust the nut for 0.020" play under the nut. [2]
3. Verify smooth operation by manually moving the mix head up
and down. There should be no mechanical resistance. If
necessary, loosen the two (2) screws securing the cylinder
bracket [3], to adjust its position for minimum friction on the
piston rod, then re-tighten them.
Note
Do not lubricate the air cylinder.
4. Check the 'Z' upper sensor bracket and flag for proper
alignment. [3]
5. Install the assembled mixer and lifter to the sample loader
baseplate using same three (3) screws.
6. Route the tubing and cables through the hole in the
baseplate. Re-connect all of the cables and tubing in reverse
order.
Verify
Clearances
1. Re-check the play under the nyloc nut on the piston rod. It
should be 0.020".
2. Check the mix head (rotate) stop adjustment in parallel with
the bottom clearance adjustment (Step3). Ensure the mix
head rotation stops exactly at vertical, with an even gap
between the bottom edges and the two (2) rack guide
walls. [4] [5].
3. With the mix head resting at the bottom of it's vertical travel,
check the clearance between the bottom of the mix head and
the top of the rack guide walls. [4] It should be at 0.020"
�0.005". To adjust the clearance, loosen the 2 screws
securing the bottom stop/flag to the mix head bracket. [4]
Secure
Cables/Tubing
1. Secure the cables and mix head tubing, and re-attach the
plastic cable clamps to the front of the slider.
2. Install the coiled wrap to neatly secure the cables.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-26 Mixer Up/Down Verification
2
VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation Verification
3
VP-28 Mixer Bladders Verification
4
VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure
Verification/Adjustment
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document that the pressure 1 psi =
12.5-13.5 psi.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.05 Detent Pin and Index Bar (X-Axis) Assemblies
Version - 201962-103_2778_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.05 Detent Pin and Index Bar (X-Axis) Assemblies
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Not Assessed
Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and
power OFF.
Preparation
1. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front) access
covers and remove the tower cover [3].
2. Perform Remove Sample Loader Covers
and Tower Securing Screw (F1.01 Sample
Loader).
3. Perform Separate Sample Loader from
Analyzer (F1.01 Sample Loader).
Clean/Adjust Detent
Pin Retainer
1. Remove the two (2) screws from the bar
code reader bracket [1].
2. Remove two (2) screws from the detent pin
assembly. [2]
3. Remove the e-rings retaining the springs
and the pins.
4. Clean the pins and pin bores in the
retainer and platen with alcohol and Q-
Reference
TIPS.
5. Clean the mounting surface and the platen.
6. Assemble and install.
7. Place a rack in position with the bar code
window aligned with the window in the
inner wall. [3]
8. Adjust the tension for no gap between erings and retainer with the rack in position
and the detents engaged. [4]
Note
Be sure that both detent pins are in
contact with the rack. [5]
9. Re-attach the bar code reader (loose).
Note
Adjustment of the bar code reader is
necessary at this time.
Remove Rear Platen
Wall Assembly
1. Locate and remove the two (2) screws
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
securing each of the sample loader access
panels from under the unit.
Open the access panels.
Remove the unload side sweep arm
assembly. (F1.06 Sweep Arm (Y-Axis))
Disconnect both unload sensor cable
connectors.
Locate the four (4) screws [1] securing the
rear platen wall (contains the indexer and
pawl assembly).
Slide out the rear platen wall assembly
from the sample loader.
Remove Indexer Air
Cylinder and Pawl
Assembly
1. Remove the two screws (2) securing the
air cylinder (with bracket) to the rear platen
wall assembly [1].
2. Remove the screw securing each of the
two indexer bar retaining blocks [2].
3. Lift the assembly from the rear platen wall.
4. Loosen the two (2) setscrews [3] and
separate the indexer bar from the air
cylinder.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
Replace Sample Loader
1. Replace the Indexer Bar by following the steps above in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors
Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.06 Sweep Arm (Y-Axis)
Version - 201962-103_2779_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8930270601
SWEEP ARM, CDRUBY
8930270701
SWEEP ARM, LOAD SIDE, CDRUBY
8930270801
SWEEP ARM, UNLOAD SIDE, CDRUBY
8930270901
SHAFT, SWEEP ARM, CDRUBY
8930271001
SHAFT-ARM, SWEEP ARM, CDRUBY
8930271101
BEARING BLOCK, SWEEP ARM, RUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.06 Sweep Arm (Y-Axis)
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Not Assessed
Phillips Screwdriver
Flat blade screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and
power OFF.
Preparation
1. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front)
access covers and remove the tower
cover [3].
2. Perform Remove Sample Loader Covers
and Tower Securing Screw (F1.01 Sample
Loader).
3. Perform Separate Sample Loader from
Analyzer (F1.01 Sample Loader).
Remove Sweep Arm
Reference
Air Cylinders
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from the
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
sample loader left access panel (located
under the unit).
Open the access panel and locate the
sweep arm air cylinder.
Disconnect the pneumatic line to the
cylinder [2].
Locate and remove the pin [3] securing
the pin between the sweep arm assembly
and the air cylinder.
Use a flat blade screwdriver and remove
the c-clip [4] securing the air cylinder to
the bottom of the sample loader platen.
Slide the air cylinder off of the mounting
pin.
Note
Both load and unload air cylinders
are removed in the same manner.
Remove Unload and
Load Side Sweep
Arm Assemblies
1. Locate and remove two (2) screws [1]
securing the Sweep Arm Assembly to the
sample loader platen.
2. Compress the arms together and slide the
assembly out from the cutout.
Note
Both load and unload side sweep
arms are removed in the same
manner.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Install Sweep
Arm Assemblies
Reference
1. When replacing the sweep arms, be sure that
both the left and right arms are aligned as
described.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors
Verification
2
VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack Sensors
Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.07 Autoloader Sweep Arm Spring Replacement Procedure
Version - 201962-103_4701_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.07 Autoloader Sweep Arm Spring Replacement Procedure
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Not Assessed
Phillips Screwdriver
Flat blade screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY
and power OFF.
Preparation
1. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front)
access covers and remove the
tower cover [3].
2. Perform Remove Sample Loader
Covers and Tower Securing Screw
(F1.01 Sample Loader).
3. Perform Separate Sample Loader
from Analyzer (F1.01 Sample
Loader).
Remove Sweep
Arm Air Cylinders
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] from
the sample loader left access panel
(located under the unit).
2. Open the access panel and locate
the sweep arm air cylinder.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic line to
Reference
the cylinder [2].
4. Locate and remove the pin [3]
securing the pin between the
sweep arm assembly and the air
cylinder.
5. Use a flat blade screwdriver and
remove the c-clip [4] securing the
air cylinder to the bottom of the
sample loader platen.
6. Slide the air cylinder off of the
mounting pin.
Note
Both load and unload air
cylinders are removed in the
same manner.
Remove Unload
and Load Side
Sweep Arm
Assemblies
1. Locate and remove two (2)
screws [1] securing the Sweep Arm
Assembly to the sample loader
platen.
2. Compress the arms together and
slide the assembly out from the
cutout.
Note
Both load and unload side
sweep arms are removed in
the same manner.
Remove Springs
1. Remove the old spring [1] on both
sweep arm assemblies.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Install Springs
1. Replace with new spring [1] on both
sweep arm asseblies.
Re-Install
Sweep Arm
Reference
Assemblies
1. When reinstalling the sweep arms, be
sure that both the left and right arms
are aligned as shown.
2. Re-assemble Ruby in reverse order of
dis-assembly.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors
Verification
2
VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack Sensors
Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-105) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.08 Aspiration Tower Stop Solenoid
Version - 201962-103_5008_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.08 Aspiration Tower Stop Solenoid
Time Required
Tools/Materials
01:45 hrs
Phillips Screwdriver
7/64" Hex Wrench
Caution
Possible Electrostatic Discharge Shock
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and
power OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front)
access covers and remove the tower
cover. [3].
Remove Sample
Loader Covers and
Tower Securing Screw
1. Remove the left [1] and right [2] panels
from the rear rail of the sample loader.
2. Remove the screw [3] at the top of the
tower assembly.
3. Remove aspiration tubing from top Y-
Reference
Valve port. [4]
Separate Sample
Loader from Analyzer
1. Lift the sample loader center/drip tray
cover [1] and remove it from the
instrument.
2. Remove the four (4) screws from the
sample loader skirt cover [2].
3. Slide the cover toward the front of the
instrument and remove the cover.
4. Locate the sample loader slide bracket
[3] (on both sides of the unit) and remove
the front screw [4] and loosen rear screw
[5].
5. Grasp the sample loader and carefully
pull it toward the front of the instrument.
Note
Be sure not to catch or disconnect
any tubing in the process.
Note
The Sample Loader should pull
away from the instrument
approximately three to four inches.
Disconnect Tubing
Coupler and SHM PCB
Cable Connections
1. Locate and disconnect the vacuum and
pressure tubing coupler [1].
2. Remove the left side cover. (A1.06 Left
Side Cover)
3. Locate the SHM 1 [2], SHM 2 [3] and
OTS Chopper Driver [4] PCBs.
4. Disconnect the following cable
connectors:
SHM 1
J1, J9, J10, J12, J13, J14,
and J16.
SHM 2
J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J9, J10,
J11, J12, J13, J15, and
J16.
OTS Chopper Driver
J2
Remove Sample
Loader
1. Guide all required cables between the
SHM PCBs and sample loader through
the opening in the lower left side of the
flow panel.[1]
2. Remove the rear screw on both the left
and the right side sample loader slide
brackets.
3. Grasp the sample loader by the ends
and carefully slide it out of the brackets
and place it on a flat surface.
Remove Stop Solenoid
1. Disconnect the cable connection under
the platen. [1]
2. Remove the two (2) screws from the
solenoid mounting bracket [2] and
remove solenoid from aspiration tower.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Replace Stop Solenoid
1. Replace the Stop Solenoid by following the steps above in
reverse order.
Note
Before tightening the solenoid mounting screws, lift
the solenoid to the highest point, then tighten
screws to hold solenoid in place. Failure to do so
can result in tube height sensor errors.
Reference
Replace Sample Loader
1. Replace the Sample Loader by following the steps above
in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
5
VP-26 Mixer Up/Down Verification
1
VP-22 Aspiration/Vent Needle Verification
2
VP-23 Tower Unit Stop Solenoid Verification
6
VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation Verification
4
VP-25 Tube Height Sensors (S1/S2)
Verification
3
VP-24 Bar Code Spin Assembly Verification
7
VP-28 Mixer Bladders Verification
8
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors
Verification
10
VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure
Verification/Adjustment
9
VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack Sensors
Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document that the pressure 1 psi =
12.5-13.5 psi.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-107) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.09 Tube Spinner Bracket with Cone
Version - 201962-103_6119_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.09 Tube Spinner Bracket with Cone
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 20 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
Allen Wrench
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Select the following from the
Ruby Software display:
Maintenance Tab
As-Needed
Clean or Replace
Closed Mode Needle
to the pop-up window
Disable Analyzer
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
(front) access covers and
remove the tower cover. [3]
VIDEO
Note
Remove Closed
Video contains no audio
Mode Needle and
sound.
Spin Cone and
Bracket
Reference
Assembly
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove Closed
Mode Needle
Note
Prior to disconnecting the tubing,
you may want to label the tubing to
ensure it is properly reconnected to
the correct position.
1. Remove the two tubings from
the top of the closed mode
needle. [1]
2. Loosen the thumbscrew [2] on
the closed mode needle
bracket and remove the
bracket and needle and set
both aside.
Remove Spin
Cone and
Bracket
Assembly
1. Remove the two (2) screws
holding the Spin Cone bracket
in place. [1]
2. Remove the two (2) screws
securing the Wash block to
the Spin Cone bracket. [2]
3. Remove the two (2) Allen
screws mounting the Spin
Motor to the Spin Cone
bracket. [3]
4. Remove the Spin Motor [4]
and belt [5] from the Spin
Cone bracket. [6]
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Install Spin Cone
and Bracket and
Closed Mode
Needle
Steps
Reference
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Spin Cone
and Bracket
1. Mount the Spin Motor with
belt to the Spin Cone bracket
with the two Allen screws. [3]
Note
Verify belt tension.
2. Mount the Wash Block to the
Spin Cone bracket with two
screws. [2]
3. Mount the Spin Cone bracket
to the instrument with two
screws. [1]
Install Closed
Mode Needle
1. Insert the Closed Mode
Needle removed from above
and verify it goes through the
Wash Block. [3]
Note
Verify angled port on
top of Close Mode
Needle is facing the
instrument.
2. Mount the Closed Mode
Needle bracket and tighten
the thumbscrew. [2]
3. Connect the two tubings to
the top of the Closed Mode
Needle. [1]
Note
Verify the vent tubing
is connected to the
angled port of the
Closed Mode Needle.
Completion
1. Install the tower cover [3] and
close the left [1] and right [2]
front access covers.
2. Select the following from the
Ruby Software display:
Enable Analyzer
Log Task Complete
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-24 Bar Code Spin Assembly Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
F1.10 Detent Pin Assembly
Version - 201962-103_6128_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
F1.10 Detent Pin Assembly
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 30 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
Pliers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Prerequisite
Preparation
Steps
Place the instrument in STANDBY
and power OFF.
Open the left [1] and right [2]
(front) access covers and remove
the tower cover. [3]
VIDEO
Note
Remove Barcode
Video contains no audio
Reader and Detent
sound.
Pin/Bar
Reference
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove Barcode
Reader and Detent
Pin/Bar
1. Use a marker and outline or
mark the position of the
Barcode Reader and Detent
Pin Bar.
2. Remove two screws from
the barcode reader
assembly. [1]
3. Remove two screws from
the detent pin assembly [2]
and lift assembly out of
loader. [3] Clean the
mounting surface and the
platen.
Clean/Adjust
Detent Pin
Retainer
1. Remove the e-rings
retaining the springs and
the pins.
2. Clean the pins and pin
bores in the retainer and
platen with alcohol and
cotton swab.
3. Clean the mounting surface
and the platen.
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Steps
Note
Reference
Install Detent
Pin/Bar and
Barcode Reader
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Detent
Pin/Bar and
Barcode Reader
1. Install the e-rings retaining
the springs and the pins.
2. Install two screws from the
detent pin assembly. [2]
3. Install two screws from the
barcode reader assembly. [1]
4. Place a rack in position with
the barcode window aligned
with the window in the inner
wall. [3]
5. Adjust the tension so no gap
is between e-rings and
retainer with the rack in
position and the detents
engaged. [4 and 5]
Note
Be sure that both
detent pins are in
contact with the rack.
6. Reattach the barcode reader
(loose).
Note
Adjustment of the
barcode reader is
necessary at this time.
Completion
Install Tower Cover [3] and close
left [1] and right [2] front access
covers.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors
Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
G1.01 HGB Flow Cell
Version - 201962-103_2781_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921292201
HGB FLOW CELL ASSY, CDRUBY
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
G1.01 HGB Flow Cell
Time Required
Tools/Materials
00:45 min
Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power
OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2] (front) access
covers and remove the tower cover [3].
Remove Tubing
and Connector
Note
Prior to removing the HGB Flow Cell tubing,
be sure to mark the lines for proper assembly.
1. Remove the tubing [1] from the flow cell (two
(2) in front, two (2) on top and one at the
base).
2. Disconnect the in-line cable connector. [2]
Reference
Remove HGB
Flow Cell
1. Remove the two (2) screws [1] on top of the
HGB flow cell to remove the flow cell cover.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2] at back of the
flow cell to remove it.
Replacement
Action
Replace HGB Flow Cell
Steps
Reference
1. Replace the HGB Flow Cell by following the steps above in reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-05 HGB Current Verification/Adjustment
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
Verify and document the following:
HGB output voltage = 5.10v ± 0.10v.
HGB Sample and HGB Ref=2050± 200
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
H1.01 Syringe Driver Assembly A-B
Version - 201962-103_2782_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8921217302
SYRINGE DRIVER, DUAL A-B
8921217402
SYRINGE DRIVER ASSEMBLY, C-D
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
H1.01 Syringe Driver Assembly A-B
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 45 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY
and power OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
access covers and remove the
tower cover. [3]
Reference
VIDEO
Note
Remove
Video contains no audio sound.
Autoloader Skirt,
Separate
Note
Autoloader From
Video shows the removal of the
Analyzer and
Syringe Drive Assembly A-B only.
Remove Syringe
Drive Assembly
A-B
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove
Autoloader Skirt
1. Remove Drip Plate. [1]
2. Remove the right and left panels
[2] from the rear rail of the sample
loader.
3. Remove the four (4) screws from
the sample loader skirt cover. [3]
4. Slide the cover toward the front of
the instrument and remove the
cover.
Separate
Autoloader from
Analyzer
1. Locate the sample loader slide
bracket [1] on both sides of the
unit and remove the front screw [2]
and loosen rear screw. [3]
2. Remove the screw [4] at the top of
the tower assembly.
3. Disconnect the tubing [5] from the
top port of the Y-Valve.
4. Grasp the sample loader and
carefully pull it out from the front of
the instrument.
Note
Be sure tubing remains connected
and protected from any damage.
Note
The Sample Loader should pull
away from the instrument
approximately three to four (4)
inches.
Remove Syringe
Driver Assembly
A-B
1. Unseat each syringe from its
bracket.
2. Unscrew the luer fittings [1] from
the top of each syringe and set the
syringes aside.
Note
Use gauze to pat the ends
of the disconnected tubing
to prevent leaks on the
instrument..
3. Remove the two (2) screws and
spacer bar that separate the two
(2) syringe drives. [2]
4. Remove the four (4) mounting
screws [3] from the A-B syringe
driver assembly.
5. Pull out the drive assembly and
disconnect the ribbon cables on
each side.
Note
Carefully remove assembly
to prevent damage to tubing
or other components.
a
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
VIDEO
Note
Install Syringe
Video contains no audio sound.
Driver Assembly
A-B and Secure Note
the Autoloader
Video shows the replacement of
to the Analyzer
the Syringe Driver Assembly A-B
only.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Syringe
Driver Assembly
1. Connect the two (2) ribbon cables
A-B
on each side of the syringe drive
assembly.
2. Seat the syringe drive assembly
back into the instrument.
3. Secure the A-B syringe drive
assembly using the four (4)
screws. [3]
4. Secure the spacer bar between
the two syringe drives with two (2)
screws. [2]
5. Reconnect all four syringes to the
tubings with the luer lock fittings
[1] and reseat all syringes in their
brackets in their brackets.
Secure the
Autoloader to
the Analyzer
1. Push Autoloader back into position
against instrument.
2. Secure four (4) screws in brackets
on sides of autoloader. [1 and 2]
3. Reconnect tubing to Y-valve.[3]
4. Replace Tower screw to secure
Tower to instrument. [4]
Note
Verify tubings are
undamaged or pinched
between autoloader and
instrument.
Completion
1. Secure the autoloader skirt with
four (4) screws. [4]
2. Replace Drip Tray [2] and the right
and left panels [3] from the rear
rail of the sample loader.
3. Replace the Tower Cover [3].
Close left [1] and right [2] front
access covers.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
H1.02 Syringe Driver Assembly C-D
Version - 201962-103_6121_2
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
H1.02 Syringe Driver Assembly C-D
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 45 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY
and power OFF.
2. Open the left [1] and right [2]
access covers and remove the
tower cover. [3]
VIDEO
Remove
Note
Reference
Video contains no audio sound.
Autoloader
Skirt,
Note
Separate
Video shows the removal of the
Autoloader
Syringe Driver Assembly C-D only.
From
Analyzer and
Remove
Syringe Driver
Assembly CD
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove
Autoloader
Skirt
1. Remove Drip Plate. [1]
2. Remove the right and left panels [2]
from the rear rail of the sample
loader.
3. Remove the four (4) screws from
the sample loader skirt cover. [3]
4. Slide the cover toward the front of
the instrument and remove the
cover.
Separate
Autoloader
From
Analyzer
1. Locate the sample loader slide
bracket [1] on both sides of the unit
and remove the front screw [2] and
loosen rear screw. [3]
2. Remove the screw [4] at the top of
the tower assembly.
3. Disconnect the tubing [5] from the
top port of the Y-Valve.
4. Grasp the sample loader and
carefully pull it out from the front of
the instrument.
Note
Be sure tubing remains
connected and protected
from any damage.
Note
The Sample Loader should
pull away from the
instrument approximately
three to four inches.
Remove
Syringe Driver
Assembly CD
1. Unseat each syringe from its
bracket.
2. Unscrew the luer fittings [1] from
the top of each syringe and set the
syringes aside.
Note
Use gauze to pat the ends
of the disconnected tubing to
prevent leaks on the
instrument.
3. Remove the two (2) screws and
spacer bar that separate the two (2)
syringe drivers. [2]
4. Remove the four (4) mounting
screws [3] from the C-D syringe
driver assembly.
5. Pull out the driver assembly and
disconnect the ribbon cables on
each side.
Note
Be careful to prevent
damage to the tubing or
other components when
removing the assembly.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Reference
VIDEO
Install Syringe Note
Video contains no audio sound.
Driver
Assembly C- Note
D and Secure
Video shows the replacement of
the
the Syringe Driver Assembly C-D.
Autoloader to
the Analyzer
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Syringe
Driver
Assembly CD
1. Connect the two (2) ribbon cables
on each side of the syringe drive
assembly.
2. Seat the syringe driver assembly
back into the instrument.
3. Secure the C-D syringe driver
assembly using the four (4) screws.
[1]
4. Secure the spacer bar between the
two syringe drivers with two (2)
screws. [2]
5. Reconnect all four syringes to the
tubings with the luer lock fittings [3]
and reseat all syringes in their
brackets.
Secure the
Autoloader to
the Analyzer
1. Push Autoloader back into position
against instrument.
2. Secure four (4) screws in brackets
on sides of autoloader. [1 and 2]
3. Reconnect tubing to Y-valve. [3]
4. Replace Tower screw to secure
Tower to instrument. [4]
Note
Verify tubings are
undamaged or pinched
between autoloader and
instrument.
5. Secure the autoloader skirt with
four (4) screws. [4]
6. Replace Drip Tray. [5]
Completion
1. Install the right [5] and left panels
[4] from the rear rail of the sample
loader.
2. Install the Tower Cover. [3]
3. Close left [1] and right [2] front
access covers
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
1
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-114) • © 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
J1.01 Hard Disk Drive
Version - 201962-103_4869_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8200570701
DISK DRIVE, IDE 4.3GB OR LARGER
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
J1.01 Hard Disk Drive
Time Required
00:40 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Perform a back-up
of System Set-Up
Files and SQL
Database. VP-48
Backup Procedure
2. Perform a system
Shutdown, power
off the instrument
and remove the
power cord.
3. Use a Phillips
screwdriver to
remove the four (4)
screws securing
the top cover. [1]
4. Carefully lift and
remove the cover
from the top of the
instrument.
Preparation
(Continued)
1. Use a Phillips
screwdriver to
remove the four (4)
screws securing
the right side cover
[1] to the
Reference
instrument.
2. Carefully lift and
remove the cover
from the right side
of the instrument.
3. Loosen the upper
and lower
thumbscrews and
open the CPU door
assembly to gain
access to the Hard
Disk (HD), Floppy
Disk (FD), and
DVD Drive Area.
Removing
Drive
Note
Any of the
three (3)
drives may
be removed
as follows:
1. Remove the four
(4) screws securing
the faceplate onto
the drive housing.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove the flat
ribbon cables for all
three (3) drives.
Note
Remove
these cables
from the
drives only.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove the power
cables from all
three (3) drives.
2. Remove the four
(4) drive housing
mounting screws
and carefully
remove the housing
from the CPU door.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove and
replace the hard
disk drive.
Note
Write down
the
manufacturer
of the new
drive before
starting the
installation.
Note
The hard
disk drive is
on the
bottom.
Follow the
directions in
the picture
to replace
the
appropriate
drive.
Replacement
Action
Installing
Drive
Steps
1. Set and check the jumper(s) for the new
drive.
Note
The hard disk drive jumper(s) is
set in the �Master� position.
Note
Identify the manufacturer of the
new drive and set the jumper(s)
using the following pictures.
Installing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Perform Action: Removing Drive, in
reverse order.
Reference
2. Perform Action: Preparation, in reverse
order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
6
G5 - Precision
Verify precision is within instrument specifications. Precision within specifications = Pass
Expected Results
5
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
3
VP-49 Restore Setup
1
VP-47 Operating System Installation and Hard
Disk Drive Format
4
VP-46 Installation of Operator's Manual from
Media (English and Multilingual Version)
2
VP-41 Application Software Installation Procedure
7
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If the
system/instrument produces results, ENSURE
appropriate Quality Control is in specification and
calibrate as necessary.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If the
system/instrument produces results, ENSURE
appropriate Quality Control is in specification and
calibrate as necessary.
Background counts within specifications = Pass
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN RUBY is a
registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
J1.02 Floppy Disk Drive
Version - 201962-103_4870_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8200570201
Disk Drive, 3.5 inch, 1.44 MB
8200571301
Dk Drive, 3.5" 1.44MB WHT
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
J1.02 Floppy Disk Drive
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 40 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
Needle Nose Pliers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Perform a back-up of
System Set-Up Files and
SQL Database. VP-48
Backup Procedure.
2. Perform a system
Shutdown, power off the
instrument and remove the
power cord.
Remove Right
Cover
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver
to remove the four (4)
screws securing the right
side cover [1] to the
instrument.
2. Lift and remove the cover
carefully from the right side
of the instrument.
Reference
VIDEO
Note
Remove
Video contains no audio
Floppy Drive,
sound.
Remove Drive
Cable, and
Remove Drive
Housing
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove
Floppy Drive
Note
Any of the three (3) drives
may be removed as follows:
1. Remove the four (4) screws
securing the faceplate onto
the drive housing. [1]
2. Remove the face plate and
disconnect the two cables.
[2]
3. Loosen the upper and lower
thumbscrews to pull the
CPU housing out. [3]
4. Loosen thumbscrews to
CPU door. [4]
5. Open the CPU door
assembly to gain access to
the Hard Disk (HD), Floppy
Disk (FD), and DVD Drive
Area.
Note
Any of the three (3)
drives may be
removed as follows
below.
Remove Drive Remove the flat ribbon cables for
Cable
all three (3) drives. [5]
Note
Remove these cables from
the drives only.
Remove Drive
Housing
1. Remove the power cables
from all three (3) drives. [1]
2. Remove the four (4) drive
housing mounting screws
[2] and carefully remove the
housing from the CPU door.
3. Remove the four (4) screws
that hold the Floppy Drive
in the housing. [3]
Replacement
Action
VIDEO
Install the
Floppy Drive
and Install
The Face
Plate
Steps
Reference
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
Note
Video shows the
replacement of the Floppy
Drive.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install Floppy
Drive
1. Cut out the tab from the
PCB of the Floppy Drive
(Figure 1).
2. Position the Floppy Drive
into the drive housing and
replace the four (4) screws
to secure the drive. [3]
3. Reseat drive housing into
CPU door and securely
mount with four screws. [2]
Note
Make sure cables to
face plate are
accessible.
4. Open the CPU housing and
open the internal door to the
housing.
5. Connect the power cables
[1] and ribbon cables to the
appropriate drives. [5]
6. Close the CPU housing door
and tighten the
thumbscrews..
7. Push the CPU housing back
into the instrument and
tighten the two (2)
thumbscrews.
Install the
Face Plate
1. Connect the two (2) cables
to the face plate. [2]
2. Mount the face plate to the
side of the instrument with
the four screws. [1]
Completion
1. Install the right side cover [1]
to the instrument.
2. Secure with the four (4)
screws.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
3
G5 - Precision
Verify precision is within instrument
specifications.
Precision within specifications = Pass
2
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
1
G28 - Floppy Disk
Verify that the LED on the floppy disk drive
turns on.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
J1.03 DVD Drive
Version - 201962-103_4871_3
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
J1.03 DVD Drive
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.
Time Required 40 min
Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
Needle Nose Pliers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Perform a back-up of System
Set-Up Files and SQL
Database. VP-48 Backup
Procedure.
2. Perform a system Shutdown,
power off the instrument and
remove the power cord.
Remove Right
Cover
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
remove the four (4) screws
securing the right side cover
[1] to the instrument.
2. Carefully lift and remove the
cover from the right side of
the instrument.
Reference
VIDEO
Remove DVD
Drive
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove Face
Plate
Note
Any of the three (3) drives
may be removed as follows:
1. Remove the four (4) screws
securing the faceplate onto
the drive housing. [1]
2. Remove the face plate and
disconnect the two cables. [2]
3. Loosen the upper and lower
thumbscrews to pull the CPU
housing out. [3]
4. Loosen thumbscrews to CPU
door. [4]
5. Open the CPU door assembly
to gain access to the Hard
Disk (HD), Floppy Disk (FD),
and DVD Drive Area.
Remove Drive
Housing and
DVD Drive
1. Remove the flat ribbon cables
for all three (3) drives. [5]
Note
Remove these cables
from the drives only.
2. Remove the power cables
from all three (3) drives. [1]
3. Remove the four (4) drive
housing mounting screws [2]
and carefully remove the
housing from the CPU door.
4. Remove the four (4) screws
that hold the DVD drive in the
housing. [3]
Replacement
Action
Install Drive
Steps
Reference
Set and check the jumper for the new
drive.
Note
The DVD drive jumper(s) is
set in the "Slave" position.
Note
Identify the manufacturer of
the new drive.
VIDEO
Install DVD
Drive, Drive
Housing and
Face Plate
Note
Video contains no audio
sound.
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Install DVD
Drive and
Drive Housing
1. Position the DVD drive into
the drive housing and replace
the four (4) screws to secure
the drive. [3]
2. Reseat drive housing into CPU
door and securely mount with
four (4) screws. [2]
Note
Make sure cables to
face plate are
accessible.
3. Open the CPU housing and
open the internal door to the
housing.
4. Connect the power cables [1]
and ribbon cables to the
appropriate drives. [5]
5. Close the CPU housing door
and tighten the thumbscrews.
6. Push the CPU housing back
into the instrument and tighten
the two (2) thumbscrews.
Install Face
Plate
Completion
1. Connect the two (2) cables to
the face plate. {2]
2. Mount the face plate to the
side of the instrument with the
four (4) screws. [1]
Replace the right side cover [1] to the
instrument, securing it with the four
(4) screws.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
3
G5 - Precision
Verify precision is within instrument
specifications.
Precision within specifications = Pass
2
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
1
VP-49 Restore Setup
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2015 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
J1.04 SATA Hard Disk Drive
Version - 201962-103_5892_2
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8200572801
DK DRIVE SATA DESKTOP
8200572901
ADAPTER SATA IDE
9130744
KIT DK DRIVE SATA WITH ADAPTER
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
J1.04 SATA Hard Disk Drive
Time Required 00:40 minutes
Tools/Materials Philips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Perform a back-up of System SetUp Files and SQL Database. VP48 Backup Procedure
2. Perform a system Shutdown,
power off the instrument and
remove the power cord.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
remove the four (4) screws
securing the top cover. [1]
4. Carefully lift and remove the cover
from the top of the instrument.
Preparation
(Continued)
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
remove the four (4) screws
securing the right side cover [1] to
Reference
the instrument.
2. Carefully lift and remove the cover
from the right side of the
instrument.
3. Loosen the upper and lower
thumbscrews and open the CPU
door assembly to gain access to
the Hard Disk (HD), Floppy Disk
(FD), and DVD Drive Area.
Removing
Drive
Note
Any of the three (3) drives may be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the four (4)
screws securing the
faceplate onto the drive
housing.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove the flat ribbon cables for
all three (3) drives.
Note
Remove these cables from the
drives only.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove the power cables from all
three (3) drives.
2. Remove the four (4) drive housing
mounting screws and carefully
remove the housing from the CPU
door.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove and replace the Hard
Disk drive.
Note
The Hard Disk drive is on the
bottom. Follow the directions in
the picture to replace the
appropriate drive.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Installing Drive
1. Set and check the
jumper(s) for the new
drive.
Note
The Hard Disk drive
jumper(s) is set in the
Reference
Master position.
Note
Set the jumper(s) using
the following pictures.
Installing Drive
(Continued)
1. Perform Action: Removing
Drive, in reverse order.
2. Perform Action: Preparation, in
reverse order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
6
G5 - Precision
Verify precision is within instrument
specifications.
Precision within specifications = Pass
Verfiy percision is within instrument
specifications.
5
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
3
VP-49 Restore Setup
1
VP-47 Operating System Installation and Hard
Disk Drive Format
4
VP-46 Installation of Operator's Manual from
Media (English and Multilingual Version)
2
VP-41 Application Software Installation
Procedure
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-113) • © 2006, 2014 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
J1.05 SATA DVD Drive
Version - 201962-103_5893_1
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number
Description
8200572901
ADAPTER SATA IDE
8200573901
DVD/CD RW COMBO SATA BEIGE
9130745
KIT, DVD/CD RW SATA WITH ADAPTER
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
J1.05 SATA DVD Drive
Time Required 00:40 minutes
Tools/Materials Philips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Perform a back-up
of System Set-Up
Files and SQL
Database. VP-48
Backup Procedure
2. Perform a system
Shutdown, power off
the instrument and
remove the power
cord.
3. Use a Phillips
screwdriver to
remove the four (4)
screws securing the
top cover. [1]
4. Carefully lift and
remove the cover
Reference
from the top of the
instrument.
Preparation
(Continued)
1. Use a Phillips
screwdriver to
remove the four (4)
screws securing the
right side cover [1]
to the instrument.
2. Carefully lift and
remove the cover
from the right side
of the instrument.
3. Loosen the upper
and lower
thumbscrews and
open the CPU door
assembly to gain
access to the Hard
Disk (HD), Floppy
Disk (FD), and DVD
Drive Area.
Removing
Drive
Note
Any of the three (3)
drives may be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the four (4)
screws securing the
faceplate onto the
drive housing.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove the flat
ribbon cables for all
three (3) drives.
Note
Remove these
cables from the
drives only.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove the power
cables from all three
(3) drives.
2. Remove the four (4)
drive housing
mounting screws
and carefully
remove the housing
from the CPU door.
Removing
Drive
(Continued)
1. Remove and
replace the DVD
drive.
Note
The DVD drive is on
the top. Follow the
directions in the
picture to replace
the appropriate
drive.
Replacement
Action
Steps
Installing Drive
1. Set and check the
jumper(s) for the new drive.
Note
The DVD drive jumper(s) is
set in the Slave position.
Note
Set the jumper(s) using the
following pictures.
Reference
Installing Drive
(Continued)
1. Perform Action: Removing
Drive, in reverse order.
2. Perform Action:
Preparation, in reverse
order.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
Expected Results
4
G5 - Precision
Verify precision is within instrument
specifications.
Precision within specifications = Pass
3
G7 - Background Counts
Verify background counts are within
specifications.
Background counts within specifications =
Pass
2
VP-53 BIOS Setup and Configuration
Procedure
1
VP-49 Restore Setup
5
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-113) • © 2006, 2014 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
K1.01 Back Panel Fan Replacement
Version - 201962-103_5606_1
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
K1.01 Back Panel Fan Replacement
Time Required
01:00 hr
Phillips Screwdriver
11/32"
Nut Driver
Tools/Materials
Adjustable Wrench
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Removal
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Place the instrument in STANDBY and power OFF.
2. Disconnect power from the power source.
3. Remove the back panel outer screws (14 screws) [1].
4. Remove the 2 screws on the top left of the back fans.
These attach to the laser bench on the inside. [2]
Reference
5. Carefully pull away on the back to allow access to the 2
fans. It is not necessary to remove any reagent tubing. Be
careful to not disconnect any electrical wires.
Remove
the 2 back
panel fans
1. Carefully unplug the 2 fan cables by pushing on the black
latch in the connectors [1]
2. Using an 11/32" nut driver or an adjustable wrench, and a
screwdriver, locate and remove the four (4) screws [2] from
the back of the top fan first. Take off the fan including the
metal guards and place to the side.
3. Remove the bottom fan using an 11/32" nut driver or an
adjustable wrench, and a screwdriver as before. Place the
metal guards and bottom fan off to the side.
Replacing
the fans
Replace
the back
cover
1. Replace the bottom fan with a new one using an 11/32" nut
driver or an adjustable wrench, and a screwdriver as before,
putting the metal guards on in the correct orientation [1].
Connect the new fan into the cable and verify the latch is
secure.
2. Verify that the metal guards are facing outwards from the
instrument.
3. Also verify that the white side of the fan is visible from the
back. This ensures air is blowing out (Towards you).
4. Replace the top fan as before, ensuring proper orientation
and verifying that it is plugged into the fan cable.
1. Align the back panel to the back of the instrument. Screw in
the 2 screws that attach to the laser bench on the inside. [1]
2. Reinstall the back cover outer screws (14 screws) [2].
Power On
1. Reconnect power to the power source.
2. Turn the instrument back ON. Verify that both of the fans
are blowing out (Towards you) when the instrument comes
back on.
Verification Procedures
Order
VP Description
VP Detail / Note
1
G14 - Fan
Verify that the fan is rotating and that the air
flows in the correct direction.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
Expected Results
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories in
various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-01 System Voltage Verification
Version - 201963-103_1170_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-01 System Voltage Verification
Purpose
To verify the instrument power supply voltages on the Power Distribution Module.
# 2 Phillips Screwdriver
Materials Required Digital Multimeter
Clip Leads
Action
Steps
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Reference
Preparation
1. Place the system into STANDBY and power
OFF the analyzer.
2. Remove the right side cover and open the
computer door to gain access to the power
supply module.
3. Locate the PDM PCB mounted on top of the
computer door.
Note
The PDM PCB can also be accessed by
removing the top cover (four screws) and
locating the PCB on the right side of the
analyzer.
Measure and
Verify System
Voltage
Power Distribution Module Test Points (Old Style Board)
1. Connect the negative clip lead on E8 (GND).
2. Connect the positive clip lead to the desired test
point according to Power Distribution Module
Voltages.
3. Power ON the analyzer.
4. Measure and verify the voltages according to
Power Distribution Module Voltages.
Note
Be sure to power OFF the analyzer
before connecting or removing the clip
leads on the test points. Failure to do so
may result in component damage.
Power Distribution Module Test Points (New Style Board)
Power Distribution Module Voltages
Note
Measure to E8 (GND)
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-02 A/D Verification/10 Volt Reference Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1169_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-02 A/D Verification/10 Volt Reference Adjustment
Verifies the accuracy of the A/D Converter by using the A/D to read the 9.901 volt reference
Purpose generated on the CPU/DCM PCB and to set the level of the 10 volt reference.
Not
Type Assessed
Note
The CELL-DYN Ruby utilizes an A/D converter to convert all critical voltages levels to a 12-bit
digital code. This code is read by the computer and these voltages are then displayed on the
Digital/Voltage Readings screen in the Diagnostics menu.
# 2 Phillips Screwdriver
Materials Digital Multimeter
Required Clip Leads
Potentiometer Adjustment Tool
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Remove the right side cover (four screws).
2. Loosen the top and bottom knurl capture
screws [1] on the right side of the door assembly
to gain access to the CPU/DCM PCB.
00:05
Time min
Reference
Open CPU
Access Door
1. Turn the knurl locking pins [1] on the door
assembly counter clockwise and open the CPU
access door.
Adjust A/D
Converter
1. Locate the CPU/DCM PCB on the inside of the
right side door assembly and connect the positive
lead of the DMM to TP4 [4] and the negative lead
to TPAGND [5].
2. Adjust R4 [1] for a reading of -10.0 V (± 0.1v).
3. Move the positive lead to TP3 [3] (9.901 V
reference) and verify that the meter reading is
9.90 V (± 0.03 V).
4. Move the positive lead to TP2 [2] (99mV
reference) and verify that the meter reading is
0.099 V (± 0.003 V).
Verify A/D
Converter
Adjustment
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Digital / Voltage Readings
9.901v ref (click on box to left)
Stream
Note
The Password for Operator ID: FSE
is required to gain access to the
Digital / Voltage Readings screen.
2.
Observe the 9.901v ref on the DCM section of
the Digital / Voltage Readings screen.
3. Verify that the voltage displayed is
9.90 V (± 0.05V).
4. Press Stop, followed by Clear All when
verification is complete.
5. Press Close to exit the Digital / Voltage Readings
screen.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-03 MAM Reference Voltage Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1168_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-03 MAM Reference Voltage Verification/Adjustment
Purpose
To verify and/or adjust the MAM reference voltage.
Type
Not Assessed
# 2 Phillips Screwdriver
00:10 min
Materials Required Digital Multimeter
Time
Clip Leads
Potentiometer Adjustment Tool or Small Slotted Screwdriver
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Remove the right side cover (four screws).
2. Loosen the top and bottom knurl capture
screws [1] on the right side of the door assembly
to gain access to the CPU/DCM PCB.
Reference
Identify MAM
PCB
1. Identify the MAM PCB on the door assembly
(top PCB).
Verify MAM
Reference
Voltage
1. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to TP2 [1]
and the negative lead to TP7 [2].
2. Verify the reading is 10.0 V (± 0.01 V).
If the reading meets the specification, the
procedure is complete.
If the reading does not meet the
specification, go to Adjust MAM
Reference Voltage.
Adjust MAM
Reference
Voltage
1. Adjust R84 [3] for a reading of
10.0 V (± 0.01 V).
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-04 VPM Reference Voltage Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1167_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-04 VPM Reference Voltage Verification/Adjustment
To verify and/or adjust the VPM reference voltage.
Purpose
# 2 Phillips Screwdriver
Materials Required Digital Multimeter
Clip Leads
Potentiometer Adjustment Tool
Action
Steps
Preparation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Verify VPM
Reference
Voltage
Place the instrument in Shutdown.
Turn the instrument power OFF.
Remove the left side cover (four screws).
Loosen the two (2) knurl capture screws from the
inner (SHM) panel and open the panel toward the
front of the instrument.
Locate the air supply line coupler. [1]
Move red switch to left (OPEN) and disconnect
the coupler.
Remove the screw [2] at the base of the Air
Power Supply assembly, which is used to secure
and prevent it from sliding.
Slide the Air Power Supply assembly out toward
the left of the instrument until it locks into place.
Reconnect the air supply line coupler and slide
the red switch to the right (LOCK).
Turn the instrument power ON.
1. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to TP2
(VREF+) [2] and the negative lead to TP1 (VREF) [1].
2. Verify the reading is 10.0 V (± 0.01 V).
If the reading meets the specification, the
procedure is complete.
If the reading does not meet the
specification, go to Adjust VPM Reference
Voltage.
Adjust VPM
Reference
1. Locate and adjust R16 [3] for a reading of
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Reference
Voltage
Assemble
Instrument
10.0 V (± 0.01 V).
1. Assemble the instrument in reverse order.
Note
Be sure to press the locking latch (located
under the assembly front rail) before
sliding the Air Power Supply assembly
back into the instrument.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-05 HGB Current Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1157_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-05 HGB Current Verification/Adjustment
Purpose
Verifies the accuracy of the HGB LED current to ensure a HGB output voltage of 5.00 volts.
Note
Not
Type Assessed
The HGB flow cell must be filled with reference solution to perform this
verification/adjustment procedure.
Materials
Required
None
Time
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Run one background count to insure that the HGB mixing chamber is full of liquid.
HGB Current
Verification
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select:
Digital / Voltage Readings
HGB output (click on box to left)
Stream
Note
The Password for Operator ID: FSE is required to gain access to the Digital
/ Voltage Readings screen.
2. Verify that the HGB output voltage on the Digital / Voltage Readings screen is
5.10 v ± 0.10v.
If the voltage is within range, the procedure is complete.
If the voltage is not within range, go to HGB Current Adjustment.
HGB Current
Adjustment
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Setpoints
Miscellaneous (in the Setpoint Entry screen).
2. Move the cursor to HGB Current: (on the screen).
3. Increase or decrease the setpoint value in order to set the HGB output voltage to
specification.
Note
00:10 min
Reference
A change of 50 yields a voltage change of approximately 0.3 V.
4. Press
Set Analyzer
Close
5. Repeat HGB Current Verification until HGB output voltage is set to specification.
Raw Data Summary
Verification
1. Run a background count.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Diagnostic Views
Run View
Raw Data Summary
Note
A check mark displays next to Diagnostic Views, which indicates that screen
is active in the Run View screen.
3. Review both the HGB Sample and HGB Reference readings. Verify that the readings are
within 2050 ± 200.
4. Verify that the HGB Sample reading is within 20 points of the HGB Reference reading.
5. From the Diagnostics menu, click on Diagnostic Views to deactivate (remove check mark)
and return the Run View screen to display results.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-06 Touch Screen Calibration Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1165_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-06 Touch Screen Calibration Procedure
To calibrate the touch screen feature on the screen.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Time
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Instrument must be in the Window XP screen.
(Exit the CD-Ruby application program.)
Touch
Screen
Calibration
Type
1. From the Windows application screen, locate the
Elo icon in the lower right corner. [1]
2. Click on the Elo icon to display the menu. [2]
3. Select Align [3] from the menu to begin
calibration.
Note
The message, Touch the targets from a
position of normal use. [4] displays.
4. Use your fingertip to momentarily touch each
target that displays on the screen.
5. When the message, Touch the screen. Does the
cursor follow your finger? [5] displays, contact
and move your fingertip around the screen
surface. Be sure that the cursor follows the
movement of your finger.
6. When the verification of cursor movement is
complete, touch or click on the green check
mark [6] to exit the program.
Note
If the cursor does not follow your finger,
click on the blue re-do arrow [7] to repeat
the calibration procedure.
Not Assessed
Not Assessed
Reference
Check Elo
Touchscreen
Properties
1. Right-Click on the Elo ico in the lower right
corner.
2. Select Elo Touchscreen Properties. [1]
3. In the Elo Touchscreen Properties screen select the
Properties 1 [2] tab and select Advanced [3].
4. In the Advanced screen ensure that Disable touch [4] is
UNCHECKED. If it is checked uncheck it and click Apply.
5. Click Ok in the Advanced Window to close.
6. Click OK to close the Elo Touchscreen Properties screen.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2011 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
Version - 201963-103_1171_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-07 Motor Operation Verification
Purpose
Materials Required
Allows visual verification of system motor operation by running an exercise routine.
None
Action
Verify Motor
Operation
Time
Steps
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Motor Operations
2. Locate the Exercise Motors drop down
window [1] and select the desired motor to
operate.
3. Press the Start button [2] (next to the Exercise
Motors drop down window) to begin operation.
4. Verify that the assembly moves smoothly
without stopping or jerking.
5. When the action is complete, select
Exit Diagnostics, followed by Init (F12) to
initialize the system.
Shear Valve
and Y Valve
Operation
Type
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select:
Mechanical Operations
Motor Operations
2. Locate Shear Valve Position and select
Aspirate [1] to exercise the motor. (The
Message from Analyzer field indicates the
action.)
Note
The Aspirate button toggles between
Aspirate and Dispense.
Reference
Not Assessed
00:05 min
3. Exercise the Y Valve Position by selecting
Open Mode [2]. (The Message from Analyzer
field indicates the action.)
Note
The Open Mode button toggles between
Open Mode and Close Mode.
4. When the action is complete, select
Exit Diagnostics [3], followed by Init (F12) to
initialize the system.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-08 Motor Initialization Verification
Version - 201963-103_1163_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-08 Motor Initialization Verification
Purpose
Materials
Required
Allows visual verification of the homing operation of the system motors initializing when a home
motor routine is executed.
Not
Type Assessed
None
00:05
Time min
Action
Verify
Motor
Homing
Steps
Reference
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Motor Operations
2. Locate the Home Motors drop down window [1]
and select the desired motor to operate.
3. Press the Start button [2] (next to the Home
Motors drop down window) to begin operation.
4. Verify that the assembly moves smoothly without
stopping or jerking.
5. When the action is complete, select
Exit Diagnostics [3], followed by Init (F12) to
initialize the system.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-09 Solenoid Operation Verification
Version - 201963-103_1175_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-09 Solenoid Operation Verification
Purpose
Materials
Required
Allows the operator to exercise a bank of eight (8) solenoids or individual solenoids to verify
their operation.
None
Time
Action
Cycle
Bank
Not
Type Assessed
Steps
00:10 min
Reference
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Solenoid Operations
2. Follow the on-screen instructions [1] to cycle the
desired bank.
3. Verify that the solenoids are opened in ascending
order.
4. When the action is complete, select
Exit Diagnostics [3], followed by Init (F12) to
initialize the system.
Step
Solenoids
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Solenoid Operations
2. Follow the on-screen instructions [2] to operate
individual solenoids.
3. When the action is complete, select
Exit Diagnostics [3], followed by Init (F12) to
initialize the system.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-11 Bar Code Reader Verification/Alignment
Version - 201963-103_1162_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-11 Bar Code Reader Verification/Alignment
Purpose
To provide instructions for using the bar code diagnostics and for performing alignment of the
bar code reader.
Not
Type Assessed
Materials
Required
Specimen Tube With Bar Code Label
Needle Alignment Tool (942008)
Needle Alignment Tool (9420081)
Not
Time Assessed
Links
Access Bar Code Diagnostics
Tube Bar Code Detection/Alignment
Rack Bar Code Alignment
Bar Code Read Rate
Access Bar Code Diagnostics
Action
Access Bar
Code
Diagnostics
Steps
Reference
Bar Code Diagnostic Screen Display
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Bar Code Alignment
Note
The Password for Operator ID:
FSE is required to gain access to
the Bar Code Diagnostics screen.
Note
The following Diagnostic Selections
are available:
Tube bar code alignment
Rack bar code alignment
Bar code read rate
Tube Bar Code Detection/Alignment
This test is useful for testing the customer's bar codes and test tubes under the same conditions as running samples. When using
the Tube bar code alignment diagnostic, you need a tube with a bar code attached. The tube should be of the type specified in
the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator's Manual (13 mm diameter x 17mm height), but need not have sample collected. The bar
code should be the same as those used by the customer. It needs to meet all of the bar code specifications, and be attached in the
manner specified in the CELL-DYN Ruby Operator's Manual, Section 4: Bar Code Specifications. The bar code reader should be
cleaned with lint free gauze and DI water.
Action
Perform
Tube Bar
Code
Detection
Steps
Reference
TUBE BARCODE Results
1. Before beginning, place a bar coded tube in a sample
rack.
2. Manually move the sample rack into position so that
the slot containing the tube is under the spinner.
Note
You can feel the spring loaded detent engage
the slot locating hole in the rack. The window
in the rack should line up with the window in
the inner rack guide wall.
3. Be sure that the Diagnostic Selection is set to Tube
bar code alignment.
4. When ready to begin press Start.
Note
The spinner descends and captures the tube.
As the tube rotates, the bar code reader
continuously reads the bar code on the tube,
and displays the Bar Code result and Read
No. on the screen. The results are displayed in
the form Read No. : X : X (successful
reads : attempts). Audible beeps are heard
when successful reads occurs. The test should
read any valid symbology consistently.
5. To stop the test press Stop.
If this test consistently misreads, check label
and replace if necessary.
If labels are still not reading correctly, check
them against the bar code specifications in the Bar Code Setup Menu
CELL-DYN Ruby Operator's Manual, Section
4: Bar Code Specifications. Also verify whether
labels contain a Check Digit and refer to Bar
Code Setup Menu (located under the Setup
menu, Administrative Setup), for correct
configuration.
If system is configured correctly, then ensure
the Bar Code Reader has been cleaned and
Perform Tube Bar Code Alignment.
Perform
Tube Bar
Code
Alignment
1. Use the CD3000 Series Needle Alignment Tool
(9420081) for making the tube bar code alignment.
Note
Remove the dowel pin with a pair of pliers.
The dowel pin can be reinserted after the
alignment is complete.
2. Insert the alignment tool into a rack. Be sure to rotate
the tool so the test bar code is exactly in the center
of the bar code window. [1]
Note
Use CD-3200 rack with the Needle Alignment
Tool (9420081). If a CD-3200 rack is not
available, stand the tool on the platen with the
bar code in the center of the window in order
to align. [2]
3. Manually move the sample rack into position on the
platen so that the slot containing the Needle
Alignment Tool is at the bar code reading window.
Note
You can feel the spring loaded detent engage
the slot locating hole in the rack. The window
in the rack should line up with the window in
the guide wall.
4. Be sure that the Diagnostic Selection is set to Tube
bar code alignment.
5. When ready to begin press Start.
Note
The bar code reader begins continuous
reading. The Needle Alignment Tool should be
read as TEST on the display. Audible beeps
are heard when successful reads occur.
If the Needle Alignment Tool is not reading
correctly, loosen the two (2) screws securing
the bar code reader assembly to the base, and
carefully move the reader left and right until
proper reading occurs.
6. When the reader is aligned, carefully tighten the
mounting screws and ensure the Needle Alignment
Tool still reads.
7. To stop the test press Stop.
Rack Bar Code Alignment
This test is used for verifying Rack ID and individual Rack Slot ID Bar Code detection.
Note
All maintenance items in the Maintenance view, Clean Loader Components should be performed before beginning this
procedure.
Action
Perform
Rack Bar
Code
Detection
Steps
Reference
1. Before beginning, manually move an empty sample
rack into position so that the Rack ID bar code is
directly in front of the read window.
2. Be sure that the Diagnostic Selection is set to Rack
bar code alignment.
3. When ready to begin press Start.
Note
The bar code reader continuously reads the
bar code on the rack, and displays the bar
code result and Read No. on the screen. The
results are displayed in the form Read No. : X
: X (successful reads: attempts). Audible
beeps are heard when successful reads occur.
4. To stop the test press Start.
Bar Code Read Rate
This diagnostic is used to further test the bar code reader to ensure consistent reading without errors. When using the Bar Code
Read Rate diagnostic, you need a tube with a bar code attached. The tube should be of the type specified in the CELL-DYN Ruby
System Operator's Manual (13mm diameter x 17mm height), but need not have sample collected. The bar code should be the same
as those used by the customer. It must meet all of the bar code specifications, and be attached in the manner specified in the
CELL-DYN Ruby Operator's Manual, Section 4: Bar Code Specifications. The bar code reader should be cleaned with lint free
gauze and DI water.
Action
Perform
Bar Code
Read Rate
Steps
Reference
Good Reads Display
1. Before beginning, place a tube in a sample rack.
Manually move the sample rack into position so that
the slot containing the tube is under the spinner.
Note
You can feel the spring loaded detent engage
the slot locating hole in the rack. The window
in the rack should line up with the window in
the guide wall.
2. Be sure that the Diagnostic Selection is set to Bar
code read rate.
3. When ready to begin press Lower Needle.
Note
The spinner descends and captures the tube.
4. Rotate the captured tube by hand until the bar code
faces the reader window.
5. When ready to begin press Start.
Note
The scanner reads the bar code 100 times,
and displays the percentage of good reads.
The same test is repeated 11 more times,
and displays the percentage of good reads.
6. The read rate percentage should be
98% for all
12 results.
If the test meets specification, go to Step7.
If the test is failing, repeat cleaning and
Perform Tube Bar Code Alignment. Then
repeat the test.
7. When the test is complete press Finish.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-12 Optical Specimen Sensor 2 Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1166_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-12 Optical Specimen Sensor 2 Verification/Adjustment
To verify and/or adjust the Optical Specimen Sensor.
Purpose
Type
Not Assessed
Dilution of Low control (diluted with diluent reagent to an RBC count of 0.8 ± 0.08 M/uL)
00:20 min
Materials Required DMM with leads
Time
Small non-conductive screwdriver (tweaker)
Jumper leads to clip meter leads onto test points (Optional)
The optical specimen sensor is used only during Closed Mode aspiration to sense the leading edge of the specimen and to assure
that a column of blood has traveled through the shear valve assembly. The optical specimen sensor is not used during Open Mode
aspiration.
Action
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the READY state
and in Open Mode.
2. Open the Right Access (Front) Cover and remove
the Tower (Nose) Cover.
3. Run a background count.
Adjust/Verify
Specimen
Sensor #2
1. Ensure that the aspiration line is properly primed
with diluent.
2. Remove the plastic cover over the two (2) sensor
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PCBs (located in the upper right side of the flow
panel). The optical specimen sensor PCB is
located on the right.
Using a Digital Multi-Meter, attach the positive
meter lead to TP1 and the negative lead to TP3.
Switch the meter to DC volts and adjust R1 to a
reading of 2.0 V ± 0.2 V. The red indicator LED
should be OFF.
Move the positive meter lead to TP4 and verify a
0.5 V.
reading of
Run a background and verify that the voltage
reading is never at a constant > 0.5 V during the
cycle.
Create a low control dilution with an RBC count of
0.8 ± 0.08 M/uL and present the dilution to the
open probe, and open V12 [3] to aspirate. Aspirate
the dilution through the shear valve and all the
way through the optical specimen sensor [1] by
Reference
about 1 inch.
8. With the dilution present in the sensor, the red
indicator LED turns ON and the voltage reading is
> 3.0 V.
9. Open V13 [4] to clear the lines of blood. Run a
background to rinse and replenish the line with
diluent reagent. Ensure that the LED returns to the
OFF state as when diluent reagent is present in
the optical specimen sensor line.
10. Install the plastic cover over the PCBs, Tower
(Nose) Cover and close the Right Access (Front)
Cover.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-13 LIS Communication Verification
Version - 201963-103_1161_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-13 LIS Communication Verification
Verifies transmission of data to/from instrument.
Purpose
Materials Required
Action
Loopback Connector (92532-01)
Type
Time
Steps
Preparation
1. Install the loopback connector to COM1 (rear of
analyzer) on the PC module.
2. Turn the instrument power ON.
Verify LIS
Loopback
1. From the Setup menu, select
Administrative Setup
LIS Setup
LIS Configuration
2. Disable (un-check box) Enable "Query All" [1]
and Automatic Link Test [2].
3. Select the LIS Tests and press
Loopback Test. [3]
4. Verify successful test:
If the message at the bottom of the LIS
Setup window reads Test was
successful [4], select OK [5] to exit the
LIS Setup window and go to Remove
Loopback Connector.
If after 15 seconds the message
Test failed displays at the bottom of the
LIS Setup window, go to Step5.
5. Select LIS Configuration and verify that Comm
Port is set to COM1.
6. Verify that the loopback connector is connected to
the correct COM port.
7. Press Clear Test Result [6] and repeat Step3.
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
Remove
Loopback
Connector
Check LIS
Link Status
1. Remove the loopback connector from the COM1
port.
Note
Prior to beginning this procedure, be sure that
instrument is connected to an LIS computer.
1. From the Setup menu, select
Administrative Setup
LIS Setup
LIS Tests
2. Press Test LIS Link. [1]
3. Verify successful test:
If the message at the bottom of the LIS
Setup window reads Test was
successful [2], select OK [3] to exit the
LIS Setup window.
If after 15 seconds the message
Test failed displays at the bottom of the
LIS Setup window, go to Step4.
Note
During this procedure, the CD-Ruby
is sending an ENQ (inquiry) to the
LIS computer and waits 15 seconds
to receive an ACK (acknowledge) in
response. An ACK in response
indicates a successful test.
4. Verify hardware and software connectivity
between the CD-Ruby and LIS computer.
5. Press Clear Test Result [4] and repeat Step2.
Enable LIS
Logging and Note
In order to turn on this feature, the Operator Sign
Capture
On must be set or logged in as CSC (upper right
Program
corner of window). The password is the current
date plus 5. For example, if the date is the 1st,
then the password would be 6 (1+5).
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select:
Debugging Functions
General Settings
2. Enter the CSC password to access the General
Settings window.
3. Locate the LIS Logging box [1] (in the center of
the window) and click on the box to check it.
Note
Leave the Debug Info box [2] disabled (unchecked).
4. Initiate LIS communication by either transmitting
results to the LIS computer or sending a request
to the Orders window.
Note
LIS logging can be kept on to capture
transmission to/from CD-Ruby. However,
keeping it activated for an extended period
of time occupies disk space and creates a
large capture file.
Retrieve LIS
Note
Capture
In order to retrieve LIS capture data, the LIS
Data
logging feature must be enabled, see Enable LIS
Logging and Capture Program.
1. Exit the CD-Ruby Application program by
selecting File, Exit.
2. Select Start, My Computer.
3. Select Syspart (C:).
4. Locate and double-click on CDRuby, LIS.
Note
A list of all captured files displays.
Filenames are created by the date and time
when the capture was initiated. For
example, LIS.060203.1705.txt was created
on February 3, 2006 at 17:05.
5. View the files by double-clicking on the desired
file (opens the NOTEPAD application under
WINDOWS XP and displays the file content), or
copy the files to removable media (floppy disk,
CD-ROM, or USB drive).
6. Return to the CD-Ruby application by closing all
opened windows, selecting Start, All Programs,
and CD-Ruby (executes the CD-Ruby
application).
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-14 Decontamination Procedures
Version - 201963-103_1160_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-14 Decontamination Procedures
Purpose
Materials Required
To decontaminate all surfaces before servicing.
Not Assessed
Type
Time
Not Assessed
Not Assessed
Note
For Decontamination Procedures refer to CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator's Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance,
Nonscheduled Maintenance Procedures.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-15 Vacuum & Pressure Retention Verification
Version - 201963-103_1159_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-15 Vacuum & Pressure Retention Verification
Purpose
To verify the system's ability to retain the appropriate vacuum and pressure levels.
Type
Not Assessed
Note
A failure indicates a leak in the system.
Materials Required
None
Time
Action
Steps
00:15 min
Reference
Preparation
1. Ensure that the instrument is in the READY
mode.
2. Locate the sample loader coupler [1] (on
the right side of the unit between the flow
panel and sample loader).
3. Locate the orange and green striped tubing
going to the coupler and use hemostats to
clamp the lines together.
Note
Be sure to remove hemostats when
verification is complete.
Vacuum and
Pressure Pumps
Off-time
Verification
1. Verify the off-time for both the vacuum and
pressure pumps is two (2) minutes or
greater between automatic recovery cycles.
Note
If either pump activates sooner than
two (2) minutes from the last
activation, troubleshoot accordingly.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-16 Vacuum & Pressure Level Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1156_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-16 Vacuum & Pressure Level Verification/Adjustment
To verify that the system vacuum and pressure levels are within specification.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Type
Time
Action
Steps
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Reference
Preparation
1. Ensure that the instrument is in the Open mode.
Vacuum
and
Pressure
Level
Verification
Vacuum & Pressure Specification
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select:
Digital / Voltage Readings
Check All
Voltages (below Check All)
Stream
Note
The Password for Operator ID: FSE is required to
gain access to the Digital / Voltage Readings
screen.
2. Refer to Vacuum & Pressure Specification, and verify that the
vacuum and pressure levels are within specifications.
If all the vacuum and pressure levels are within
specification, proceed to Fine Tune Vacuum 2 Open.
If there are any vacuum or pressure levels out of
specification, continue with Step3.
3. While in the Digital / Voltage Readings screen, press Stop,
followed by Close.
4. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Setpoints
Miscellaneous
5. Use New Set Points Formula to calculate the new setting(s).
6. Move the cursor to the appropriate vacuum(s) or pressure(s), and
enter new set points. new setting(s) and press [ENTER] key on
the keyboard.
New Set Points Formula
Note
Vacuum 2 Open set point must remain between 350 and
450, while meeting the specification. Vacuum 2 Closed set
point must remain between 420 and 500, while meeting the
specification. Vacuum 2 Retic set point needs to remain at
software default 300 and should not be changed.
7. Press Set Analyzer, followed by Close.
Note
If the level is reduced, the vacuum or pressure must be
bled off to the new level before performing verification
steps. A background count may be used for bleeding off
vacuum and/or pressure.
8. Repeat Step1 through Step7 until all vacuum and pressure levels
are within specification.
Fine Tune
Vacuum 2
Open
1. Run Low Control twice in Patient specimen type and verify each
time that the leading edge of sample reaches the ultrasonic
sensor (located between the Y-Valve and the input to the Shear
Valve).
Note
If the leading edge is not reaching the ultrasonic sensor,
the Vacuum 2 Open setting is too low. Refer to Vacuum
and Pressure Level Verification.
2. Verify no Sampling Error messages display.
3. Run High Control twice in Patient specimen type and verify each
time that the leading edge of sample reaches the ultrasonic
sensor.
4. Verify no Sampling Error messages display.
5. Adjust Vacuum 2 Open set point as necessary and repeat Step1
and Step4.
Verification
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select:
Digital / Voltage Readings
Check All
Voltages (below Check All)
Stream
Note
The Password for Operator ID: FSE is required to
gain access to the Digital / Voltage Readings
screen.
2. Verify proper vacuum and pressure levels. Refer to Vacuum &
Pressure Specification for specification.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-18 Optics Bench Alignment Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1148_4
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-18 Optics Bench Alignment Procedure
To verify/align the optics bench.
Purpose
Type
Not Assessed
# 2 Phillips Screwdriver
01:00 hr
Materials Required .050 Hex Wrench
Time
Optics Alignment Kit Cat. (8921183801)
DMM with Clip Leads
Laser Power Meter
7.0 µm Polymer Microspheres (8160600401)
Laser Safety Glasses (with OD1 for HeNe laser)
Syringe
Caution
Class 3B laser light when open. Avoid exposure to beam.
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Check the background results by running a
blank cycle in patient mode. Any issues with
backgrounds or hotspots should be addressed
first.
2. Verify with the customer whether the
recommended autoclean(s) are being
performed. The operator's manual recommends
that autoclean should be run daily, and before
maintenance. Extended autoclean should be
performed monthly.
3. Verify with the customer whether they are
changing the millipore filter (LN 06H92-01)
(ACS PN 6H9201), on a monthly basis as
recommended.
4. Verify that all vacuum and pressure readings
are within specifications.
Reference
5. Verify that the shear valve has been cleaned
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
and moistened (Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby
Operator's Manual, Section 9.).
Verify that the injection syringe, syringe drive,
and the peri-pump tubing are in good
condition.
Ensure that all of the optics related pinch
valves, pinch tubings, all associated fittings are
in good condition, and free from crimps or
other restrictions. (V-65, V-91, V-57, V-56,
V54, V-55).
Check all the tubing connections on WC-1 for
crimps or damage.
Loose dust should be cleaned out of the laser
bench by using a vacuum.
Perform optical flow cell cleaning and debubble
procedure (VP-34 Optical Flow Cell Cleaning
Procedure).
Clean the quartz lens on the flow cell using
lens paper and lens cleaner.
Perform Optics bench cleaning procedure VP33 Optics Bench Cleaning Procedure).
Verify that the offsets are all < 1.0.
Preparation
1. Ensure instrument power is OFF.
2. Remove top cover, both optics covers, and
open flow cell access door.
Replace Laser Tube
1. Disconnect the laser connector and short both
male pins to instrument chassis.
2. Remove Laser Clamps and replace Laser.
3. Install the clamps and tighten them until they
are snug, but the Laser can still be moved.
4. Move the laser body until 3/4 inch extends
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
beyond the front laser clamp and rotate the
laser body until the front label is on top.
Connect the laser connector and ensure the
laser shutter is closed.
Turn the instrument power ON.
Prime the instrument.
Allow a 15-minute laser warm-up period.
Open the laser shutter.
Verify Laser Power
1. Place the laser power meter detector head into
the upright mount.
2. Place the mount into the tooling holes between
the front and back mirrors.
3. Set the laser power meter to 20mW scale, and
switch it on.
4. Verify laser power reading is above 5.0 mw.
Note
New laser tube power is typically above
5.0 mw.
Verify/Align Laser for
True Vertical
Polarization
1. Place the polarizer lens in the beam path along
with the laser power meter and observe the
meter.
2. Switch to the 20 µW scale.
3. Rotate the laser tube until the power reading is
minimum through the polarizer lens. The final
reading should be < 3 µW.
4. Tighten both straps on the laser tube.
Note
Be sure not to move the laser tube
while securing the screws.
5. Check the laser power after securing the
screws. Repeat Step3 and Step4, if
misadjusted.
6. Remove polarizer assembly, detector mount,
and laser power meter from the beam path.
Perform Rear Mirror
Coarse
Verification/Alignment
1. Place the alignment post in the front tooling
hole (located next to the front mirror, between
the front and rear mirrors).
2. Verify that the laser beam is centered and
passes through the hole in the alignment post.
If the beam is centered and passes
through the post, remove the post and
go to Perform Front and Rear Mirror
Alignment (X-axis).
If the beam is not centered, go to
Step3.
3. Using a 0.050" hex wrench, adjust the X and Y
alignment screws at the back of the rear
mirror. Be sure that the beam is centered
through the alignment post.
4. Remove alignment post.
Perform Front and
Rear Mirror
Alignment (X-axis)
Note
Hanging Mount
This adjustment achieves maximum power
through the forward slit.
1. Mount the laser power meter head into the
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Perform Front and
Rear Mirror
Alignment (Y-axis)
hanging (detector) mount and place it on the
forward slit assembly. Refer to Hanging Mount.
Monitor the power reading from behind the
forward slit (Hanging Mount).
Using a 0.050" hex wrench, adjust the rear
mirror X screw (Mirror - Rear View) for
maximum power through the slit. Typically this
value is be 1.4 - 1.7 mW (approximately 1/5 of
the power reading from part A).
Remove the hanging mount and carefully slide
the flow cell out of the beam path.
Use the X screw on the front mirror to align the
beam to the center of the alignment hole on
Mirror - Rear View
the obscuration bar (Obscuration Bar and
Mirror - Rear View). This is easier to see with
the use of a neutral density filter, or the
polarizer lens to attenuate the beam.
Re-check the rear X adjustment (power
through the slit). Repeat X rear and X front
adjustments as necessary to achieve maximum
power through the slit with the beam centered
on the obscuration bar.
When finished, slide the flow cell back into
Obscuration Bar
place.
90D Slit
Note
This adjustment achieves minimum offset for
0D and 10D.
1. From Maintenance view, select
Special Protocols
Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell
Empty Flow Cell
2. Remove the cover over the PMTs.
3. Remove the pinch tubing from under V-56 and
connect a syringe to the T fitting at V-54. The
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
syringe is used to induce a bubble into the flow
cell.
With the flow cell empty, note that the image of
the flow cell walls are projected onto the 90D
slit (90D Slit). They display as two small red
marks on the edges of the slit. If the red marks
become hard to see, induce more air into the
flow cell using the syringe.
Adjust the rear mirror Y screw to vertically
center the red marks on the slit (90D Slit and
Mirror - Rear View
Mirror - Rear View).
Using a DMM, connect the positive lead to TP1
on the 0D photodiode PCB. Connect the
negative lead to TP2. Set the DMM to the
300 mV scale.
Pull the flow cell out of the beam path. Adjust
the front mirror Y screw for minimum reading
on the DMM. The end result should be a
reading of < 50 mV.
Slide the flow cell back in and repeat the rear
Y adjustment.
Slide the flow cell back out and repeat the
front Y adjustment.
Repeat both rear and front Y adjustments as
necessary until the red marks are centered,
and the DMM is reading minimum. The end
result should be a reading of < 50 mV.
Disconnect the meter leads from the 0D
photodiode PCB and connect them to the 10D
photodiode PCB. Positive lead to TP1,
negative lead to TP2.
Note
This adjustment is easier by using 2
DMMs.
12. Perform front mirror Y and rear mirror Y
adjustments for the 10D photodiode PCB in
the same manner as for the 0D. Refer to
Step6 through Step10. Ensure the final
reading on DMM is < 50 mV.
Perform Front and
Rear Mirror
Alignment (Y-axis)
(continued)
1. Slide the flow cell back into the beam path and
verify that the red marks are centered on the
90D slit.
2. Install the pinch tubing under V-56 and remove
the syringe.
3. Slide the flow cell back in and select Fill Flow
Cell on the Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell screen
and run one blank cycle to prime.
4. Verify that the DMM reading for each PCB is
< 100 mV.
If this specification is not met, repeat
flow cell internal and external cleaning.
If this specification is still not met,
replace the flow cell.
Prepare Polymer
Microspheres
Solution
1. Place 2 mL of diluent in a clean container.
2. Add 15 drops of 7.0 µm polymer microspheres
and mix well.
Remove Covers
1. Remove top cover and flow cell access cover.
Perform Optical Flow
Cell Alignment
(Coarse)
Beam Images
1. Loosen the locking screw on the lower (y-axis)
micrometer, and back off (CW viewed from top)
on the micrometer (Beam Images) until the
beam is striking the flow cell at a point to the
rear of the flow cell channel.
Note
The scatter pattern on the obscuration
bar should resemble A (Beam Images).
Placing a piece of white paper in front
of the obscuration bar aids in viewing
the scatter pattern.
2. While observing the scatter pattern, rotate the
micrometer CCW until the pattern of the rear
wall of the flow cell channel is observed, and
record the micrometer setting (B - Beam
Images).
3. Continue rotating CCW until the pattern of the
front wall is observed, and record the
micrometer setting (C - Beam Images).
4. Rotate the micrometer CW to a setting halfway between those recorded in Step1 and
Step2. This should coarsely center the flow
cell channel on the beam.
Note
The pattern resembles that of D (Beam
Images) and is at the brightest level.
5. Cover the opening with a black cloth to block
ambient light.
6. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Diagnostic Views
Note
A check mark displays next to
Diagnostic Views, which indicates
that the screen is active.
Run View
7. Expand the WBC Data folder, by selecting the
plus (+) symbol.
8. Select the CALC CV folder.
Note
The histograms for each of the four
channels displays on the screen.
9. From the Specimen Type drop down window,
select SRP. Enter the following into the
Specimen ID or QCID Field: 7_um_SRP (entry
is case sensitive).
10. Place polymer microspheres solution under
probe and press [START SWITCH] to aspirate
polymer microspheres and run a count cycle.
If there is data in all four displays, go to
Perform Flow Cell Alignment.
If there is no data, repeat Step3 through
Step10.
1. Prepare a microsphere dilution using 15 drops
of 7.0 µm polymer microspheres (concentrated)
into 2 mL of diluent. The count should be
between 1.5-3.5.
2. Place a black drop cloth over the bench.
3. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Extended WBC Diag
Note
Extended WBC screen is
displayed.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions and place
5.
6.
Perform Flow Cell
Alignment
7.
8.
the 7.0 µm polymer microspheres dilution
under the probe and select Start or F8.
When the count begins, observe the display
and adjust the lower (Y) micrometer for the
tightest possible population, and the lowest
possible CVs in the 0D/10D window. The goal
here is to get the CVs as small as possible.
Observe the 90D/90DP window and adjust the
right (X) micrometer to get the highest channel
results, and to move the butterfly pattern high
and away toward the upper right of the display.
Repeat the Extended WBC as necessary until
optimal 0D/10D and 90D/90DP results are
achieved.
Perform VP-20 System Gains
Verification/Adjustment.
WBC Mean Channel and CV Specification
Replace Optics
Covers
1. Replace both optics covers.
Perform Verification
90D/90DP Scattergram
1. Go to the Run View screen and select Patient
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(under Specimen Type). Verify that CBC is
selected under Test Selection.
Place the 7.0 µm polymer microspheres
dilution under the probe and press the Start
Switch.
If the alignment is good and the gains are
98% EOS. The
correct there should be
butterfly should display in green and above the
discriminator line on the 90D/90DP
scattergram. The example shown in 90D/90DP
Scattergram has typical shape.
From the Specimen Type drop down window, CALC CV screen
select SRP. Enter the following into the
Specimen ID or QCID Field: 7_um_SRP (entry
is case sensitive).
Place the 7.0 polymer microspheres dilution
under the probe and press the Start Switch.
From the Diagnostics menu, select
Diagnostic Views
Note
A check mark displays next to
Diagnostic Views, which indicates
that the screen is active.
7. Expand the WBC Data folder, by selecting the
plus (+) symbol.
8. Select the CALC CV folder.
Note
The histograms for each of the four
channels displays on the screen.
9. On a healthy bench it should be possible to
achieve CVs of < 3.0 for 0D/10D and < 12.5
for 90D/90DP. Refer to WBC Mean Channel
and CV Specification.
10. Run some fresh normal whole bloods and
verify the appearance of the scattergrams. The
populations should be tight with good
Normal Whole Blood Scattergrams
separation. Neotrophil and Lymphocyte clusters
should fall in the correct locations with no flags
(Normal Whole Blood Scattergrams).
Replace Covers
1. Install all covers.
Perform Backup
Procedure
1. Perform VP-48 Backup Procedure to save new
gains.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-19 PMT Dynode Voltage Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1149_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-19 PMT Dynode Voltage Verification/Adjustment
To verify and/or adjust the PMT dynode voltages for 90° and 90° depolarized channels.
Purpose
# 2 Phillips Screwdriver
Materials Required 3/16" Hex Wrench
7.0 µm Polymer Microspheres (8160600401)
CELL-DYN Ruby Diluent/Sheath
Clean Container
Black Cloth
Type
Time
Caution
Class 3B laser light when open. Avoid exposure to beam.
Action
Prepare Polymer
Microspheres
Solution
Steps
1. Place 2 mL of diluent in a clean container.
2. Add 15 drops of 7.0 µm polymer microspheres and
mix well.
Determine 90°
and 90°
Depolarized
Mean Channels
and Gain
Settings
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Auto-Gain Wizard
View Setpoints
Gain Settings
2. Record and save the gain setting values for WOC
90° Gain and WOC 90° D Gain.
3. Select Close to exit out of the Setpoint Entry
screen.
4. From the Auto-Gain procedure selection screen,
select
Verify/Set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°, 90°D &
RBC/PLT 0° Gain (7 um SRP)
Next >
5. Record and save the Target Channels for WOC 90°
and WOC 90° D.
6. Select Cancel, followed by Yes in the Cancel Auto-
Reference
Not Assessed
00:30 min
Gain Wizard? window.
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Diagnostic Views
Note
A check mark displays next to
Diagnostic Views, which indicates that
the screen is active.
Run View
2. Expand the WBC Data folder, by selecting the plus
(+) symbol.
3. Select the CALC CV folder.
Note
The histograms for each of the four channels
displays on the screen.
4. From the Specimen Type drop down window,
Verify PMT
Dynode Voltage
select SRP. Enter the following into the Specimen
ID or QCID Field: 7_um_SRP (entry case sensitive).
5. Place the 7.0 µm polymer microspheres solution
under the probe and press [START SWITCH] to
aspirate the polymer microspheres and run a count
cycle.
6. Observe the mean channel values for the 90° and
90° depolarized channels on the CALC CV screen,
and compare them to the mean channel numbers
recorded in Determine 90° and 90° Depolarized
Mean Channels and Gain Settings. Determine the
following:
If the mean channel values (taken from the
CALC CV screen) meet the recorded Target
Channels, (± 6 channels for 90° and ± 10
channels for 90° Dep.) (refer to table) and
the gain setting values (Setpoint Entry
screen) are less than 2500, the procedure is
complete.
If the mean channel values taken from the
CALC CV screen do not meet specification,
go to Prepare for PMT Dynode Voltage
Adjustment.
WBC Mean Channel and CV Specification
Prepare for PMT
Dynode Voltage
Adjustment
1. Remove the top cover from the analyzer, and locate
the PMT preamplifiers [1] [2] on the right side of the
optical bench.
Note
The board on the left is for the 90°
channel [1] and the board on the right is for
the 90° depolarized channel [2].
Note
R11 adjusts the dynode voltage on both
boards.
Dynode Voltage
Adjustment
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Setpoints
Gain Settings
2. Move cursor to WOC 90° Gain and enter 2000.
3. Move cursor to WOC 90° D Gain and enter 2000.
4. Select
Set Analyzer
Close
5. Cover the optical bench with a black cloth to block
ambient light.
6. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Extended WBC Diag
7. Follow the on-screen instructions and place the 7.0
µm polymer microspheres solution under the probe,
and select Start or F8 to aspirate the polymer
microspheres and start the Extended WBC cycle.
Note
Both 90° channels are extremely sensitive to
ambient light. The black cloth must remain in
place when adjusting the dynode voltages.
8. Locate and observe the 90° MEAN channel on the
Extended WBC screen and adjust R11 on the 90°
Preamplifier PCB (left PCB) until the 90° MEAN
channel being displayed is in close proximity to the
value recorded in Determine 90° and 90°
Depolarized Mean Channels and Gain Settings.
Note
This is a coarse preliminary manual
adjustment that is more finely tuned with the
auto gain circuitry.
9. Repeat Step7 and Step8 for the 90° depolarized
preamplifier (right PCB).
Verify Dynode
Voltage
Adjustment
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Digital / Voltage Readings
Check All
Stream
2. Verify that Ch 3-Vdyn/100 and Ch 4-Vdyn/100 are
less than 9.00 (900 volts).
Note
Dynode voltages greater than 9.00 (900
volts) indicate a problem or indicate that the
Photo Multiplier Tubes (PMT(s)) needs
replacement. Troubleshoot as necessary.
3. Select Stop followed by Close to exit the screen.
Perform Auto
Gain Adjustment
1. Perform VP-20 System Gains
Verification/Adjustment and verify/set WOC 0°, 10°,
90°, 90°D & RBC/PLT 0° Gain (7 um SRP).
WARNING
Failure to perform the WOC auto gain
adjustment results in erroneous patient
results. A WBC auto gain adjustment is
needed to reestablish the correct gain
settings.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-104) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-20 System Gains Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1150_4
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-20 System Gains Verification/Adjustment
Purpose
This procedure is used to set and/or verify the gain settings using the Auto-Gain Wizard for
the following:·
Not
Type Assessed
WOC 0°, 10°, 90°, 90°D (7 µm SRP)·
RBC/PLT 0° (7 µm SRP)·
RBC/PLT 0° (5 µm SRP)·
RBC/PLT 10° (3.3 µm SRP)·
RBC/PLT 10° (7 µm SRP)·
Linear RBC 0°/10°/90° (HCM)
Materials
Required
7.0 µm Polymer Microspheres (8160600401)
5.0 µm Polymer Microspheres (8160600301)
3.30 µm Polymer Microspheres (8160600501)
HCM (CD 26 08H59-01 or 08H59-02 High Control, or CD29 08H58-01 or 08H58-02 High
Control)
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Go to VP-18 Optics Bench Alignment
Procedure and perform Perform
Verification.
2. Verify that the CV's meet the
specification.
3. Be sure that all Scheduled items under
Maintenance view are performed and
are up to date.
Preparation
1. Instrument must be in Ready state and
in Open Mode.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Auto-Gain Wizard
Note
Reference
Time
00:45 min
The Password for
Operator ID: FSE is
required to gain access to
the Digital / Voltage
Readings screen.
3. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Enter SRP/FL-CAL
Demographics
Next >
Note
CELL-DYN Ruby
application software
screens (e.g., Auto-Gain
Wizard) will continue
referring to FL Cal.
4. Enter the lot numbers and expiration
dates for SRP 7.0, SRP 5.0, SRP 3.3,
and HCM.
5. Select Next >.
Note
The Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen displays and
Verify/Set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°,
90°D & RBC/PLT 0° Gain (7 µm
SRP) is automatically selected.
1. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Verify/Set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°,
90°D & RBC/PLT 0° Gain (7 µm
SRP)
Next >
2. From WOC 0°/10°/90°/90°D &
RBC/PLT 0°-Verify Gain (using 7 µm
SRP) screen, enter the Target Channel
values. Refer to Figure.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and
run the 7 µm SRP in the Open Mode.
4. The results of the 7 µm SRP run
occupy the Actual Channel row of the
table. Based on these results, new
gains are calculated and placed in the
New Gain row of the table.
5. Select Next > to apply new gain and
proceed to gain verification.
WOC & RBC/PLT 0°
(7 µm SRP) Auto Gain
Verification/Adjustment
6. Re-run the 7 µm SRP in the Open
Mode to verify the new gain settings.
Note
If any result discrepancies are
observed, select Cancel and
troubleshoot as necessary.
7. Select Next >, followed by Yes to
accept (save) the new gain settings and
begin the next procedure.
WBC Mean Channel and CV Specification
RBC/PLT 0° (5 µm
SRP) Auto Gain
Verification
1. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Verify RBC/PLT 0° Gain (5 µm
SRP)
Next >
2. In the RBC/PLT 0°-Verify Gain (using
5 µm SRP) screen, follow the onscreen instructions and run 5.0 µm SRP
in Open Mode to verify the new gains
settings.
Note
Target Channel for RBC/PLT 0°
(5 µm SRP) is 129 ± 1.
3. The results of the 5.0 µm SRP run
occupy the Actual Channel row of the
table. The Actual Channel results are
based on the Current Gain setting.
4. Select Next > to begin the next
procedure.
RBC/PLT 10° (3.3 µm
SRP) Auto Gain
Verification/Adjustment
1. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Verify/Set RBC/PLT 10° Gain
(3.3 µm SRP)
Next >
2. From RBC/PLT 10°-Verify Gain (using
3.3 µm SRP) screen, follow the onscreen instructions and run 3.3 µm SRP
in Open Mode.
Note
Target Channel for RBC/PLT 10°
(3.3 µm SRP) is 121 ± 1.
3. The results of the 3.3 µm SRP run
occupy the Actual Channel row of the
table. Based on these results, new
gains are calculated and placed in the
New Gain row of the table.
4. Select Next > to apply new gain and
proceed to gain verification.
5. Re-run the 3.3 µm SRP in the Open
Mode to verify the new gain settings.
Note
If any result discrepancies are
observed, select Cancel and
troubleshoot as necessary.
6. Select Next >, followed by Yes to
accept (save) the new gain settings and
begin the next procedure.
RBC/PLT 10° (7 µm
SRP) Auto Gain
Verification
1. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Verify RBC/PLT 10° Gain (7 µm
SRP)
Next >
2. From RBC/PLT 10°-Verify Gain (using
7 µm SRP) screen, follow the onscreen instructions and run 7.0 µm SRP
in Open Mode.
Note
Target Channel for RBC/PLT 10°
(7 µm SRP) is 202 ± 5.
3. The results of the 7.0 µm SRP run
occupy the Actual Channel row of the
table. The Actual Channel results are
based on the Current Gain setting.
4. Select Next > to begin the next
procedure.
Linear RBC 0°/10°/90°
(HCM) Auto Gain
Verification/Adjustment
1. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Verify/Set Lin RBC 0°/10°/90°
Gain (FL-CAL)
Next >
2. From the Lin RBC - Verify Gain (using
HCM) [1] screen, enter the LinRBC
0°/10°/90° Target Channels [2] using
the published HCM OPTICAL ASSAY
VALUES from the GSS Website.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and
run the HCM in the Open Mode.
4. The results of the HCM run occupy the
Actual Channel [3] row of the table.
Based on these results, new gains are
calculated and placed in the New Gain
row of the table.
5. Select Next > to apply new gain and
proceed to gain verification.
6. Re-run the HCM in the Open Mode to
verify the new gain settings. [4]
Note
If any result discrepancies are
observed [5], select Cancel and
troubleshoot as necessary.
7. Select Next >, followed by Yes to
accept (save) the new gain settings and
begin the next procedure.
Gain Settings
Summary
1. From the Auto-Gain procedure
selection screen, select
Gain Settings Summary
Next >
2. Select Print to print out a summary of
the gain settings, which includes
Original Gain and Current Gain.
3. Select Finish to exit the Auto-Gain
Wizard application.
NOC and RETC Gain
Settings Verification
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Setpoints
2. Select Gain Settings view and locate
the RETC 0° Gain, RETC10° Gain and
RETC 90° Gain settings.
Note
The password for Operator ID:
FSE is required to gain access to
Setpoint Entry screen.
3. Verify that gain values are the same as
those for WOC 0° Gain, WOC 10° Gain
and WOC 90° Gain settings. If required,
make necessary changes to insure that
RETC values are equal to WOC values.
4. Locate the NOC 0° Gain and NOC 10°
Gain settings.
5. Verify that gain values are the same as
those for WOC 0° Gain and WOC 10°
Gain settings. If required, make
necessary changes to insure that NOC
values are equal to WOC values.
6. Select Set Analyzer if changes were
made to gain settings.
7. Select Close to exit the Setpoint Entry
screen.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-104) • © 2006, 2012 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions.
null
VP-21 WBC OPTI-CAL Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1151_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-21 WBC OPTI-CAL Verification/Adjustment
Verify/adjust the gain for the WOC 90° and 90°D channels using OPTI-CAL as a reference material.
CELLPurpose Determine and store the polymer microspheres reference channels used for reference after an OPTI- Type DYN Ruby
CAL gain adjustment.
7.0 µm Polymer Microspheres (8160600401)
Materials OPTI-CAL product (9900005)
Required 1 red top test tube
Calculator (recommended)
CELL-DYN Ruby Diluent/Sheath Reagent
Action
Steps
Time
Reference
1. Ensure the instrument and laser bench are
performing within the recommended specifications
(WBC Mean Channel and CV Specification).
2. Ensure that the dynode voltages are < 900 volts.
Refer to VP-19 PMT Dynode Voltage
Verification/Adjustment.
Note
For any other optical bench
verifications/adjustments, refer to VP-18
Optics Bench Alignment Procedure.
Prerequisite
WBC Mean Channel and CV Specification
Preparation
OPTI-CAL Assay Values
1. With the instrument in OPEN mode, verify/perform
VP-20 System Gains Verification/Adjustment, and
verify/set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°, 90°D & RBC/PLT 0°
Gain (7 um SRP) using the current Target
00:40 min
Channels.
2. From the Auto-Gain Wizard screen,
View Setpoints
Gain Settings
3. Record or print the gain setting values for WOC
90° Gain and WOC 90° D Gain.
4. Select Cancel, followed by Yes in the Cancel
Auto-Gain Wizard? window.
5. From the Diagnostics menu, select SRP/Blood
Comparison.
6. Select Cell Regions and use the keyboard to
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
configure the screen to match the corresponding
OPTI-CAL assay sheet. Also verify the software
version, expiration date, and lot number printed on
the assay sheet.
Select OK to exit the SRP/Blood-Cell Region
Entry screen.
Select Patient from Specimen Type drop-down
menu in the lower left corner of the screen.
Prepare the OPTI-CAL product accordingly, allow
the vial to come to room temperature and mix
thoroughly before running.
Place the vial under the Open Probe and press
the Start Switch to aspirate. When the cycle is
complete, record the 90° and 90°DEP channel
values for Gran Mean.
Run the OPTI-CAL product two (2) more times
and record the 90° and 90°DEP channel values
for Gran Mean.
Calculate the average of the three (3) OPTI-CAL
runs for Gran Mean: 90° and 90°DEP. Compare
the results to the assay values given on the
corresponding OPTI-CAL Assay Values sheet.
The values should match within the following
specification, 90 deg ± 3.5, 90 depol ±2.0.
If the values are within specification, then
go to Enter New Gain Setpoints.
If the values are not within specification to
go to Step13 to compute new gain
setpoints.
13. Compute the new gain setpoint for the 90° and
90°DEP as follows:
New setpoint = X(Y/Z) where:
X = current gain setpoint (from printout)
Y = Gran channel value from assay sheet
(OPTI-CAL Assay Values sheet.)
Z = Average channel value from Step12.
Enter New
Gain
Setpoints
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Auto-Gain Wizard
View Setpoints
Gran Mean: 90° and 90°DEP
Gain Settings
2. Enter the new calculated gain setpoint values for
WOC 90° Gain and WOC 90°D Gain. Select Set
Analyzer to save the new values.
Note
Be sure to press [SET ANALYZER] before
leaving the setpoint screen.
3. Select Close to exit the Setpoint Entry screen.
4. Select Cancel, followed by Yes in the Cancel
Auto-Gain Wizard? window.
5. From the Diagnostics menu, select
SRP/Blood Comparison
6. Repeat Step9 through Step12 (Preparation) and
ensure recovery of Gran Mean: 90° and 90°DEP
to OPTI-CAL Assay Values.
Prepare
Microspheres
Dilution
1. Mix the 7.0 µm polymer microspheres bottle to
resuspend the particles.
2. Add 15 drops of 7.0 µm polymer microspheres to
a red top test tube.
3. Add 2 mL of CELL-DYN Ruby Diluent/Sheath
Reagent.
Enter New
Target
Channels
1. Select SRP from Specimen Type drop-down
menu in the lower left corner of the screen.
2. Run the 7.0 µm polymer microspheres dilution
three (3) times and record the SRP Mean channel
for 90° and 90°DEP.
3. Verify on each run that the SRP CVs are in
specification. Also verify the 0 deg mean channel
is 35 ± 3 and 10 deg mean channel is 65 ±5.
4. Compute the average mean channel for 90° and
90°DEP for the three (3) runs.
5. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Auto-Gain Wizard
Verify/Set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°, 90°D &
RBC/PLT 0° Gain (7 um SRP)
Next >
6. Enter the calculated Target Channels for WOC
90° and WOC 90°D. Press Enter after each input.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions and run the
7.0 µm polymer microspheres dilution to establish
the new gain setting values. Re-run the polymer
microspheres to verify the new settings.
8. Select Next > to accept new gain settings.
9. Select Yes to accept new settings.
10. Select Cancel, followed by Yes in the Cancel
Auto-Gain Wizard? window.
Save Values
1. Perform VP-48 Backup Procedure to save new
target channels and gains.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-104) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-22 Aspiration/Vent Needle Verification
Version - 201963-103_1152_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-22 Aspiration/Vent Needle Verification
Purpose
Materials Required
To verify proper Aspiration//vent needle movement and GS1 sensor operation.
BD Specimen Tube
Action
Time
Steps
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
GS1 Sensor Status Display
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Tower Tests
Needle (Place tube under needle)
2. Place empty sample tube in a rack and
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
manually move the sample rack into position on
the platen so that the slot containing the tube is
directly under the Aspiration/Needle Assembly.
Select Down. [1]
Verify that the spin cone captures the tube and
the needle moves down smoothly without any
stopping or jerking.
Check the GS1/GS2 - Needle Home status [2]
and verify that status changes from 1 to 0 when
the needle moves down.
Select Up. [3]
Verify that the needle moves up smoothly
without any stopping or jerking and that
GS1/GS2 - Needle Home status changes from
0 to 1.
Select Close Window [4] to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
Preparation
Verify
Aspiration/Vent
Needle
Type
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-23 Tower Unit Stop Solenoid Verification
Version - 201963-103_1153_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-23 Tower Unit Stop Solenoid Verification
Purpose
Materials Required
To verify tower unit stop solenoid operation.
#2 Phillips Screwdriver
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
2. Remove the left side cover (four screws).
Verify Tower
Unit Stop
Solenoid
Operation
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Tower Tests
Solenoid
2. Alternately select Retract and Extend.
3. Verify that the tower unit stop solenoid retracts
and extends smoothly and fully with each
command.
4. Verify that LED DS1 on SHM1 is ON with the
Retract command and OFF with the Extend
command.
Note
The SHM PCBs are located on left side
of the instrument.
5. Select Close Window to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
Install Cover
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
1. Install left side cover.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-24 Bar Code Spin Assembly Verification
Version - 201963-103_1158_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-24 Bar Code Spin Assembly Verification
Purpose
Materials Required
To verify bar code spin assembly operation.
BD Specimen Tube
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
Verify Bar
Code Spin
Assembly
Operation
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Tower Tests
Motor
2. Place an empty sample tube in a rack and
manually move the sample rack into position on
the platen so that the slot containing the tube is
directly under the Spin Cone Assembly.
3. Select Spin [1] to drop the spin cone over the
tube and begin the spin motor operation.
Note
The button toggles to Stop.
4. Verify that the tube is spun smoothly without
any stopping or jerking.
5. Select Stop [2] to halt spin motor operation and
raise the spin assembly off of the tube.
6. Select Close Window [3] to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-25 Tube Height Sensors (S1/S2) Verification
Version - 201963-103_1155_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-25 Tube Height Sensors (S1/S2) Verification
Verify the operation of the Tower Unit's GS1 and GS2 mechanism as it drops down to capture a
Purpose specimen tube. The status of S1 and S2 sensors is used to detect specimen tube types (BD, Sarstedt
or No Tube) in the aspirate position.
Not
Type Assessed
BD Specimen Tube
Materials Sarstedt Specimen Tube
Required
00:05
Time min
Action
Steps
Reference
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
Verify operation
of Tube Height
Sensors
(S1/S2)
Home Position Example
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Tower Tests
GS1/GS2
2. Place empty BD sample tube in a rack and
manually move the sample rack into position on
the platen so that the slot containing the tube is
directly under the Spin Cone Assembly.
3. Select Down/Up to lower the spin assembly
BD Tube Example
and detect tube type.
Note
Spin assembly automatically raises to
home position.
4. Verify the sensor status and for a BD sample
tube (see BD Tube Example).
5. Place empty sarstedt sample tube in a rack and
manually move the sample rack into position on
the platen so that the slot containing the tube is Sarstedt Tube Example
directly under the Spin Cone Assembly.
6. Select Down/Up to lower the spin assembly and
detect tube type.
7. Verify the sensor status for a sarstedt sample
tube (see Sarstedt Tube Example).
8. Manually move an empty sample rack (no
tubes) into position on the platen directly under
the Spin Cone Assembly.
9. Select Down/Up to lower the spin assembly.
10. Verify the sensor status for No Tube (see No
No Tube Example
Tube Example).
11. Select Close Window to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-26 Mixer Up/Down Verification
Version - 201963-103_1147_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-26 Mixer Up/Down Verification
To verify mixer assembly up/down operation.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
Verify Mixer
Up/Down
Operation
Note
In software version 2.0ML, the Load
Empty and Unload Nearly Full Flag
Sensors status boxes do not appear.
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Loader Tests
Move Mixer
2. Alternately select Down and Up.
3. Verify that the assembly moves up and down
smoothly without any stopping or jerking.
4. Verify that the Lift Up sensor is 1 when mixer
assembly is up and 0 when down.
5. Select Close Window to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation Verification
Version - 201963-103_1154_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation Verification
To verify mixer head rotation.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Action
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
Verify Mixer
Head
Rotation
Note
In software version 2.0ML, the Load Empty
and Unload Nearly Full Flag Sensors
status boxes do not appear.
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Loader Tests
Rotate Mixer
2. Alternately select Down and Up.
3. Verify that the assembly moves up and down
smoothly without any stopping or jerking.
4. Verify that the Rotate Sensor is 1 when the
header is up (135° angle) and 0 when the header
is down (home).
5. Select Close Window to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
Reference
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-28 Mixer Bladders Verification
Version - 201963-103_1164_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-28 Mixer Bladders Verification
To verify operation of mixer bladder inflation.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state and in Open Mode.
Verify Mixer
Bladder
Operation
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Loader Tests
Grip/Release Tube
2. Locate and release the mixer stop by rotating the
knurl capture screw 1 counterclockwise.
3. Rotate the mixer assembly toward the front of the
instrument until the bladders can be seen.
4. Alternately select Grip and Release.
5. Verify that the mixer bladders inflate [3] and
deflate [2] completely.
Note
Be sure to press Release (deflate
bladders) when check is complete.
6. Move the mixer assembly back to the home
position and re-attach the mixer stop by securing
it with the knurl capture screw.
7. Select Rotate Mixer and cycle between Up and
Down. Be sure mixer assembly operates
correctly.
8. Select Close Window to exit the Diagnostics
menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
Uninitialized. The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors Verification
Version - 201963-103_1176_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube Sensors Verification
Purpose
To verify rack advance and tube detection operation.
Specimen Tubes (2)
Materials Required Rack
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized state
and in Open Mode.
Verify Rack
Advance &
Tube Sensor
Operation
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Loader Tests
Rack Advance
2. Place a rack with tubes in slots 1 and 2 at the load
side rear wall (right/rear side of the Sample Loader).
Note
Selecting Tube Sensors, followed by Start in
the Sample Loader Diagnostics screen
activates the sensors for individual sensor
troubleshooting without rack advance. Select
Stop when diagnostics are complete.
3. Select Start.
4. Verify that the rack indexes smoothly through the
processing station without any stopping or jerking
during index movements.
5. Verify that when the tube in slot 1 is advanced to
Tube Sensor, Position 3, a 1 is indicated on the
screen. Similarly, when a tube is presented to Tube
Sensor, Position 4, a 1 should be indicated on the
screen.
Note
Be sure that Position 3 and Position 4 sensors
return back to 0 when no tubes are present.
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Reference
6. Select Stop to halt rack advance.
7. Select Close Window to exit the Diagnostics menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics changes the
instrument state from Diagnostics to
Uninitialized. The instrument must be Initialized
before continuing.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack Sensors Verification
Version - 201963-103_1190_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack Sensors Verification
Purpose
Materials Required
Action
To verify cross transfer arm and rack sensor operation.
Five (5) Racks
Type
Time
Steps
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Reference
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the
Initialized state and in Open Mode.
Verify Cross
Transfer Arms
& Rack Sensor
Operation
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
In software version 1.0ML the Load Empty and Unload Nearly
Full Flag Sensors status boxes were also included in the Sample
Loader Diagnostics screen.
Load Empty
The Load Empty sensor is never used. CELL-DYN Ruby software
(both V1.0ML and V2.0ML) raises the Load Zone Empty condition
Arms
(SIM 1111) when the barcode reader detects no rack after a given
number of index cycles.
2. Leave the load side and unload side
empty (no racks), and alternately select Unload Nearly Full
The Unload Nearly Full sensor is only used in CELL-DYN Ruby
Extend and Retract.
software V1.0ML. The Unload Area Nearly Full condition (SIM
3. Verify that the arms extend and retract 1110) has been removed from software V2.0ML.
(fully) smoothly without any stopping or
Example of software version 2.0ML Sample Loader Diagnostics
jerking.
window:
4. Verify the following sensor status when
the arms are fully retracted. [1]
Loader Tests
Unload Full = 1
Unload Nearly Full = 1 (v1.0ML
only)
5. Leave the load and unload sides
empty, and press Extend.
6. Verify the following sensor status when
arms are fully extended with no
racks. [2]
Unload Full = 0
Unload Nearly Full = 0 (v1.0ML
only)
7. Select Retract.
8. Place five (5) racks in the unload side
(left side), and select Extend.
9. Verify the following sensor status. [3]
Unload Full = 1
Unload Nearly Full = 1 (v1.0ML
only)
10. Select Retract.
11. Place four racks in the unload side
(left side) and select Extend.
12. Verify the following sensor status. [4]
Unload Full = 0
Unload Nearly Full = 1 (v1.0ML
only)
13. Select Retract.
14. Select Close Window to exit the
Diagnostics menu.
Note
Selecting Exit Diagnostics
changes the instrument state
from Diagnostics to Uninitialized.
The instrument must be
Initialized before continuing.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure Verification/Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_1187_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure Verification/Adjustment
To verify/adjust proper pressure setting for inflatable mixer bladder.
Purpose
Pressure Gauge
Materials Required Slotted Screwdriver
#2 Phillips Screwdriver
Type
Time
Action
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Steps
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized state.
2. Remove the front skirt cover from the sample loader (four (4) screws).
3. Slide the Sample Loader out on its rails toward the front.
Verify/Adjust the Mixer
Bladder Inflate Pressure
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Digital / Voltage Readings
Pressure 1 psi (check box to left)
Stream
2. Verify Press 1 psi is 12.5-13.5 psi.
If within range, go to Step5.
If not within range, perform VP-16 Vacuum & Pressure Level
Verification/Adjustment.
3. Locate the autoloader slide bracket on both sides of the unit, remove the front
screw, and loosen the rear screw.
4. Select Stop, followed by Close to exit the Digital/Voltage Readings screen.
5. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Mechanical Operations
Loader Tests
Grip/Release Tube
6. Remove tubing from vacuum/pressure port on the side of the mixer, and connect
tubing to pressure gauge.
7. Select Grip (applies pressure).
8. Locate the pressure regulator (on the right side of the Sample Loader, between
the instrument flow panel and Sample Loader).
9. Using a stubby slotted screwdriver, adjust the regulator for 6.0 psi ± 0.5 psi.
10. Remove pressure gauge and reconnect tubing to vacuum/pressure port.
11. Select Release to relieve the pressure being applied to the mixer bladders.
Reference
12. Select Exit Diagnostics.
Install Sample Loader and
Front Skirt Cover
1. Slide the sample loader back into place and secure it with screws.
2. Install the Front skirt cover to the sample loader.
Prepare for Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove pressure gauge and reconnect tubing to vacuum/pressure port.
Select Release to relieve the pressure being applied to the mixer bladders.
Select Exit Diagnostics.
Re-attach the Sample Loader to the instrument.
Install the Front Skirt Cover to the Sample Loader.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-32 Shear Valve Driver Lubrication Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1191_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-32 Shear Valve Driver Lubrication Procedure
Purpose
To lubricate the shear valve.
Type
Not Assessed
Oil (14237-015, Dallas/Europe; 1605806, Santa Clara)
00:45 min
Materials Required #2 Phillips Screwdriver
Time
Three (3) levels of controls
Action
Steps
Reference
Preparation
1. Power OFF instrument using the proper
shutdown procedure.
Lubricate Shear
Valve Driver
Shear Valve Driver Lubrication Points
1. Remove the shear valve driver from the
Analyzer (B1.01 Shear Valve Driver).
2. Lubricate the assembly (see Shear Valve
Driver Lubrication Points).
3. Install the shear valve driver.
Verification
1. Run background count and verify results are
within specifications.
2. Run an n = 10 precision study and verify
that CV's are within specifications.
3. Run three (3) levels of controls and verify
that results are with assay specifications.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-33 Optics Bench Cleaning Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1186_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-33 Optics Bench Cleaning Procedure
To clean optics bench.
Purpose
Not
Type Assessed
Cotton Swabs
High Grade Lens Paper (Kodak recommended - DO NOT USE Baxter S/P, as it may
scratch the lens.)
Canned Air - Optics Grade
Flashlight
Materials
Required
Caution
Class 3B laser light when open. Avoid exposure to beam.
Action
Steps
Clean Fan Filters
1. Clean the left side and right side fan
filters.
Clean Optics Bench
and Lens/Mirrors
1. Remove the analyzer top cover.
2. Using pressurized air, remove dust and
dirt from the optics bench and
surrounding area.
3. Remove all covers from the optics
bench.
4. Close the laser shutter.
5. Using lens cleaning paper on the end of
a cotton swab, clean the rear mirror,
cylindrical lens, front mirror, imaging
lens, and flow cell.
Caution
Do not use lens cleaning solution
on mirrors. If cleaning fluid is
needed, use reagent grade
methanol only.
6. Repeat the cleaning process to ensure
that all residual particles are removed.
Reference
Time
00:30 min
Note
Use a flashlight to shine on the
mirrors and lens in order to help
identify if dust and other
contaminants remain on the
components.
Inspect Laser Beam
Laser Output Halo
1. Open the laser shutter.
2. With laser on, check for a red glow or
halo around the opening where the
laser beam exits the laser tube (Laser
Output Halo).
3. Check for a red glow or halo around the
forward slit. If the laser output lens is
dirty, a halo displays on the forward slit
in the form of a football shaped laser
beam (Forward Slit Halo).
4. If a halo exists in either location, clean
the laser with a dry cotton swab, or use
lens paper (Laser Tube Cleaning). A
burst of canned air may be used to
remove any remaining particles. Be sure
to keep can upright.
Note
Caution should be used when
cleaning the laser output lens.
Use only a cotton swab. Do not
use any metal objects when
cleaning. Lens paper may be
placed at the end of the swab to
help reduce cotton fibers from
adhering to the lens.
Forward Slit Halo
5. Close the laser shutter.
Laser Tube Cleaning
Clean 10° Mirror
Mark Mirror Positions
1. Mark the position of the mirror and
housing with a pencil (Mark Mirror
Positions).
2. Remove screws and mirror (Mirror
Removal).
3. Clean the mirror using reagent grade
methanol or microscope lens cleaning
solution (green) and high grade lens
paper. (Kodak recommended - DO NOT
USE Baxter S/P). Ensure surface is
clean; use compressed air to remove
any remaining lint.
4. Replace mirror and align marks.
Note
DO NOT tighten screws.
Mirror Removal
5. Open the laser shutter.
Prepare WBC
Polymer Microspheres
Solution
1. Place 2 mL of diluent in a clean
container.
2. Add 15 drops of 7.0 µm polymer
microspheres and mix well.
Adjust 10° Mirror for
Maximum Mean
1. From MAIN MENU, press
[DIAGNOSTICS]
[MORE] (three times)
[WBC DATA]
2. Place the 7.0 µm polymer microspheres
solution under the probe.
3. Press [EXTENDED WBC COUNT],
[START] (aspirates the polymer
microspheres and starts the cycle).
4. Observe the 10° mean, and rotate the
mirror for the highest 10° mean reading.
5. Tighten mirror screws ensuring
maximum reading is maintained, and
erase pencil marks.
Perform
Adjustment/Verification
1. Perform VP-20 System Gains
Verification/Adjustment.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-34 Optical Flow Cell Cleaning Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1192_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-34 Optical Flow Cell Cleaning Procedure
To clean the optical flow cell internally.
Purpose
CELLType DYN Ruby
10 cc syringe
Enzymatic Cleaner (99644-01)
1% sodium hypochlorite solution or ISE cleaning solution (1360-02)
CELL-DYN 22 (93111-01) or CELL-DYN 29 PLUS w/Retic (08H58-01) tri-level
controls
Materials
Required
Time
01:10 hr
Caution
Class 3B laser light when open. Avoid exposure to beam.
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Verify Instrument is in Ready state.
Preparation
1. Perform an Auto-Clean procedure with enzymatic cleaner.
2. From the Maintenance view, select
Special Protocols
Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell
Empty Flow Cell
3. Fill the 10 cc syringe with the ISE Cleaning Solution.
4. Loosen the two (2) screws to the flow cell front access cover and
lift up and out to remove cover.
Fill Optical Flow Cell with
Cleaning Solution
1. Remove the pinch tubing from under solenoid valve 56.
Note
Do not disconnect the tubing. Leave the tubing out of
solenoid valve 56.
2. Disconnect the tubing from fitting #1 on the optical flow cell
manifold and attach a 10 mL syringe with cleaning solution.
3. Gently inject solution into the optical flow cell using short forward
Reference
and reverse strokes to create turbulent motion.
Note
Inject at least 8 mL of the cleaning solution to completely fill
the flow cell.
4. Disconnect the syringe and reconnect the tubing to fitting #1 on the
optical flow cell manifold.
5. Place the pinch tubing back in solenoid valve 56.
6. Let the solution remain in the optical flow cell for up to three (3) to
five (5) minutes.
Note
Do not allow the ISE cleaning solution to remain in the
optical flow cell for over 5 minutes.
7. Install the flow cell front access cover (two screws).
Refill Optical Flow Cell
with Reagent
1. Select Fill Flow Cell on the Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell screen.
2. Repeat the Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell procedure to fully flush the
flow cell of the cleaning solution.
Verification
1. Run three (3) background counts.
2. Ensure the backgrounds are within specification (see Background
Background Results
Specification
Results Specification).
3. Run three levels of controls and ensure results are within assay
ranges.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-108) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-35 Optical Flow Cell Wetting Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1185_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-35 Optical Flow Cell Wetting Procedure
To wet the optical flow cell.
Purpose
CELLType DYN Ruby
CN Free HGB/NOC Lyse (03H80-02)
10 cc Syringe
CELL-DYN 22 (93111-01) or CELL-DYN 29 PLUS w/Retic (08H58-01) tri-level
controls
Materials
Required
Time
01:10 hr
Caution
Class 3B laser light when open. Avoid exposure to beam.
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Verify Instrument is in Ready state.
Preparation
1. From the Maintenance view, select
Special Protocols
Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell
Empty Flow Cell
2. Fill the 10 cc syringe with the CN Free HGB/NOC Lyse.
3. Remove the two (2) screws to the flow cell front access cover and
remove cover.
Fill Optical Flow Cell
with Lyse Reagent
1. Remove the pinch tubing from under solenoid valve 56.
Note
Do not disconnect the tubing. Leave the tubing out of
solenoid valve 56.
2. Detach the tubing from fitting #3 on the optical flow cell manifold and
attach the 10 mL syringe with CN Free HGB/NOC Lyse.
3. Gently inject lyse reagent into the optical flow cell using short forward
and reverse strokes to create turbulent motion.
Reference
Note
Inject at least 8 mL of the lyse reagent to completely fill the
flow cell.
4. Disconnect the syringe and reconnect the tubing to fitting #3 on the
optical flow cell manifold.
5. Place the pinch tubing back in solenoid valve 56.
6. Let the solution remain in the optical flow cell for up to three (3) to
five (5) minutes.
7. Install the flow cell front access cover (two screws).
Refill Optical Flow Cell
with Reagent
1. Select Fill Flow Cell on the Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell screen.
2. Repeat the Empty/Fill Optical Flow Cell procedure to fully flush the
flow cell of the lyse reagent.
Verification
1. Run three (3) background counts.
2. Ensure the backgrounds are within specification (see Background
Background Results
Specification
Results Specification).
3. Run three levels of controls and ensure results are within assay
ranges.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-36 Temperature Control Module (TCM) Adjustment Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1193_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-36 Temperature Control Module (TCM) Adjustment Procedure
Purpose
To verify and adjust temperature control module (TCM).
Digital Multimeter
Materials Required Clip Leads
Potentiometer Adjustment Tool
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Initialized
state.
LED DS5
Verification
1. Verify that red LED DS5 is ON.
Note
DS1: Heater-1 (HGB heater) is energized
when DS1 is ON.
DS2: Heater-2 (WOC heater) is energized
when DS2 is ON.
DS3: Temperature at Heater-1 is out of
range (high or low) when DS3 is ON.
DS4: Temperature at Heater-2 is out of
range (high or low) when DS4 is ON.
DS5: Power (regulated +28 V) is present
when DS5 is ON.
TCM PCB Voltage
Adjustments
1. Using a DMM, connect the positive lead to TP5
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
and negative lead to TP0.
Locate and adjust R4 to +5.00 ± 0.01volts.
Move the positive lead to TP1.
Locate and adjust R7 to 2.39 ± 0.01volts.
Move the positive lead to TP2.
Locate and adjust R14 to 1.94 ± 0.01volts
Note
HGB heater is set at 45 �C and monitor
is set at 40 and 51 �C.
WOC heater is set at 25 �C and monitor
is set at 20 and 40 �C.
All temperatures are measured at the
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:20 min
Reference
heater block not at mixing chamber.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-37 Optical Channel Baseline Voltage Verification
Version - 201963-103_1194_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-37 Optical Channel Baseline Voltage Verification
Purpose
Materials Required
To verify optical channel offset voltages.
Black cloth (if necessary)
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Not Assessed
00:20 min
Reference
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in
the Ready state and in Open
Mode.
Verify Optical
Channel
Baseline
Voltages
Note
1. From the Diagnostics menu,
select
Digital / Voltage
Readings
Check All
Stream
For an alternate method of optical offset verifications, refer to
VP-18 Optics Bench Alignment Procedure, Perform Front and
Rear Mirror Alignment (Y-axis).
2. Ensure top cover is in place, or
cover optics bench with black
cloth.
3. Verify that Baseline 1 through
Baseline 4 are less than 1.0 V.
If any are greater than
1.0 V, perform VP-33
Optics Bench Cleaning
Procedure.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-38 Uninstalling Installed Version of Operator
Version - 201963-103_1195_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-38 Uninstalling Installed Version of Operator's Manual
The procedure to uninstall an old version of the CELL DYN Ruby Operator's
manual.
Purpose
None
Materials
Required
Action
Uninstalling
Operator's
Manual
Time
Steps
1. Ensure that Analyzer is
2.
3.
4.
5.
CELL-DYN Ruby
Type (170)
in Ready, Initialized, or
Uninitialized status as
indicated in the
Analyzer Status region.
From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar select Admin level
Operator ID (upper right
hand corner).
From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar, select File, Exit.
Select Start (lower left
corner), Log Off.
At the Log Off
Windows prompt, select
Log Off.
Note
When entering
information,
remember to
enter it exactly
as shown, as it
is case sensitive.
6. Select admin from the
user name display and
type Syssetup followed
by Enter.
7. Insert the new version
of the CD ROM
Reference
15 mins
containing the Online
Operator�s Manual
(CELL-DYN Ruby�)
into the DVD drive.
8. Select Start, My
Computer.
9. Double click on CDROM icon (D:) and
double click on the
Ruby Setup.Exe icon
(as shown) to execute
the program.
Note
If the icon does
not display as
shown, click
View on the D:
window Toolbar
and select Icons
from the drop
down menu.
10. Select the radio button
to Remove CELL-DYN
Ruby Online
Operator�s Manual
and click Finish.
11. Wait until the process is
completed, then click
Close. [3}
12. Select Start, Turn off
Computer, and
Restart.
Verification
1. From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar, select Help, then
Operator's Manual.
Verify that the manual
has been removed.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-39 HGB Flow Cell Cleaning Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1196_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-39 HGB Flow Cell Cleaning Procedure
Purpose
This procedure first uses the Auto Clean routine to clean the flow cell, and if that is unsuccessful
Not
Type Assessed
a manual procedure is used.
Materials
Required
CELL-DYN Enzymatic Cleaner
20% Bleach Solution
20 mL Syringe
Action
00:20
Time min
Steps
Reference
Preparation
1. Be sure that the instrument is in the Ready state and in Open Mode.
Perform Flow
Cell Auto Clean
1. From the Maintenance view, select
Scheduled
Auto-Clean
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the procedure, then select
Auto-Clean.
3. Run three background counts to purge enzyme cleaner.
4. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Digital / Voltage Readings
HGB output (check box on left)
Stream
5. Verify that the HGB OUTPUT voltage is 5.10 ± 0.10 volts.
If the voltage is within range, procedure is complete.
If the voltage is not within range, select Stop, followed by Close to
exit the Digital/Voltage Readings screen. Go to Manually Clean
Flow Cell.
Manually Clean
Flow Cell
HGB Flow Cell Plumbing
1. Manually open solenoid valve 93 to drain liquid from the HGB flow cell.
2. Prepare and aspirate 20% bleach solution into syringe.
3. Remove tubing from port [1] and connect syringe to port (HGB Flow Cell
4.
5.
6.
7.
Plumbing).
Inject bleach solution until it can be seen exiting top port. [2]
Leave solution in flow cell for five to ten minutes.
Manually open solenoid valve 93 to drain bleach from the HGB flow cell.
Repeat Step3 through Step6 with DI Water to flush bleach from flow cell.
8. Remove syringe, and connect tubing to port. [1]
9. Run three background counts to purge bleach.
10. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Digital / Voltage Readings
HGB output (check box on left)
Stream
11. Verify that the HGB output voltage is 5.10 ± 0.10 volts.
Note
If voltage is slightly out-of-range, perform VP-05 HGB Current
Verification/Adjustment.
12. Select Stop, followed by Close to exit the Digital/Voltage Readings
screen.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-40 Power-Up CPU/DCM 7-Segment LED Verification
Version - 201963-103_1197_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-40 Power-Up CPU/DCM 7-Segment LED Verification
To verify CPU/DCM 7-segment LED display.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Action
Verify
Power-Up
CPU/DCM
7Segment
LED
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Steps
1. Power-up the system and observe the 7-segment LED on the
Reference
CPU/DCM 7-Segment LED Status
Conditions
CPU/DCM (CPU/DCM 7-Segment LED Status Conditions).
Note
When all tests have passed, the initialization continues,
during which the CPU/DCM loads it's program into memory
from the hard drive. When the CPU/DCM begins running
it's program, the 7- segment display changes to an
alternating display of E then 1. The normal operational
state of the CPU/DCM is indicated by the continuous
alternating display of E..1..E..1 .....etc.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-41 Application Software Installation Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1198_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-41 Application Software Installation Procedure
To install system software.
Purpose
Materials Required
CELL-DYN Ruby System Installation Disks 1 & 2
Action
Type
Time
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Be sure to perform VP-48 Backup Procedure when
installing the application software.
2. Perform this procedure following an operating system
installation or when corruption of the application
program is suspected.
New
Application
Software
Installation
Note
Perform this Action only when the hard disk drive has
been replaced or the operating system has been
reloaded/installed.
1. Select Start (lower left corner), Log Off.
2. At the Log Off Windows prompt, select Log Off.
Note
When entering information, remember to enter it
exactly as shown, as it is case sensitive.
3. Select Admin from the user name display and type
Syssetup followed by Enter.
Note
Entering the Admin user mode allows full
access and user rights.
4. Insert the CELL-DYN Ruby Application Installation
Disk (CD) into the CD-ROM drive.
5. Select Start (lower left corner), My Computer.
6. Double click on CD-RW Drive (D:) and double click on
Setup to execute the program.
7. When the CD Ruby Software Setup window displays,
select from Step 1 CD Ruby Software Prerequisites.
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Reference
Note
The CD Ruby Software Prerequisites
installation process takes approximately one (1)
minute to complete.
8. Once the program is loaded, the message, MSDE is
installed. You can uninstall it now. displays. Go to
Reload Application Software.
Uninstall
Application
Software
Note
When reloading the application software, the program
must first be uninstalled before it can be reloaded.
1. From the CELL-DYN Ruby application program, select
File, then Exit.
2. Select Start (lower left corner), Log Off.
3. At the Log Off Windows prompt, select Log Off.
Note
When entering information, remember to enter it
exactly as shown, as it is case sensitive.
4. Select Admin from the user name display and type
Syssetup followed by Enter.
Note
Entering the Admin user mode allows full
access and user rights.
5. From the CELL-DYN Ruby application program, select
File, Exit.
6. Insert the CELL-DYN Ruby Application Installation
Disk (CD) into the CD-ROM drive.
7. Select Start (lower left corner), My Computer.
8. Double click on DVD-R Drive (D:) and double click on
Setup to execute the program.
9. When the CD Ruby Software Setup window displays,
select from Step 2 CD Ruby Software.
10. When the CD Ruby Software wizard displays, select
Remove CD Ruby Software followed by Finish.
11. Once the uninstall procedure is complete the
message, CD Ruby Software has been successfully
removed. Click "Close" to exit. displays. Follow the
instructions and select Close to exit.
Note
The uninstall process takes approximately ten
(10) seconds to complete.
12. Select OK when the message, CD Ruby Software
was uninstalled successfully! displays.
13. Go to Reload Application Software.
Reload
Application
Software
1. At the CD Ruby Software Setup window, select from
Step 2 CD Ruby Software.
2. When the CD Ruby Software wizard displays, follow
the onscreen instructions to load the application
software.
Note
The installation process takes approximately
three (3) minutes to complete.
3. Once the installation procedure is complete the
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
message, CD Ruby Software has been successfully
installed. Click "Close" to exit. displays. Follow the
instructions and select Close to exit.
Select OK when the message, CD Ruby Software
was installed successfully. displays.
Close the CD Ruby Software Setup window.
Remove the CELL-DYN Ruby Application Installation
Disk (CD) from the CD-ROM drive.
Select Start, Turn Off Computer, Turn Off to
shutdown the system.
Press the computer ON/OFF switch (located next to
the floppy drive) to boot the software.
Note
The system automatically executes the CDRuby Application software.
9. Go to VP-49 Restore Setup.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN RUBY are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-42 Hard Drive Utilities
Version - 201963-103_1189_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-42 Hard Drive Utilities
Purpose
Materials
Required
Provides hard disk utilities to scan the disk for possible corruption or bad sectors. Also, provides
the defragmentation procedure.
Not
Type Assessed
None
00:20
Time min
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Perform this procedure whenever bad sectors
or corruption of the hard disk drive is
suspected.
Preparation
1. From the CELL-DYN Ruby application
program, select File, Exit.
2. Select Start (lower left corner), Log Off.
3. At the Log Off Windows prompt, select Log
Off.
4. Select afse from the user name display and
type IbFSE! (case sensitive) followed by Enter.
Note
Entering the afse user mode allows full
access and user rights.
5. From the CELL-DYN Ruby application
program, select File, Exit.
Check Disk
Utility
1. Select Start (lower left corner), My Computer.
2. Right (mouse) click on Syspart (C:).
3. Select Properties, Tools (located along the
top of the menu screen).
4. Locate the Error-checking portion of the
screen and select Check Now.
5. From the Check Disk Syspart (C:) window,
select Automatically fix file system errors,
followed by Start.
6. A message displays asking you if you would
like to schedule the disk check next time you
Reference
restart the computer. Select Yes.
7. Close the Syspart (C:) Properties, followed by
My Computer screens.
8. Select Start, Turn Off Computer, Restart to
reboot the system.
Note
The Check Disk utility is automatically
performed. This process takes
approximately ten seconds to complete,
after which the system reboots and
executes the CD-Ruby application
program. Do not touch the computer
during this process.
9. Go to Defragmentation Utility.
Defragmentation
Utility
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform Preparation.
Select Start (lower left corner), My Computer.
Right (mouse) click on Syspart (C:).
Select Properties, Tools (located along the
top of the menu screen).
5. Locate the Defragmentation portion of the
screen and select Defragment Now.
6. When the Disk Defragmenter window displays,
select Defragment.
Note
The Disk Defragmenter program begins
its defragmentation process. The
duration of this process depends on the
severity of the fragmentation, as well as
the number of files. Do not touch the
screen during this process.
7. When the message, Defragmentation is
complete for: Syspart (C:) displays, select
either View Report or Close.
8. Close the Disk Defragmenter, followed by
Syspart (C:) Properties, then My Computer
screens.
9. Select Start, Turn Off Computer, Restart to
reboot the system.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-44 Vacuum Accumulator 1 and 2 Rinsing Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1184_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-44 Vacuum Accumulator 1 and 2 Rinsing Procedure
Purpose
To rinse Vacuum Accumulators 1 and 2 with DI Water.
Clean 500 mL Beaker or Container
Materials Required DI Water
12 inches of S3 Silicon Tubing.
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Be sure that instrument is in the Initialized
or Ready state.
Preparation
1. Open Left Access (Front) Cover.
2. Remove the Left Panel from the rear rail of
the Sample Loader.
Induce DI Water
into Vacuum
Accumulators 1 and
2
1. Locate VAC 1 and VAC 2 accumulator
drain lines. [1]
2. Measure and add 250 mL of DI Water into
a clean 500 mL beaker or container.
Caution
Do not place more than stated
amount of DI water in container.
3. Remove silicon portion of the VAC 1 drain
line (along with plug) and attach the 12
inch portion of S3 silicon tubing. [2]
4. Insert the end of the S3 silicon tubing into
the DI Water container and allow the
vacuum to aspirate all of the liquid.
5. Remove the 12 inch piece of silicon tubing
and install the original tubing along with the
plug.
6. Repeat Step1 through Step5 for the VAC
2 drain line.
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:15 min
Reference
Drain Rinse Liquid
with Drain
Accumulator
Protocol
1. From the Maintenance view, Select
Special Protocols
Drain Accumulator
Drain Accumulator (from pop up
window).
Note
The Drain Accumulator
procedure takes
approximately 2 - 3 minutes
to complete.
2. Select Init (F12) to initialize the system.
(Not required for Version 2.0ML)
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-45 System Language Change Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1183_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-45 System Language Change Procedure
Purpose
Materials
Required
The procedure to change the system language to English, Spanish, French, Italian, German,
Portuguese and Japanese.
Correct keyboard for the language:
Time
German: 7D11-30
French: 7D11-20
Spanish: 7D11-50
Italian: 7D11-40
Note
Portuguese and Japanese will use the U.S. English Keyboard
Note
The parts listed in this section cannot be obtained from Santa Clara. They must be
obtained through the system in Delkenheim, Germany.
Action
Steps
Change System
Note
Language for
This Section Applies to Instruments Manufactured
Instruments with
with the Language Pack installed Santa Clara SN
the Language
36850BG – 35915BG, and Flextronics SN 54276BG
Pack Installed
and above. And Refurbished CELL-DYN Ruby
Only
Serial Numbers, and Instruments that have had
the Language Pack installed as part of TSB 170026.
Configure to Windows Language:
Note
Each time the language is changed, both the
Windows Language and Application Language
Procedures must be followed.
1. With the CD Ruby powered ON, place the UI into
Admin mode (available under the drop down menu in
the right hand corner, see Fig. 1).
2. Exit the CD Ruby Software (File → Exit).
3. Click on Start and then Log Off.
4. Login under Admin (ID pass= Syssetup).
CELLType DYN
Ruby
Reference
15 mins
5. On the Windows XP screen, under Admin Login,
navigate to My Computer and then (Start → My
Computer).
6. Double click on the red icon, drive D:\. Run
MUISETUP.EXE.
7. Select the desired language under Default user
settings, and check box BOTH "Match the language
for non-Unicode programs with the default user
language." and "Match the default shell UI font
with the default user language." Click OK. (Fig. 16
example for English).
Note
If both check boxes are not checked in Step 4,
a Windows file will get corrupted and the
Operating System will need to be re-installed.
CD ROM OS RECOVERY CDRUBY
(8938163501) should be on-hand in the event
this occurs.
8. You will be prompted to restart the computer. Click
Yes.
Configure to desired application language:
9. With the CD Ruby powered ON, place the UI into
Admin mode (available under the drop down menu in
the upper right corner).
10. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit the
application.
11. Navigate as follows: Start > My Computer > C: >
CDRuby > config (directory should read
C:\CDRuby\config) and delete the contents of the
config folder.
12. Procede to Change System Language.
Change System
Language
1. In the CD-Ruby Application program, switch the
OPID to a user with Administrator access.
2. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit the
application.
3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
4. Select Regional and Language Options.
Note
Do not make any changes to the Regional
Options tab. The CD-Ruby program allows
setup of date and time, including format.
5. Select Languages tab.
6. Locate the language used in menus and dialogs drop
down menu. Select the language you would like to
use for CD-Ruby and the operating system.
Selecting
Keyboard
Language
Note
Only the Spanish, German, French, and Italian
keyboards listed under "Materials" at the beginning of
this document and English keyboards are supported
by the CDRuby application.
1. Locate the Text Services and Input Languages tab
and select Details.
2. Locate the Default input language drop down menu
and select the desired language.
Note
If the language-keyboard option is not present,
locate the correct combination from the
Installed services drop down menu and use
the Add button to select the desired
combination.
3. Select OK to activate the selections and exit the
Control Panel.
4. Reboot the system by selecting Start, followed by
Turn Off Computer, then Restart.
Note
Once the computer has restarted, the
Windows XP account is automatically logged
in as cd and the CD-Ruby program will
automatically begin.
5. Reboot the system by selecting Start, followed by
Turn Off Computer, then Restart.
Cleaning
Database
Note
In order to get the correctly translated set of Operator
IDs and reagent names, a Clean Database procedure
will have to be performed.
1. From the application, switch the OPID to user FSE .
Type in the FSE password (see the CD Ruby System
Service Manual, Troubleshooting section, Analyzer
Setpoints Reference Chart).
2. From the menu bar, select Diagnostics, followed by
Manufacturing Functions , then Clean Database.
Type in the FSE password again.
3. Select Yes from the dialog box to start cleaning up
the database. This will remove everything except the
SetPoint Log and the Calibration Log.
4. Once the procedure is complete, a dialog box
appears alerting you that the database cleanup was
done successfully. Select OK to exit the application
program.
5. Select Start, followed by Turn Off Computer, then
Restart.
Set Date and
Time Format
1. Select CSC from the Operator ID menu. Password
for CSC is the current date (day) plus 5. For
example, if the date (day) is the 1st, then the
password will be 6.
2. From the menu bar, select Setup, Administrative
Setup.
3. Select User Interface Preferences. Set the correct
date format.
4. Select Set Date/Time and enter the local date and
time.
5. Select OK to save and exit.
Setting Local
Unit Sets
1. From the menu bar, select Setup, Unit Sets
Selection to select the local Unit Sets format.
2. Select OK to save and exit.
Verification
1. Verify that all application screen text appears in the
chosen language.
2. Verify that date and time, along with selected format
appears in the upper right corner of the screen (title
bar).
3. Initialize system and prime.
4. Locate Specimen Typeand select Patient.
5. Press open mode touch plate and run a cycle. When
complete, verify that unit sets are correct.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2013 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-46 Installation of Operator's Manual from Media (English and
Multilingual Version)
Version - 201963-103_1182_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-46 Installation of Operator's Manual from Media (English and Multilingual Version)
Purpose
Materials
Required
Action
The procedure to load the Operators' Manual into the CELL-DYN Ruby Application
program.
CELL-DYN System Operator's Manual (CELL-DYN Ruby) CD-ROM, current revision.
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Obtain the current
version of the English
or Multilingual Online
Operator's Manual
(CELL-DYN Ruby)
disk.
2. From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar, select Help, then
About CELL-DYN
Ruby.
3. Take note of the
instrument software
version in the dialog
box.
4. Select OK to close the
dialog box.
Installation
of
Operator's
Manual
Instructions
1. Ensure that Analyzer
is in Ready, Initialized,
or Uninitialized status
as indicated in the
Analyzer Status region.
2. From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar select Admin level
Operator ID (upper
right hand corner).
3. From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar, select File, Exit.
Reference
CELL-DYN
Type Ruby
Time
15 mins
4. Select Start (lower left
corner), Log Off.
5. At the Log Off
Windows prompt,
select Log Off.
Note
When entering
something,
remember to
enter it exactly
as shown, as it
is case
sensitive.
6. Select admin from the
7.
8.
9.
10.
user name display and
type Syssetup
followed by Enter.
Insert the current
English or Multilingual
version of the disk
containing the Online
Operator's Manual
(CEL-DYN Ruby) into
the DVD drive.
Select Start, My
Computer.
Double click on CDROM icon (D:) and
double click on the
Setup.exe icon as
appears in this picture
to execute the
program.
Once the program
installation wizard
appears, select Next.
Note
If installing the
Multilingual
version go to
step 13, if
installing the
English version,
skip to step 14.
11. Select the language of
choice using the radio
buttons, then select
Next.
12. Verify that the setup
program is appropriate
for the version of
application software on
the Instrument.
Note
Refer to Action:
Prerequisite
Step 2.
13. If the version is
correct, select Next.
Note
If the version is
not correct,
select Cancel to
exit. Obtain the
correct version
and repeat this
procedure.
14. Select Next again to
confirm installation.
Installation
of
Operator's
Manual
Instructions
(continued)
1. Once installation is
complete, select Close
to exit setup. Close
the D: window.
2. Remove the disk from
the DVD drive.
3. Select Start, Turn Off
Computer, and then
Restart to return to the
CELL-DYN Ruby
application program.
Verification
1. From the CELL-DYN
Ruby Application menu
bar, select Help, then
Operator's Manual.
Verify that the manual
has been installed by
navigating through the
various sections.
2. Click the "X" in the
upper right corner to
close the manual and
return to the Ruby
application.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-47 Operating System Installation and Hard Disk Drive Format
Version - 201963-103_1181_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-47 Operating System Installation and Hard Disk Drive Format
Purpose
Materials Required
Installation of the Windows operating system for CELL-DYN Ruby
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service Disk
Action
Type
Time
Not Assessed
00:05 min
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Be sure to perform VP-48 Backup Procedure before installing the operating system.
Failure to do so results in loss of data.
Note
This procedure is performed when installing a new hard disk drive or corruption of
the current drive's data files is suspected.
Preparation
1. Be sure that there are no external USB drives connected to the USB port at rear of
instrument. Remove all USB drives if connected.
Note
A drive connected to the USB port affects the boot sequence and not allow the
operating system to install correctly.
New Installation of
Operating System
Software
1. Turn ON the computer (the switch is located next to the floppy drive).
2. While the computer is booting up, insert the CELL-DYN Ruby Operating System Disk
(CD) into the CD-ROM drive.
3. Press Control+Alt+Delete (simultaneously) to reboot the computer.
4. As the computer is rebooting, watch for the onscreen message, Boot from CD. Press
any key to BOOT from the CD. Follow instructions and select any key to begin the
installation process.
Note
The onscreen prompt displays very quickly and a key must be pressed at that
moment or else the program continues to execute. If this happens, repeat Step3
and Step4.
5. Go to Reload Operating System Software, Step5.
Reload Operating
System Software
1. From the CELL-DYN Ruby application program, select File, then Exit.
Reference
2. Insert CELL-DYN Ruby Operating System Disk (CD) into the CD-ROM drive.
3. Select Start (lower left corner), Turn Off Computer, then Restart
4. As the computer is rebooting, watch for the onscreen message, Boot from CD. Press
any key to BOOT from the CD. Follow instructions and select any key to begin the
installation process.
Note
The onscreen prompt displays very quickly and a key must be pressed at that
moment or else the Windows and CD-Ruby programs are executed. If this
happens, repeat Step1 through Step4.
5. When the onscreen message, Start Ruby OS Installation. Press any key to continue
displays, follow the instructions and select any key.
Note
The installation program reformats the drive and installs the operating system. This
process takes approximately 20 minutes.
6. When the installation is complete the message, Ruby OS Installed. Press any key to
continue displays, follow the instructions and select any key.
7. While the system is rebooting, remove the operating system disk from the CD-ROM
drive.
8. Once the system is rebooted, the System Settings Change window displays and displays
the message, Do you want to restart your computer now?. Select Yes to restart the
system.
9. Perform VP-41 Application Software Installation Procedure.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-48 Backup Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1180_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-48 Backup Procedure
To backup system setup files and SQL Database.
Purpose
Materials Required
Two (2) new CD-R or CD-RW Disks.
Action
Type
Time
Not Assessed
Depends on number of files
Steps
Reference
Prerequisite
1. Be sure that CD-Ruby application program is running.
2. Log into CD Ruby application as Admin in upper right corner.
Perform Backup of Setup
Files and SQL Database
1. Select File, Backup.
2. When the Backup window displays, select Setup, Config, and Log Files.
3. Insert new or empty CD-R or CD-RW disk into CD-ROM drive.
Note
Using a CD-RW disk allows reuse of the media for another backup.
4. Select Start Backup to begin the Backup process.
Note
When the process is complete, the CD-ROM drive automatically ejects the
disk.
5. Repeat Step1 through Step4 for backing up the Database Files.
Note
Use a separate (new or empty) CD-R or CD-RW disk to backup the SQL
Database. Also, only 5,000 files can be stored on a single CD disk.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN RUBY are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-49 Restore Setup
Version - 201963-103_1179_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-49 Restore Setup
Purpose
Materials
Required
To Restore saved setup and log files, along with SQL Database files to hard
drive.
Type
One (1) disk with backed up setup and log files
One (1) disk with backed up SQL Database files.
Depends on number of
Time files
Action
Not Assessed
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Be sure that CD-Ruby application program is running.
Restore
Database
Files
1. Select File, Restore.
2. When the Restore window displays, select Database Files.
3. Select OK to begin the Restore process.
Note
The duration of this process depends on the size of the SQL Database. Do not touch the
computer during this time.
Restore
Setup and
Log Files
1. Select File, Restore.
2. Select applicable files to be restored or select all files for a full restore.
3. Select Start Restore to begin the Restore process.
Note
A message displays if a particular file is selected, but not found on the Restore disk. Select
OK to continue.
4. Once the files have been restored, select File, Exit.
5. Select Start, All Programs, CDRuby (executes the CD-Ruby Application program).
The RestorFiles window displays and provides three (3) options for Restore:
Restore Now
Restore Later
Remove Backup Files.
6. Select the Restore Now option to perform an immediate Restore function.
Note
The Restore Later option allows the program to execute without restoring the files, but
Reference
prompts you when the CD-Ruby Applications program is restarted. The Remove Backup
Files completely deletes all restore files placed in the queue.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-50 List Mode Data (raw file) Collection
Version - 201963-103_1172_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-50 List Mode Data (raw file) Collection
To collect List Mode (rawfile) data.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Type
Time
Not Assessed
Not Assessed
Raw file storage is a means of creating raw (unprocessed) data files to be used in engineering or scientific studies, or for
troubleshooting purposes. The raw file storage program is always enabled on the CD-Ruby and records all 10,000 cycle runs. Once
the same sequence number is executed in a cycle run, the contents of the raw data file is overwritten with the new data.
Action
Copy Raw
Files from
Raw
Directory
Steps
1. Exit the CD-Ruby Application program by selecting
File, Exit.
2. Select Start, My Computer.
3. Select Syspart (C:).
4. Locate and double-click on cdlogs, followed by
raw.
Note
A list of all raw data files recorded thus far
displays. The filename is established by the
sequence number, followed by the raw file
extension (.raw). The raw files can only be
viewed with a special application, which does
not reside on the CD-Ruby.
5. Select the raw files that you would like to copy to a
removable storage device.
6. Insert an empty disk into the floppy disk drive, or CD
into the CD-RW drive or connect a USB drive to the
USB port at rear of instrument.
7. Select File, Send to, and the location of the desired
removable storage media.
Note
If the raw files are being copied onto a CD,
refer to Copy Raw Files onto CD Disk.
8. Remove the removable storage media device and
Reference
close all open windows.
9. Select Start, All Programs, followed by
DSPlusU.exe to execute the CD-Ruby application.
Prepare
for
Operation
1. Remove the removable storage media device and
close all open windows.
2. Select Start, All Programs, followed by
DSPlusU.exe to execute the CD-Ruby application.
Action
Copy Raw
Files onto
CD Disk
Steps
Note
This action is a continuation from Copy Raw Files
from Raw Directory. Perform this action only if you
plan on using a CD disk as your removable
storage media
1. Select CD-RW Drive (D:) from the Address drop-
down menu.
Note
The message, Files Ready to Be Written
to the CD, displays at the top of the list of
files that you wish to copy.
2. Select File, Write these files to CD.
Note
The CD Writing Wizard displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to copy the
selected raw files to a CD disk.
Reference
Execute
Application
Program
1. Remove the CD disk and close all open windows.
2. Select Start, All Programs, followed by
DSPlusU.exe to execute the CD-Ruby application.
3. Remove any diskettes and power off the system
and reboot.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-108) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-51 Analyzer Serial Number Loading and HSSL Com Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1178_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-51 Analyzer Serial Number Loading and HSSL Com Procedure
To enter the instrument's serial number and execute the HSSL Communications
protocol.
Purpose
Materials
Required
None
CELLType DYN Ruby
Time
00:05 min
Note
This procedure must be performed when a new CPU/DCM PCB is installed or corruption to the HSSL Com protocol is
suspected.
Action
Steps
Prerequisite
1. Be sure that instrument is in the
Initialized state.
Enter Analyzer Serial
Number and Execute
HSSL Communications
Protocol
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select
HSSL Log. The HSSL Log window
displays.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select
Manufacturing Functions
Analyzer Config
3. When the Analyzer Configuration
4.
5.
6.
7.
window displays, type the instrument's
serial number in the Analyzer Serial
Number box. [1]
Select Apply to execute the HSSL
Communications protocol.
Verify that HSSL Com transmission
and receive messages display on the
HSSL Log. [2]
If no transmission and receive
messages display on the HSSL Log,
troubleshoot as necessary. [3]
Close all windows.
Reference
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-52 Operating System - User Account Log On Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1188_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-52 Operating System - User Account Log On Procedure
The procedure to log on to afse or admin User accounts in the Operating System.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Type
Time
Action
CELL-DYN Ruby
5 mins
Steps
Prerequisite
1. From the CELL-DYN Ruby Application program, switch the OPID to a user with
administrator access.
2. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit the application.
Note
Operator IDs Admin, FSE or CSC will allow the user to exit the application
program.
Operating System Log On
for afse User Account
Note
The afse user account mode has full access rights.
1. Select Start, Log Off.
2. At the Log Off Windows prompt, select Log Off.
Note
When entering information, remember to enter it exactly as shown, as it is
case sensitive.
3. Select afse from the user name display and type IbFSE! followed by Enter.
Note
Restarting or turning off/on the Data Module will automatically default and
reboot the cd User account.
Operating System Log On
for admin User Account
Note
Entering the admin user account mode allows full access and user rights.
1. Select Start, Log Off.
2. At the Log Off Windows prompt, select Log Off.
Note
When entering information, remember to enter it exactly as shown, as it is
case sensitive.
Reference
3. Select admin from the user name display and type Syssetup followed by Enter.
Note
Restarting or turning off/on the Data Module will automatically default and
reboot the cd User account.
Verification
Note
There is no verification procedure needed. The operating system will only allow
access into the different User accounts if the password is correct.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-53 BIOS Setup and Configuration Procedure
Version - 201963-103_1177_3
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-53 BIOS Setup and Configuration Procedure
To configure the system CMOS.
Purpose
Materials Required
None
Type
Time
Action
CELL-DYN Ruby
Not Assessed
Steps
Preparation
1. From the CD-Ruby Application Software, select File, Shutdown.
2. At the prompt, select OK.
3. When the computer shuts down, press the computer ON/OFF switch (located next to the floppy
drive) to boot the system.
4. During the initial stage of the boot process, select Delete on the keyboard to enter the Setup
(BIOS) program.
Load
Optimized
Defaults
1. From the main Setup menu, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Load Optimized
Defaults (located on the right column).
2. Select Enter to execute the change.
3. Type Y, followed by selecting Enter.
Standard
CMOS
Features
1. From the main Setup menu, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Standard CMOS
Features.
2. Select Enter to open the screen.
Note
To change setting, select the menu item by pressing Enter. Use the arrow keys to move
to desired selection and select Enter to accept. Move the cursor if necessary to set the
date and time.
3. Verify that IDE Channel 0 Master recognizes a hard disk drive.
4. Verify that IDE Channel 0 Slave recognizes a CD-ROM (e.g. PLEXTOR) drive.
5. Verify that Drive A: indicates 1.44M, 3.5 in. (floppy drive).
Reference
6. Verify that Video indicates Video EGA/VGA.
7. Select ESC to return to the main Setup menu.
Advanced
BIOS
Features
1. From the main Setup menu, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Advanced BIOS
Features.
2. Select Enter to open the screen.
Note
To change setting, select the menu item by pressing Enter. Use the arrow keys to move
to desired selection and select Enter to accept.
3. Verify that First Boot Device is set to Floppy.
4. Verify that Second Boot Device is set to CDROM.
5. Very that Third Boot Device is set to Hard Disk.
6. Set the Quick Power on Self-Test to Disable.
7. Select ESC to return to the main Setup menu.
Integrated
Peripherals
1. From the main Setup menu, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to Integrated Peripherals.
2. Select Enter to open the screen.
Note
To change setting, select the menu item by pressing Enter. Use the arrow keys to move
to desired selection and select Enter to accept.
3. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to Super I/O Devices.
4. Select Enter to open the screen.
5. Verify that Onboard Serial Port 1 is set to 3F8/IRQ4.
6. Verify that Onboard Serial Port 2 is set to Disabled.
ATTENTION: If new SATA DVD DRIVE and Adapter installed in CD Ruby Computer Assembly, perform
the additional steps 7 to 10 (otherwise continue to step 11):
7. Hit Esc to return to "Integrated Peripheral."
8. Select "On Chip IDE Device."
9. Set "IDE Primary Slave UDMA" to [Disabled].
10. Select F10 to Save.
11. Select Esc twice to return to first menu.
PnP/PCI
Configurations
1. From the main Setup menu, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to PnP/PCI Configurations.
2. Select Enter to open the screen.
Note
To change setting, select the menu item by pressing Enter. Use the arrow keys to move
to desired selection and select Enter to accept.
3. Verify that PNP OS Installed is set to Yes.
4. Select ESC to return to the main Setup menu.
Save and
Exit.
1. Select F10 to Save & Exit Setup.
2. Follow the on screen instructions to complete.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2014 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-54 WBC Gain Optimization
Version - 201963-103_1174_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-54 WBC Gain Optimization
Purpose
Materials Required
To provide an alternative procedure for optimization of WBC gains.
None
Type
Time
Not Assessed
Not Assessed
This procedure provides an alternative procedure for optimization of WBC gains. Its purpose is to standardize the performance of the
laser bench using whole blood as a reference rather than inert material such as polymer spheres. This procedure should be used in
instances of customer complaints of false or erratic flagging, especially VARLYM and BAND flags, when the laser bench
performance has been verified to be within specification otherwise. Upon successful completion of this procedure, new target
channels for autogain are established. The optimal gain settings can then be reestablished later using 7.0 µm polymer microspheres
as usual. It is recommended that this procedure be performed by experienced field service personnel only.
Action
Steps
Reference
Prerequisite
1. Obtain 20 fresh whole blood samples for use.
Note
It is very important that the samples used in
this procedure are normal healthy samples.
The samples must be fresh, within 8 hours of
draw. All parameters must be of normal range
values. The samples need to have good tight
populations with good separation and no
flags.
Verify
Performance
Specifications
Laser Bench Specification
1. Verify whole blood CVs, and carryover are within
specification.
2. Verify that the Laser Bench Specification are met.
If bench performance is not within
specification, perform VP-18 Optics Bench
Alignment Procedure.
Setup Cell
Regions
Cell Region Channels
1. Install all the laser bench covers, or cover them with
a black drop cloth.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select Setpoints and
print the gain settings from the setpoint window (for
reference).
3. Press Close to exit the Setpoints window.
4. From the Diagnostics menu, select SRP/Blood
Comparison, Cell Regions.
5. Enter the channels from Cell Region Channels in
the Cell Regions screen.
Close Cell
Regions
Window
Verify Initial
Gain Settings
1. Press OK to close the Cell Regions window.
Optical Channels Gran Results Specification
1. Select Patient from the Specimen Type drop down
menu.
2. With the SRP/Blood Comparison window open, mix
and run one of the blood samples using the Open
mode.
3. When the sample is complete, record the Gran
results for all four optical channels that display.
4. Compare the results to the targets in Optical
Channels Gran Results Specification:
If results are within tolerance, go to Verify
Lym Results.
If the results are not within the indicated
tolerance, go to Calculate/Enter Gain
Settings.
Calculate/Enter
Gain Settings
Gain Settings Calculation
1. Use the Gran results and the gain settings from the
Setpoints window to calculate the new gain settings
using the formula Gain Settings Calculation.
If results are within tolerance, go on to Verify
Lym Results.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select Setpoints and
enter the new gain settings.
Press Set Analyzer to save the new settings.
Print or record the new gain settings.
Press Close to exit the Setpoints window.
From the Diagnostics menu, select SRP/Blood
Comparison.
7. From the Specimen Type drop down menu, select
Patient.
8. Re-run the same sample and compare the Gran
results with the targets.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If not within range, reject the sample and try
again.
Verify Lym
Results
Lym Settings Calculation
1. Record the Lym results for 0 and 10 degrees (only)
and compare them to the following.
Gran Settings Calculation
Note
In this procedure, values called lym gains
and gran gains are used along with
weighting factors for proper lym and gran
separation. The weighting factors are used to
calculate the new final gain settings for 0D
and 10D channels only.
0D and 10D Gain Settings Calculation
If not within the indicated tolerance, use the
Lym results for 0D and 10D channels and the
gain settings to calculate Lym gains for 0D
and 10D channels using the Lym Settings
Optical Channels Gran Results Specification
Calculation formula.
If within tolerance, go to Calculate/Enter Final
Gain Settings.
2. Calculate gran gains using Gran Settings
Calculation:
3. Calculate the new 0D and 10D gain settings using
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
the 0D and 10D Gain Settings Calculation weighting
formula.
From the Diagnostics menu, select Setpoints and
enter the new 0D and 10D gain settings.
Press Set Analyzer to save the new settings.
Press Close to exit the Setpoints window.
From the Diagnostics menu, select SRP/Blood
Comparison.
From the Specimen Type drop down menu, select
Patient.
Re-run the same sample and compare the Gran and
Lym results with the target channels from Optical
Channels Gran Results Specification and Step1.
If within tolerance, go to Calculate/Enter Final
Gain Settings.
If not within tolerance, reject the sample and
try again.
Calculate/Enter
Final Gain
Settings
Gran Gains Calculation
1. Using the CELL-DYN Ruby Gain Optimization
Worksheet (9H_6100.PDF), run all 20 of the blood
samples in the SRP/Blood Comparison window.
Note
Be sure to select Patient from the Specimen
Lym Gains Calculation
Type drop down menu.
2. Record the lym and gran results
3. Calculate the sum of the results for each column
and record them in the Sum of results row on the
worksheet.
4. Calculate the average result for each column on the
0D and 10D Gain Settings Calculation
worksheet as follows:
5. Enter in the appropriate cell in the Average row of
the worksheet.
6. Note the current gain settings from the setpoint entry
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Calculate/Enter
Autogain
Target
Channels
Results
screen. Record them on the worksheet in the Gran
columns.
Calculate Gran gains using the targets given on the
worksheet, and the average results obtained from
Step4 (see Gran Gains Calculation), and record on
the worksheet:
For 90D and 90DP, enter the Gran gain as the final
gain (at the bottom of worksheet).
For 0D and 10D, calculate lym gains using the
targets and average results in the Lym columns on
the worksheet. Calculate (see Lym Gains
Calculation) and record on the worksheet.
Calculate the final gains for 0D and 10D using the
0D and 10D Gain Settings Calculation weighting
formula. Record at the bottom of worksheet.
From the Diagnostics menu, select Setpoints and
enter the final gain settings from the worksheet.
Press Set Analyzer to save the new settings.
Press Close to exit the Setpoints window.
Average Microsphere Results Calculation
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select SRP/Blood
Comparison.
2. From the Specimen Type drop down window, select
SRP.
3. Prepare a dilution of 15 drops of 7.0 µm polymer
microspheres to 2 mL of diluent in a clean
container.
4. Run the polymer microspheres three (3) times and
record the latex results from the screen for all four
channels on the Microsphere Worksheet
(9H_6101.PDF).
5. Calculate the sum of the microsphere results for
each channel (result 1 + result 2 + result 3).
6. Average the microsphere results for all four
channels (use Average Microsphere Results
Calculation). Record them on the worksheet.
Note
The averages are the new target channels for
performing subsequent autogain adjustments
using 7.0 µm polymer microspheres.
7. Verify that the new target channels values are within
the specified range (see Average Microsphere
Results Specification).
If the target(s) are out of range, use the
upper or lower range limit as the target value.
8. From the Diagnostics menu, select Auto-Gain
Wizard.
9. Select Verify/Set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°, 90°D &
Average Microsphere Results Specification
RBC/PLT 0° Gain (7 µm SRP).
10. Press Next to enter the window.
11. Enter the average channel results obtained from
Step6 as the target channel for all four channels.
12. Follow the on-screen instructions and run 7.0
polymer microspheres to perform the WOC 0°, 10°,
90°, 90°D & RBC/PLT 0° gain adjustment.
Checkout
Lym and Gran Populations
1. From the Specimen Type drop down menu, select
Patient and perform another run of the samples in
the SRP/Blood Comparison window.
2. Verify the Lym and Gran populations display as
expected (see example in Lym and Gran
Populations).
The Lym and Gran populations should be
close to the center of the boxes.
Whole blood results from the Run screen look
generally like example in Whole Blood
Results. The populations should be tight
clusters with good separation and proper
location.
Whole Blood Results
3. Verify control results.
4. When finished, perform VP-48 Backup Procedure to
save new gain settings to a disk.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2008 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
CELL-DYN Ruby Gain Optimization Worksheet
CELL-DYN Ruby Gain Optimization Worksheet
Lym 0D
Gran 0D
Lym 10D
Gran 10D
Gran 90D
Gran 90DP
Target
59
160
59
149
125
21
Gain Settings(after part C)
N/A
N/A
Gran gains
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Sum of results
Average
Lym gains
Final gains
N/A
N/A
N/A
System S/N # _____________________________________________
FSR _____________________________________________________
9H_6100a
Date __________________________
CELL-DYN Ruby Microsphere Worksheet
0D
1
2
3
Sum of Results
Average
9H_6101a
10D
90D
90DEP
VP-55 Create Windows XP Firewall Exception for File Transfer Program
Version - 201963-103_1173_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-55 Create Windows XP Firewall Exception for File Transfer Program
Purpose
Materials
Required
To create a Windows XP Firewall Exception for the File Transfer Program to allow for retrieval
CELL-DYN
Type Ruby
of files/logs by AbbottLink.
None
Action
Prerequisite
Time
Steps
Note
This procedure should only be performed at the time
the CELL-DYN Ruby is connected to AbbottLink using
an AbbottLink PC. This will result in a Windows XP
firewall exception being created, which will prevent
alerts for the file transfer program from being generated
when files or logs are retrieved from the Ruby.
Note
The system may be in the Uninitialized, Initialized, or
Ready state.
Exit Ruby
Application
1. If the Operator ID is not Admin, then select Admin
from the Operator ID drop down list.
2. If the password is configured for the Admin login then
enter the appropriate password.
3. On the Ruby Menu Bar select File, then Exit, to exit
the Ruby application.
Reference
15 mins
Log Off
Windows
XP
Log into
Windows
XP Admin
Account
1. On the Windows XP task bar select Start, then Log
Off.
1. Select admin from the user name display.
Note
When entering information, remember to enter it
exactly as shown, as it is case sensitive.
2. Enter Syssetup for the password.
Restart CD
Ruby
Software
1. Select Start, All Programs, CDRuby to restart the
CDRuby Software.
Contact
Instrument
to
AbbottLink
PC
Request
Log
Retrieval
Unblock
FTP
Application
Exit Ruby
Software
Application
1. Contact the AbbottLink GSS group or your local
AbbottLink administrator to have the CELL-DYN
Ruby deployed to the AbbottLink PC.
1. Request the AbbottLink Administrator retrieve a log from
the Ruby.
1. When Windows Security Alert notification is displayed,
select Unblock.
1. If the Operator ID is not Admin, then select Admin
from the Operator ID drop down list.
2. If a password is configured for the Admin login then
enter the appropriate password.
3. On the Ruby Menu Bar select File, then Exit, to exit
the Ruby Application.
Open
Windows
XP Firewall
Program
1. On Windows Task bar click on Start, then Control
Panel.
2. Double click the Windows Firewall icon to open the
Windows XP Firewall program.
Verify
Windows
XP Firewall
FTP
Exception
1. Click on the Exceptions tab.
2. Verify there is a File Transfer Program exception listed
and checked.
3. Click OK to close the Windows Firewall dialog box.
4. Close the Control Panel by clicking on the X at the
upper right corner of the Control Panel.
Log Off
Windows
XP
1. On the Windows XP task bar select Start, then Log Off.
Log On
Windows cd
Account
1. Select the cd user name from the display to log in as
the normal Ruby user.
2. The Ruby application will start.
CELL-DYN Ruby System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-56 Mix Head Adjustment Procedure
Version - 201963-103_4217_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-56 Mix Head Adjustment Procedure
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust/verify Mix Head Adjustment.
3/32" Allen Wrench
Materials Required Phillips Screw Driver
Feeler Gauge Set
Action
Preparation
Type
Time
Steps
Note
Be sure that instrument is Initialized.
1. Remove the Nose Cover and open the Right and
Left Front Doors.
2. Loosen the two (2) screws on the Mixer Assembly
Top Flag.
3. Insert an empty loader rack at the mixing zone to
allow the Mix-Head to rest flush against the rack
or back rail.
4. Place instrument in the Admin mode.
5. Select Diagnostics menu, followed by
Mechanical Operations, then Loader Tests.
6. Select Move Mixer, from the Sample Loader
Diagnostics screen.
7. Click on Down to lower the Mixer Assembly.
CELL-DYN Ruby
90 mins
Reference
Adjust the MixHead to the
Vertical Position
1. Loosen the two (2) retaining set-screws that lock
the Mix-Head to the motor shaft at the front and
the top, using a 3/32� Allen wrench.
2. Loosen the Keeper- Nut and adjust the screw, if
the Stop-Screw prevents the Mix-Head from being
vertically positioned.
3. Check that the Mixer-Stop is fully seated against
the Mixer Motor Mount and that the motor mount
thumbscrew is fully tightened.
4. Set an initial clearance of .003� between the right
side of the Mix-Head body and the Motor Boss.
5. Tighten the front and top Retaining Set-Screws
that secure the Mix-Head to the motor shaft,
without disturbing the position of the Mix-Head.
6. Rotate the Mix-Head and insure that it does not
bind.
Note
If binding occurs, increase gap between the
right side of the Mix-Head body and the
Motor Boss in .001 � increments up to a
maximum of .007 � if necessary to
eliminate binding.
7. Tighten the Retaining Set-Screws to 10 inch-lbs
force.
Adjust the MixHead to the
Vertical Position
(continued)
1. Check that Mix-Head body can be placed into a
vertical (home) position with power applied.
Note
The Mix-Head body should be
perpendicular to the top surfaces of the
Rear Rail and Center Frame.
Adjust the Tube
Sensor Bracket,
Stop-Screw and
Keeper-Nut
1. Loosen Tube Sensor Bracket mounting screws
and position bracket fully towards the Front Rail.
2. Tighten the mounting screws.
Note
Make sure that the bracket mounting
screws are not contacting components or
traces on Tube Sensor PCB Assembly.
3. With the Mix-Head still in the down position, move
the Mix-Head body towards the Front Rail until it
touches the Tube Sensor Bracket.
4. Adjust the Stop-Screw until it makes contact with
the Mix-Head.
5. Turn the Stop-Screw clockwise an additional
amount so that the Mix-Head body cannot be
positioned any closer than about � the distance
between the vertical (home) position and the
closest part of the Tube Sensor Bracket
6. Tighten the Keeper-Nut.
7. Slightly raise the Mixer Assembly. Rotate the MixHead all the way towards the Tube Sensor and
confirm that the Mix-Head does not touch the
sensor.
8. Manually set the Mix-Head at the vertical position.
Visually confirm that there is a gap/space between
the Mix-Head and the Stop-Screw.
Adjust the gap
between the MixHead and the
Rear/Center Rails
1. Lower the Mix-Head and ensure that the MixHead is still at a vertical position.
2. Use a feeler gauge to set the space/gap between
the bottom of the Mix-Head and the top of the
Rear/Center Rails at 0.020�.
3. Tighten the two (2) screws on the Mixer Assembly
Top Flag.
Verification
1. From the Sample Loader Diagnostics screen,
select Move Mixer.
2. Click on Up to raise the Mixer Assembly.
3. Perform VP-57, Mix Sensor Adjustment
Procedure.
4. Perform VP-58, Tube Sensor Adjustment
Procedure.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-57 Mix Sensor Adjustment Procedure
Version - 201963-103_4218_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-57 Mix Sensor Adjustment Procedure
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust/verify Mix Sensor position.
Purpose
Driver, Allen, 3/32"
Materials Required Driver, Allen, 7/64"
Action
Preparation
Type
Time
Steps
Note
Be sure that instrument is Initialized.
1. Remove the Nose Cover and open the Right and Left
Front Doors.
2. Place instrument in the Admin mode.
3. Select Diagnostics menu, followed by Mechanical
Operations, then Loader Tests.
4. Select Sample Loader Diagnostics screen, then Move
Mixer.
5. Click on Down to lower the Mixer Assembly.
Note
Manually set the bottom of the Mix-Head body
perpendicular to the top surfaces of the Rear Rail
and Center Frame.
Note
If this condition cannot be met, perform VP-56
Mix-Head Adjustment.
CELL-DYN Ruby
45 mins
Reference
Adjust Mix
Sensor
1. Loosen the two (2) Sensor Locking Screws on the Mix
Sensor Assembly.
2. If the sensing light is off, back out the Sensor Adjusting
Screw until the light turns on.
3. Slowly adjust the Sensor Adjusting Screw clockwise until
sensor light turns off.
4. Turn screw about � turn or less clockwise for additional
margin after Mix Sensor light turns off.
5. Lock down the two (2) Sensor Locking Screws.
Verification
1. Select the Sample Loader Diagnostics screen, then
Move Mixer.
2. Click on Up to raise the Mixer Assembly.
3. Select Rotate Mixer and observe status of Rotate
Sensor:
Click on Up: Mix-Head moves up towards the
back.
Rotate Sensor=1
Click on Down: Mix-Head moves down towards
the front.
Rotate Sensor=0
4. Select the Sample Loader Diagnostics screen, then
Move Mixer.
5. Click on Down to lower the Mixer Assembly.
6. Verify that the Mix-Head is vertical.
7. Click on Close Window.
8. Replace the Nose Cover and close the Right and Left
Front Doors.
9. Re-initialize the instrument.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-58 Tube Sensor Adjustment
Version - 201963-103_4219_2
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-58 Tube Sensor Adjustment
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust/verify Tube Sensor Adjustment.
Materials:
Materials Required Empty Vacutainer Tube
Five (5) Specimen Tubes
Type
Time
CELL-DYN Ruby
60 mins
Tools:
Thin Flat Blade Screwdriver
Action
Preparation
Steps
Note
Be sure that instrument is Initialized.
1. Remove the Nose Cover and open the Right
and Left Front Doors.
2. Place instrument in the Admin mode.
3. Select Diagnostics menu, followed by
Mechanical Operations, then Loader Tests.
4. Select the Sample Loader Diagnostics
screen, then Tube Sensors.
S2 Tube Sensor
Adjustment/
Verification
1. Using a thin blade screwdriver, turn the Tube
Sensor Potentiometer located behind S2
Sensor clockwise twenty (20) turns, or until a
click is felt.
Reference
Note
This click indicates the minimum
sensitivity range of the twenty (20)-turn
potentiometer.
2. Insert an empty Vacutainer Tube (no labels)
into a tube rack.
3. Insert the rack in the Autoloader, so the tube
is positioned in front of the S2 Sensor on
Tube Sensor Board.
4. Click on Start next to Tube Sensors in the
Sample Loader Diagnostics screen.
Note
The status of Position 3 sensor on the
screen which corresponds to the S2
Sensor:
0 (zero) tube not present
1 (one) tube present
5. Position the tube inside the rack slot to the
furthest point away from the Tube Sensor.
6. If Position 3 tube present indication is 1 on
the screen, then turn potentiometer
counterclockwise five (5) turns, for added tube
position sensing margin and proceed to Step
9. Otherwise, if Position 3 indicates 0,
proceed to Step 7.
7. If Position 3 tube present indication is 0,
maintain the far back position of the tube in
the rack and turn potentiometer
counterclockwise until Position 3 tube
present indication is 1.
8. Turn potentiometer counterclockwise five (5)
additional turns, for added tube position
sensing margin.
9. Move the tube away from Position 3 and
verify a Position 3 tube present indication of
0.
S1 Tube Sensor
Adjustment/Verification
1. Position the tube in front of the S1 Sensor on
the Tube Sensor Board.
2. Turn the Tube Sensor Potentiometer located
behind the S1 Sensor clockwise twenty (20)
turns, or until a click is felt.
Note
This click indicates the minimum
sensitivity range of the twenty (20)-turn
potentiometer.
3. Position the tube inside the rack slot to the
furthest point away from the Tube Sensor.
4. If Position 4 tube present indication is 1 on
the Sample Loader Diagnostics screen,
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
then turn potentiometer counterclockwise five
(5) turns, for added tube position sensing
margin and proceed to Step 7. Otherwise, if
Position 4 indicates 0, proceed to Step 5.
If Position 4 tube present indication is 0,
maintain the far back position of the tube in
the rack and turn potentiometer
counterclockwise until Position 4 tube
present indication is 1.
Turn potentiometer counterclockwise five (5)
additional turns, for added tube position
sensing margin.
Move the tube away from Position 4 and
verify a Position 4 tube present indication of
0.
In the Sample Loader Diagnostics screen,
click on Stop next to Tube Sensors and
remove the rack.
Click on Close Window.
Replace the Nose Cover and close the Right
and Left Front Doors.
Re-initialize and prime the instrument.
Verification
1. Place five (5) specimen tubes into a rack.
2. Place the instrument in the Closed Mode and
run the rack.
Note
Be sure that all tubes are processed
without any Autoloader error
messages.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2009 • CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. CELL-DYN
RUBY is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-59 SQL Database Recovery Procedure
Version - 201963-103_4420_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-59 SQL Database Recovery Procedure
To provide instructions to restore the SQL database from autobackup (software version
2.0ML).
Purpose
None
Materials
Required
Action
Prerequisite
Steps
1. This procedure is
to be done if the
message shown in
Figure 1 is
displayed.
Run the
Restore
Utility
Time
Reference
Note
The CD Ruby auto
backup creates two
backup copies of
the SQL database.
The Restore utility
attempts to restore
the most recent
backup first. If the
restore fails, the
utility then attempts
to restore the
second backup.
1. Exit the CD Ruby
application and
login to Windows
as �admin� with
the password
�Syssetup�.
2. Open My
Computer. Locate
C:\CDRuby\
RestoreUtilU.exe
Double click to run.
3. You will be
prompted with the
CELL-DYN
Type Ruby
Figure 1
40 mins
dialog box shown
in Figure 2.
Figure 2
4. Click Yes. The
restore process
starts. The Restore
dialog box (Figure
3) appears while
restoring from the
full database
backup, which may
take several
minutes.
Note
If a
message
displays
stating that
the
database
cannot be
restored
from the
most recent
backup, skip
to Action:
�Failed
Restore �.
Figure 3
5. The next step in
the process will
automatically
restore from the
transaction logs
(Figure 4).
Note
Depending
on the
number of
transaction
logs (n) the
message
shows x/n
where x is
the current
transaction
log being
restored.
6. When the Restore
Utility has
completed, the
dialog box in
Figure 5 displays.
Note
If the dialog
box in
Figure 5
displays,
skip to
Action:
Verification.
If the dialog
box does
not display,
continue
with the next
step (Failed
Restore).
Failed
Restore
Figure 4
Figure 5
1. On failed restore, a
second dialog box
prompting you to
restore from the
earlier back up
appears (Figure 6).
Figure 6
2. Click Yes. The
restore proceeds
as described in
Step 4 above.
3. On a successful
restore, a message
box is displayed
(Figure 7).
4. If the restore from
the second backup
fails, the message
in Figure 8
displays.
Figure 7
Figure 8
5. If a restore fails
from both backups,
the database will
need to be restored
through the CD
Ruby application
from the last CD
backup. (Refer to
VP-49).
Note
If unable to
restore from
both auto
backups,
copy the
files listed at
the right to a
USB drive
and forward
them to GSS
to be
submitted
for software
investigation.
Verification
1. Log out of the
Windows admin
account and log in
to the cd account.
2. Verify that the
Ruby application
starts without
errors.
3. Bring the system to
the Ready state
and verify
background counts
are within
specification.
4. Verify calibration
C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL$RUBYMSDEINSTANCE
C:\CDRuby\SqlMsg.log
C:\AutoBackup\RubyBak0
C:\AutoBackup\RubyBak1
and control
recovery.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-103) • © 2006, 2010 • CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN RUBY are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
VP-60 Russian and Chinese (Simplified) Language Pack Installation
Version - 201963-103_5304_1
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
VP-60 Russian and Chinese (Simplified) Language Pack Installation
To install Russian and Chinese (Simplified) language packs onto the CD Ruby
Purpose
Windows XP language pack CD
Materials Required CD Ruby with OS Installed and Application (2.1ML or Higher) Installed
Action
Prerequisite
Steps
Reference
Note
This procedure is only for
installation of Russian or
Chinese (Simplified)
languages. Do not perform
this procedure if Japanese is
the intended language.
Instrument must be in the Windows
XP screen under Admin.
1. With the CD Ruby powered
ON, place the UI into Admin
mode (available under the
drop down menu in the right
hand corner, see Fig. 1).
2. Exit the CD Ruby Software
(File → Exit).
3. Click Start then Log Off (Fig
2).
4. Login under Admin (ID
pass= Syssetup) (Fig 3).
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Type
Time
CELL-DYN Ruby
30 mins
Fig. 3
Installation Installing Chinese (Simplified)
of MUI
Language Pack:
Packs from
CD
1. Insert CD Ruby Language
Pack CD into the Ruby disc
drive.
2. While in the Windows XP
screen under admin login,
navigate to My Computer
(Start → My Computer, Fig.
4).
3. Double click on the red icon,
drive D:\ (Fig. 5).
4. Run
SetupCDRubyLangApp.exe.
This will open the CDRuby
Language Installer window
(Fig. 6).
Fig. 4
5. Under Language available on
CD, select Chinese
(Simplified) (Fig. 6).
6. Click Install (Fig. 6).
7. Allow 5 minutes for the
language pack to install. The
first phase of the installation
will bring up the Windows XP
Multilingual User Interface
Pack stating "Multilingual File
was successfully uninstalled
(Fig. 7) Click OK to proceed.
8. Allow 5 minutes for the
installation to copy the
required files (Fig. 8).
9. A prompt will come up
stating, "Multilingual File
Installation was completed
successfully." Click OK (Fig.
Fig. 5
9).
10. A prompt will come up asking
to restart the computer. Click
Yes (Fig. 10).
11. The CD Ruby will now
restart, and upon restart, will
open the CD Ruby
application.
12. Perform Action:
Prerequisite.
Fig. 6
13. Proceed to step Installing
Russian Language Pack.
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Installing
Russian
Language
Pack
1. While in the Windows XP
screen under admin login,
navigate to My Computer
(Start → My Computer, Fig.
11).
2. Double click on the red icon,
drive D:\ (Fig. 12).
3. Run
SetupCDRubyLangApp.exe.
This will open the CDRuby
Language Installer window
(Fig. 13).
Fig. 11
4. Under Language available on
CD, select Russian (Fig. 13).
5. Click Install (Fig. 13).
6. Allow 5 minutes for the
language pack to install.
7. A prompt will come up
stating, "Multilingual File
Installation was completed
successfully." Click OK (Fig.
14).
Fig. 12
8. A prompt will come asking to
restart the computer. Click
Yes. (Fig. 15).
9. The CD Ruby will now
restart, and upon restart, will
open the CD Ruby
application.
10. Both supported Language
Packs are now installed to
the CD Ruby and can now
be found in the Regional and
Language Options under the
Control Panel.
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Configure
to Windows
Language
1. Exit the Ruby Application
(refer to Action: Prerequisite,
Steps 1-2).
2. Click Start and then Log Off.
3. Login under Admin (ID pass
= Syssetup).
4. While in the Windows XP
screen under admin login,
navigate to My Computer
(Start → My Computer).
5. Double click on the red icon,
drive D:\. Run
MUISETUP.EXE.
6. Select the desired language
under Default user settings,
and check box BOTH "Match
the language for nonUnicode programs with the
default user language." and
"Match the default shell UI
Fig. 16
font with the default user
Note
language." Click OK. (Fig.
Each time the language is changed, both the Windows Language and
16 example for English)
Application Language Procedures must be followed.
Note
If both check boxes are not
checked in Step 4, a
Windows file will get
corrupted and the Operating
System will need to be reinstalled. CD ROM OS
RECOVERY CDRUBY
(8938163501) should be onhand in the event this occurs.
7. A prompt will come up asking
to restart the computer. Click
Yes.
Configure
to Windows
Language
1. With the CD Ruby powered
ON, place the UI into Admin
mode (available under the
drop down menu in the
upper right corner).
2. From the menu bar, select
File, then Exit to exit the
application.
3. Navigate as follows: Start >
My Computer > C: >
CDRuby > config (directory
should read
C:\CDRuby\config) and
delete the contents of the
config folder.
4. Follow VP-45 System
Language Change
Procedure to set CD Ruby
Application to desired
language.
CELL-DYN RUBY System Service and Support Manual (Version 201958-113) • © 2006, 2014 • CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
• Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Maintenance (PMI)
Process
Preventive Maintenance
ISA Link
Refer to ISA 170-003 (current version).
Pre-Site Specification & Checklist Refer to ISA 170-003 (current version).
Installation
Refer to ISA 170-003 (current version).
ABBOTT
ADD
INSTRUMENT SERVICE ADVISORY
ISA 170-003T
192015-17422-JS
Active
Subject: CELL-DYN Ruby Pre-Installation, Installation and
Integration Checklists, and PM Procedure
Document #: ISA 170-003T
Originator: Chad Koehn/SANTACLARA/ADD/ABBOTT
Product: CELL-DYN Ruby (170)
Approved For Release: Patricia A Yanuzzi/ADD_LAKE_HUB/ADD_HUB/ADD/US
Site of Document Control: Santa Clara
Published Date: 01/09/2015
Effective Date:08/09/2013
Part / Kit #: 9130732; 9130733; 8921173202
Classification:
Part Availability: 02/29/2012
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
@ This ISA obsoletes ISA 170-003S.
I. Distribution:
Worldwide
II. Purpose:
The purpose of this ISA is to notify the Area Service and Support Organizations of the CELL-DYN
Ruby System Pre-Installation, Installation and Integration Checklists, and PM Procedure.
III. Administrative Notes: @
- CD-Ruby PM #1 is recommended to be completed once every year.
- A few key maintenance steps within the CD-Ruby PM #1 procedure will be completed once every
two (2) years as designated .
- The Ruby PM Procedure, Total Call, Parts List, and Checklist Documents are being updated to
reflect the current ISA revision in the documents headers or footers, no content changes have been
made.
- The frequency has been changed from required to recommended to align with the factory and field
maintenance strategy.
ISA 170-003S has been upgraded to ISA 170-003T as follows:
- A new version of the CELL-DYN Ruby Installation Checklist 9157085G was released by Santa Clara
and is replacing 9157085F. The PM and Total call documents are being revised for ISA revision version
only, no technical content is being changed.
IV. Parts:
- All recommended PM parts are highlighted in the Attachments section
below.
- The Total Call procedure does not specify any part requirements.
New Inventory
Number
Description
Affected
Inventory
Numbers
Inventory
Disposition
Notes
9130732
KIT, PINCH TUBING, PM, None
CDRUBY
9130733
KIT, PM, CDRUBY
V. Attached Files: @
Title
CELL-DYN Ruby
System PreInstallation
Checklist
CELL-DYN Ruby
Installation
Checklist
Attachment
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Intended Use
Filename
Filesize,
Date, Time
& Zone
CDRuby
Preinstall
Checklist
v1.2.pdf
38 KBytes, For Pre-Installation of
09/13/2011, the CELL-DYN Ruby
7:03 AM by Abbott Personnel
GMT-8
9157085G.pdf 157 KBytes, For Installation of the
CELL-DYN Ruby by
01/08/2015, Abbott Personnel
01:45 PM,
GMT-8
CELL-DYN Ruby
Integration
Checklist
9157087B.pdf 84 KBytes, For Integration of the
1/9/2015, CELL-DYN Ruby by
5:08 pm, Abbott Personnel
GMT-6
CELL-DYN Ruby
Preventative
Maintenance
Procedure
PPM-170- 215 KBytes,
003R CELLDYN Ruby 01/09/2015
05:10 PM,
PM1.pdf
GMT-6
Recommended
Preventative
Maintenance of the
CELL-DYN Ruby by
Abbott Personnel
CELL-DYN Ruby
Total Call
Procedure
PPM-170- 145 KBytes,
003R CELLDYN Ruby 01/09/2015,
Total Call.pdf
05:11 PM,
GMT-6
Recommended Total
Call on the CELL-DYN
Ruby by Abbott
Personnel
CELL-DYN
PM/Total Call
Checklist
ISA 170-003R 322 KBytes,
CD Ruby PMTC Check List 01/08/2015,
.xls
01:50 PM,
GMT-8
Checklist for
recommended PM
and Total Call
procedures
CELL-DYN Ruby
PM Parts List
CD-Ruby PM 30 KBytes,
Parts List.pdf 01/09/2015,
05:11 PM
GMT-6
List of PM parts for
Abbott field personnel
while conducting the
recommended
preventative
maintenance checklist.
Trademark:
CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
All other trademarks, brands, product names and trade names are the property of their respective
companies. All rights reserved. This document is Confidential for use by Abbott trained personnel only.
Admin Maintenance & Document # History:
END OF DOCUMENT
CELL-DYN RUBY SYSTEM
PRE-INSTALLATION CHECKLIST (SITE READINESS VERIFICATION FORM)
ACCOUNT INFORMATION
Account Name ________________________________________________________________________
Delivery Address________________________________________ Bldg. & Floor _________________
City_________________________________ State ____________ Zip Code ____________________
Primary Contact _________________________________________
Phone _______________________
Secondary Contact _______________________________________
Phone _______________________
Customer Number _______________________________________
Email______________________________________
POWER REQUIREMENTS
‰ A constant, non-fluctuating power source.
Note: Use of an AC line with dimmer switches can cause electrical current fluctuations that could affect proper functioning of the system, and
therefore is not recommended.
‰ Three outlets grounded to the same grounding wire. Separated grounding can result in voltage differences that can create internal interference in
the system. Note: if a UPS is used, fewer outlets will be needed.
(CHECK ONE) YES_____ NO ______
modifications.
If NO, have the customer notify their electrician to add additional outlets and/or make any
necessary
‰ Are multiple instruments being installed?
(CHECK ONE) YES_____ NO ______
If YES, each instrument must be on a separate circuit.
POWER SPECIFICATIONS
Module
Analyzer
Display
Printer
Voltage
Frequency
Max Current
BTU/Hr
100 – 240 VAC
47 – 63 Hz
5.0 – 2.2 amps
550 watts
100 – 240 VAC
50/60 Hz
1.5 amps
50 watts
For power specifications, refer to the printer operator’s manual or other documentation received with
your printer.
SITE SPECIFICATIONS
‰ ANALYZER space meets criteria according to specifications.
Record Space
Measurements:
Width:
_____________
Height:
_____________
Depth:
_____________
Physical Specifications:
34.0”
19.25”
30.25”
(86.4 cm) Analyzer Width
(49.9 cm) Analyzer Height
(76.8 cm) Analyzer Depth
Weight:
232.0 Ibs. (105.2 kg) Analyzer
(“ indicates inches)
(‘ indicates feet)
‰ If reagents or waste will be located below the counter, verify a 4” (10.2 cm) opening is available for routing of reagent / waste lines
© 2006, 2011 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park IL 60064, USA.
CELL-DYN Ruby Pre-Installation Checklist v 1.2
Page 1 of 2
ISA 170-003
‰
Clearance Requirements for Service Access
Unit
Analyzer
Above *
12” inches (30.5 cm)
Behind
6” inches (15.2 cm)
Left Side
16” inches (40.6 cm)
Right Side
16” inches (40.6 cm)
* FOR OPTIMUM SERVICEABILITY, A MINIMUM OF 16” (40.6 CM) ABOVE THE ANALYZER IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED
DELIVERY ROUTE
‰ Measure door width openings from entryway to lab
Record all door width measurements ______________________________________________________
(check one)
_______ Door and entryway openings are 36" or wider
_______ Door and entryway openings are less than 36" but equal to or greater than 32"
Note: Removal of instrument from shipping container may be required – Contact the Logistics Product Manager
_______ Door and entryway openings are less than 32”
Note: Removal of door and hinges by customer may be required, or some disassembly of the system by qualified
Abbott field personnel may be required
‰ Is there a loading dock
‰ Does the loading dock have a raised delivery platform
Yes_____ No_____ If No, Contact the Logistics Product Manager
Yes_____ No_____ If No, Contact the Logistics Product Manager
If any of the following are answered Yes – Contact the Logistics Product Manager
‰ Does the instrument have to be transported up or down stairs
Yes_____ # of floors/steps_____
‰ Does the instrument have to be transported in a freight elevator
Yes_____ Record elevator door width_______
‰ Will the instrument have to be lifted over any barriers
Yes_____ Height of barrier______
‰ Will the instrument need to be transported over a grass crossing
Yes_____
No_____
No_____
No_____
No_____
MISCELLANEOUS
‰ Liquid waste disposal options (select one)
______ External waste container used for liquid waste recovery
______ Floor drain at floor level and located within 10 feet of the liquid waste exit at the side of the instrument
‰ Check the type of bar code label the customer is using or will use
_____
_____
Codabar
Interleaved 2 of 5
_____
_____
Code 39
Code 128
HOST INTERFACE (LIS)
‰ LIS COMPANY NAME_________________________________________
‰ PRIMARY LIS CONTACT ______________________________________
TELEPHONE _______________________
‰ SECONDARY LIS CONTACT_____________________________________
TELEPHONE _______________________
FAX______________________
FAX______________________
‰ Has a CELL-DYN Ruby LIS Interface Specification been supplied to the LIS vendor
YES____ NO_____
Customer Signature/Title and Date _______________________________________________
Abbott Representative Signature and Date _________________________________________
Fax completed report to Logistics Product Manager
CELL-DYN and CELL-DYN Ruby are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions
© 2006, 2011 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park IL 60064, USA.
CELL-DYN Ruby Pre-Installation Checklist v 1.2
Page 2 of 2
ISA 170-003
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Print and complete this checklist during CELL-DYN Ruby System installation. Installation is complete after verifying that the device performs
as intended. Verification will be successful after completion of this installation checklist. The completed checklist and associated printouts
will be left for the customer to retain with a copy of the service order invoice.
 This Installation Checklist contains verification steps that must be entered on the install ticket to complete the installation test and
inspection summary. To do this, add Product List # NNNN-Install as a part used. Select the Install part where NNNN = 0+the 3 digit
product code of the instrument, e.g. 0170-INSTALL for C-D Ruby. Use Action Taken: N360 “Installed Instrument” with Reason for Action:
FA68 “Install VP Documentation”. Click on Get Verification Procedure. This will force the required verification onto the ticket. This part
usage can be added when the ticket is created. This will flag users to document the required VPs prior to closing the ticket.
 Verify that any Active Field Action Mandatory TSB that applies to this instrument has been installed prior to closing the
Installation ticket.
Note:
Installation does not include assay correlation or performance testing that would be included in integration and startup activities.
Note:
A translated, locally approved, copy of this checklist may be provided by the local service area/country organization.
Note:
This information was developed for use by Abbott Laboratories trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or experienced
with the operation and service of the product identified, or under the direct supervision and with co-operation from Abbott
Laboratories technical sales or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or arising from
the use of the information by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to those persons
knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, or under the direct supervision and with
cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives.
Note:
Refer to the current revision of the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator’s Manual for detailed procedures and activities.
Action
1. Verify Site
Requirements
Steps
Reference
1.
Verify service access space on all sides of the instrument:
A minimum of six (6) linear feet (1.83 meters) of counter
space is needed. For service access, allow six (6) inches
(15.2 cm) of clearance behind the instrument, 12 inches
(30.5 cm) above and 16 inches (40.6 cm) on the left and
right sides of the instrument.
2.
Verify sufficient space is available for reagents. Reagents
must be placed either at or below instrument level, never
above.
3.
Instrument waste: Allow waste to drain into a suitable
waste container such as an empty, properly labeled
cubitainer or an appropriate drain. Direct disposal to
drains must be in accordance with federal, state and local
requirements. The drain must be suitable for waste that
could present a biological or chemical hazard.
4.
Environmental considerations: Avoid placement of the
instrument in direct sunlight, in the path of cooled or
heated air, near centrifuges, X-ray equipment, Magnetic
Resonance Imaging (MRI) equipment, Cathode Ray
Tubes (CRT's), video terminals, computers, or copiers.
5.
Verify that a minimum of three (3) grounded power outlets
is available (one each for the Analyzer, Monitor, and
printer).
Page 1 of 12
Check if
Performed
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
2. Prepare for
Installation
Steps
Reference
1.
Verify that all necessary items are available: analyzer,
monitor, printer, keyboard, accessory kit, Sample Loader
Rack Kit, reagents, calibrator, controls, Enzymatic
Cleaner and HCM.
2.
Unpack the accessory kit, printer, and Monitor.
Note:
3.
Check if
Performed
Refer to Appendix B of the CELL-DYN Ruby System
Operator's Manual for a list of accessory kit items.
Inspect items for any obvious signs of damage and/or
discrepancy. Document any damaged, deficient, and/or
missing items in the space provided below. Be sure to
document corrective action taken for these items (i.e.,
replaced, ordered).
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Note:
3. Prepare Optics
Bench
Assembly
If any items are damaged or missing, contact your
local Hematology Customer Service Representative.
1.
Open left and right side flow panel door(s), remove center
nose cover and WOC flow cell (access) cover (located on
the flow panel). Block center nose cover sensor.
2.
Remove the instrument’s top, left and right side covers.
3.
Loosen all four of the laser bench tie-down screws and
remove flow cell lock-down screw, located on the flow cell
base plate.
Note: Do not re-install covers at this time.
4. Removal of
packing
material and
open probe
installation
5. Re-seat cables
on printed
circuit boards
(PCB’s)
1.
Locate and remove the bubble wrap material from the
Mixer Assembly.
2.
Open the inner panel to access the pump assemblies.
Locate and remove the bubble wrap material between the
Vacuum and Pressure Pump Assemblies.
3.
Locate the clear plastic bag (secured to Sample Loader
Platen) containing the open probe.
4.
Remove the probe retainer plate (two screws) on the
Open Tube Sampler Assembly.
5.
Remove open probe from plastic bag and secure with
retainer plate and screws.
6.
Connect the aspiration tubing (from Y-Valve) to top of
probe.
1.
Open the computer enclosure on the right side by
loosening the holding screws.
2.
Locate and verify that all cable connections on all PCBs
are properly secured and connected. If necessary, reseat cable connections.
3.
Close the left inner (access) panel and computer
enclosure and secure with corresponding screws.
Page 2 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
6. Install Shear
Valve Ceramic
Center Section
Steps
1.
Remove right side skirt cover on Sample Loader to fully
access the syringes.
2.
Remove the protective caps from the syringe Luer-Lok
fittings, then manually fill the sample injection syringe with
diluent/sheath reagent and attach each of the four
syringes to its respective fitting.
Ensure the tubing is not twisted when attaching
Luer-Lok fittings to syringes.
3.
Install each syringe into its respective driver, assuring that
the syringe is seated properly in the syringe driver
bracket.
1.
Install the pinch tubing for the six (6) N/C valves on the
front panel: V15, V23, V28, V34, V65, & V66.
Note:
9. Connect
Reagent and
Waste Lines
Be sure the notch on the ceramic center section is
facing down.
1.
Note:
8. Install Tubing
Be careful to prevent the polished surfaces from
being scratched.
Reassemble the shear valve ceramic sections to their
operational state and reinstall the shear valve knob,
making sure to tighten completely.
Note:
7. Install Syringes
Ensure that tubing moves easily from side to side and
is seated properly.
2.
Locate the peristaltic pump (left side of flow panel) and
install the pump tubing under the rollers.
1.
Connect the reagent lines to the color-coded barbs
located at the rear of analyzer. Place the lines in their
respective reagent containers.
2.
Disposal of waste:
•
If using an external container, install the waste line
assembly. Be sure to plug in and ground the sensor
cable.
•
If not using an external waste container, arrange to
run tubing directly into a sink or drain that is suitable
for the disposal of waste with possible biological and
chemical hazard. Use the waste dummy plug from
the CELL-DYN Ruby Accessory Kit to disable
“external waste full” sensor.
Warning:
10. Inspect Flow
Panel
Components
1.
Check if
Performed
Remove the shear valve knob and the plastic dummy
center section in the shear valve assembly. Locate and
unpack the center section of the shear valve, located with
the factory setup information packet. Save the plastic
dummy center section for future instrument transport.
Follow the maintenance procedures from the Operator’s
Manual for cleaning and wetting the shear valve sections.
Note:
2.
Reference
The waste is under pressure. Be sure that the
Waste Outlet Tube is securely placed in the drain
hole or waste box, the flow of waste is
unobstructed, and that all System components are
located away from any potential waste overflow.
Perform a thorough visual inspection of all flow panel
components and tubing for any signs of damage,
restrictions, kinks, crimps, loose connections, improper
seating, etc. Reseat or replace as necessary.
Page 3 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
11. Connect
Cables
12. Install Printer
Steps
1.
Install the AC power cords on the Monitor and Analyzer.
2.
Connect the VGA and touch-screen USB cable from the
Monitor to the Data Module (rear of instrument).
3.
Connect the hand held barcode reader, optical mouse,
and external keyboard to the Data Module (rear of
instrument).
4.
Connect the HSSL interface cable between the two
designated connection points on the rear panel of the
Data Module.
1.
Install the printer and power cord. Use the instructions
provided in the OEM carton to install the print head and
ink cartridges. Install one end of the printer data cable to
rear of the Data Module and the other end to printer.
Note:
13. Power ON
System
Reference
Check if
Performed
Note: Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby
System Operator's Manual,
Section 1, for assistance on
connecting cables to Data
Module. It is not necessary to
connect the audio speakers.
Note: The touch-screen USB cable
must be connected to one of the
available USB ports.
Note: Review the ISA database for
specific printer driver installation
instructions, if necessary.
If connecting to a UPS or line conditioner, use an
appropriately rated unit by taking into account power
consumption for the analyzer, printer and monitor.
This will alleviate an over current condition.
1.
Power on the following units:
2.

Monitor

Analyzer main switch (rear upper right corner)

Printer
When the instrument indicates “Initialized”, move the
cursor to the upper right corner of the screen and click on
the Operator ID drop-down arrow to change from Guest
to Admin.
3.
From the menu bar, click on File, followed by Exit.
14. Touch Screen
Calibration
1.
Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby Service Manual, Section 5
Verification Procedures. Perform VP-06 Touch Screen
Calibration Procedure.
15. Initialize,
Prime and
Administrative
Setup
1.
Click on Start, followed by All Programs, then CDRuby.
Wait until the system analyzer status indicates
“Initialized”.
2.
Move the cursor to the upper right corner of the screen
and click on the Operator ID drop-down arrow to change
from Guest to Admin.
3.
From the menu bar, select Setup, followed by
Administrative Setup and click on User Interface
Preferences. Select Set Date/Time. Set the current date
and time. Select the local time zone, then click Apply and
OK.
4.
From the toolbar, click on Reagents, followed by New
Entry (F6) to set up reagent usage log(s). Complete New
Entry (F6) for Dil/Sheath, WBC Lyse and HGB Lyse
Reagents.
5.
Click on Run View and select Prime (F12) to prime the
instrument. Observe the reagent reservoirs for proper
filling and reagent sensing.
6.
Once the instrument is in the “Ready” state, click on
Maintenance, followed by Scheduled, then Auto-Clean
and perform an Auto-Clean procedure using Enzymatic
Cleaner.
Page 4 of 12
Note: If the customer wishes to have
the time automatically update for
Daylight Savings Time, check the
box “Automatically adjust clock
for daylight savings changes”.
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
16. Voltage
Reading
Verification/
Adjustments
Steps
1.
While in the “Ready” state (Open), from the menu bar,
select Diagnostics, Digital/Voltage Readings. Click on
Check All, Stream. Verify proper pressure levels
(Pressure 1 – 3), vacuum levels (Vacuum 1 - Open 2) and
HGB Output.
2.
Print and retain a copy of the Digital/Voltage Readings
screen. Press Stop in the dialog box.
3.
Press Select Closed (F11) mode, then press Stream in
the Digital/Voltage Readings dialog box and verify
vacuum level Closed 2 falls in specification.
Note:
17. HGB
Reference and
Sample
Reading
Verifications
Refer to Table A, Voltage Reading Specifications. If
out of specification, troubleshoot as necessary.
4.
Print and retain a copy of the Digital/Voltage Readings
screen. Select Stop and close dialog box.
1.
From the menu bar, select Diagnostics, Diagnostic
Views, click on Raw Data Summary. Verify that HGB
reference and sample readings are within 2050 ±200. The
difference between the HGB sample and reference
readings must be ≤ 20 counts after a background cycle.
Note:
18. Perform
Sample
Loader Cycle
Test
Reference
Print and retain a copy of the RAW DATA SUMMARY
screen.
1.
Unpack the Sample Loader Rack Kit and install the Rack
ID labels.
2.
Place five (5) racks into the platen on the load side.
3.
Place ten (10) normal whole blood sample tubes with bar
code labels into random tube slots in the five (5) racks.
4.
Press Select Closed (F11). Press the Start Loader
(F12) key and observe the following:
5.
Table A (Voltage Reading
Specifications)
Specification
Pressure 1
13.0 ± 0.5 PSI
Pressure 2
9.0 ± 0.5 PSI
Pressure 3
4.25 ± 0.25 PSI
Vacuum 1
13.0 ± 0.5" Hg
Open 2
2.8 ± 0.2" Hg
Closed 2
3.3 ± 0.2” Hg
Retic 2
*
HGB Output
5.10V ± 0.10Vdc
* Vacuum 2 Retic mode is set to 300
(default) in the Setpoints screen.
If the readings are out of specifications, refer to VP-5
in the CELL-DYN Ruby System Service Manual
and/or troubleshoot as necessary.
2.
•
Proper rack movement
•
Proper tube sensing
•
Proper tube capture and mixing
•
Proper spinner and needle movement
•
Proper bar code read
•
Proper sample aspiration and detection
•
Verify the following messages appear:
Unload area nearly full and Unload area full.
Note:
Check if
Performed
If malfunction is observed, refer to VPs 23 through
31 in the CELL-DYN Ruby System Service Manual
and/or troubleshoot as necessary.
Press Select Open (F11) to continue analyzer operation
in open mode.
Page 5 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
19. Verify PreAmplifier (0°
and 10°)
Output
20. Cover
Installation
21. Optics Bench
Gain
Verification/
Adjustments
Steps
Reference
1.
Use a DVM, connect the positive lead to TP1 (signal), the
negative lead to TP2 (GND) on the 0° Photodiode PCB,
read on the DVM <100mV.
2.
If increased voltage reading is observed, remove WOC
Flow Cell Dust Cover and pull the WOC Flow Cell out of
the beam path, read on the DVM <50mV.
3.
If voltage reading is out of specification, refer to
Reference section for appropriate Verification
Procedure(s) to reference during troubleshooting.
4.
Slide the WOC Flow Cell back in, read on the DVM
<100mV.
5.
Continue with Steps 1 through 3 on the 10° Photodiode
PCB.
6.
Install WOC Flow Cell Dust Cover.
1.
Install WOC flow cell (access) cover (located on the flow
panel).
2.
Re-install instrument’s top, left and right side covers.
3.
Re-install right side skirt cover on Sample Loader.
4.
Remove material used to block the center nose cover
sensor.
5.
Re-install center nose cover.
6.
Close left and right side flow panel door(s).
1.
Initial Gain Setting: From the menu bar, select
Diagnostics, Setpoints
2.
Click on the Threshold Level tab and verify the default
thresholds, refer to Table B.
3.
Click Close to exit window.
4.
Prepare a dilution of 7.0 µm Polymer Microspheres to
yield a WBC count between 3.0 and 4.0 K/µL.
5.
In the Run View, select Diagnostics from the menu bar,
then select Auto-Gain Wizard, Enter SRP/FL-CAL
Demographics, click Next and follow directions on
screen.
6.
Verify/Set WOC 0°, 10°, 90°, 90° D & RBC/PLT 0° Gain,
running the dilution of 7µm SRP, minimize Auto-Gain
Wizard, print and retain a copy of the scatter plots, Mean
Channel Numbers and CV’s.
7.
Refer to Table C and verify that the WOC Mean Channel
Numbers, CVs and Gains are within limits. If not within
limits, troubleshoot as necessary. Refer to Table D and
verify that RBC/PLT 0° Peak Channel Number is within
limits.
Check if
Performed
Refer to VP-33 Optics Bench Cleaning
Procedure and VP-18 Optics Bench
Alignment Procedure
Refer to VP-20 System Gains
Verification/Adjustment
Note: Refer to factory setup information packet and
compare mean channel numbers, CVs and gains
to those in Step 7.
8.
Continue with Verify/Set RBC/PLT 10° Gain, running
3.3µm SRP. Refer to Table D and verify that RBC/PLT
10° Peak Channel Number is within limits.
9.
Verify RBC/PLT 0° Gain, running 5µm SRP. Refer to
Table D and verify Peak Channel Number is within
limits.
10. Verify RBC/PLT 10° Gain, running 7µm SRP. Refer to
Table D and verify Peak Channel Number is within
limits.
11. Proceed to Action: 22 Lin RBC 0°/10°/90° Gain
Verification/Adjustments
Page 6 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
Steps
Reference
Check if
Performed
Table B
(Threshold Level Settings)
RBC
WOC
NOC
Lo
Retic
LIN
RBC
550
360
400
100
300
Table C
(WOC Channel Specifications)
CV
Target Peak
Gain
Channel Limits
Channel
Settings
Ch 1 (0°)
≤ 5%
35 ± 1.5
≤ 2300
Ch 2 (10°)
≤ 4%
Ch 3 (90°)
≤ 13% *Sheet ± 6.0
1200-1700
≤ 2300
Ch 4 (90° D) ≤ 15% *Sheet ± 10
1200-1700
65 ± 1.5
*Values obtained from Bead – Blood Worksheet
Table D
(Target Peak Channel
Specifications)
Channel
Target
SRP
Peak
Channel
RBC 0°
180 ± 1
7.0 µm
RBC 10°
121 ± 1
3.3 µm
RBC 0°
129 ± 1
5.0 µm
RBC 10°
202 ± 5
7.0 µm
22. Lin RBC
0°/10°/90°
Gain
Verification/
Adjustments
1.
Obtain a refrigerated bottle of HCM. Allow it to warm to
room temperature.
Note:
2.
Verify/Set Lin RBC 0°/10°/90° Gain.
3.
Enter the Target Channel Numbers for Lin RBC
0°/10°/90° obtained from the HCM Optical Assay Values.
Note:
23. Perform Auto
Clean Cycle
Mix and handle the HCM the same way as any other
CELL-DYN control products.
Table E
(Gain Specifications)
Channel
Gain Setting
0°
≤ 3800
10 °
≤ 2000
90 °
≤ 3000
Refer to current HCM Optical Assay Values on the
GSS Website.
4.
Mix the HCM and run the material.
5.
Verify Peak Channel Numbers, refer to the HCM Optical
Assay Values. Also, verify that gain settings don’t exceed
the specifications listed in Table E.
6.
Print Auto-Gain Summary.
7.
Select Finish to close the Auto-Gain Wizard.
1.
From the Maintenance view, Scheduled tab click on
Auto-Clean and follow directions on screen.
Page 7 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
24. Background
Count
Verification
Steps
Reference
1.
While in the Open Mode, locate the Specimen ID or
QCID box. Select Background from the drop-down
menu.
2.
Press the touch plate to initiate a background cycle.
3.
When cycle is complete, verify background counts are
within specifications. Refer to Table F Background
Specifications.
4.
Repeat Steps 1-3, until results are within specification. If
the results continue out of specification after several
attempts, troubleshoot as necessary.
Table F (Background
Specifications)
Parameter
Specification
WOC
≤ 0.10 K/µL
NOC
≤ 0.10 K/µL
RBC
≤ 0.02 M/µL
HGB
≤ 0.10 g/dL
PLT
≤ 5.0 K/µL
RETC
≤100 counts
Note:
Be sure to re-select Background from the
Specimen ID or QCID box prior to each run.
5.
Print and retain a copy of the Background count results.
25. Open Mode
Carryover Test
(CBC+NOC )
1.
Obtain a normal whole-blood specimen and run the
specimen three (3) times in the Open Mode with Patient
in Specimen Type and CBC+NOC in Test Selection.
 (Document
"Passed" in
Verification on
Install Ticket)
Note:
Be sure to re-select Patient in Specimen Type and
CBC+NOC in Test Selection prior to each run.
2.
Select Background from the Specimen ID or QCID
drop-down menu.
3.
Run three (3) background cycles in succession.
Note:
Be sure to re-select Background from the Specimen
ID or QCID box prior to each run.
4.
Calculate % carryover as follows for WOC, NOC, RBC,
HGB, and PLT. Refer to the Carryover Formula in the
Reference section.
5.
Refer to Table G for Carryover Specifications. If the
results are out of specifications, troubleshoot as
necessary.
6.
Print and retain the results data, along with the
backgrounds that were used to calculate the carryover %.
7.
Press the Select Closed (F11) box to place the
instrument into the Closed Mode.
Page 8 of 12
Check if
Performed
Note: If customer will run Retic samples,
confirm RETC background counts.
Table G (Carryover
Specifications)
Parameter
Carryover
WOC
≤ 1.0 %
NOC
≤ 1.0 %
RBC
≤ 1.2 %
HGB
≤ 1.0 %
PLT
≤ 1.7 %
Carryover Formula:
% Carryover =
(Bkgd #1 - Bkgd #3)
) X 100
((Sample
#3 - Bkgd #3)
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
26. Closed Mode
Carryover Test
(CBC+NOC )
 (Document
"Passed" in
Verification on
Install Ticket)
Steps
Reference
1.
Set Default Patient Test Selection to CBC+NOC. To do
this go to Setup, Patient Sample Setup, Demographics
tab. Refer to Figure 1.
2.
Thoroughly mix and place the sample tube from Action 25
step 1 into a rack and place into the load side of the
Sample Loader.
3.
Press Start Loader and run the same specimen three (3)
times through the Closed Mode. Press Stop Loader
when complete.
4.
Locate Background bar code labels in accessory kit.
Attach the labels to three (3) empty tubes and place the
tubes into a rack, then place into the load side of the
Sample Loader.
5.
Press Start Loader and run the tubes through the Closed
Mode. Press Stop Loader when complete.
6.
Calculate % carryover for Closed Mode as follows for
WOC, NOC, RBC, HGB, and PLT. Refer to the
Carryover Formula in the Reference section.
7.
Refer to Table H for Carryover Specifications. If the
results are out of specifications, troubleshoot as
necessary.
8.
Print and retain the results data, along with the
backgrounds that were used to calculate the carryover %.
9.
Press the Select Open (F11) box to place the instrument
into the Open Mode.
10. Set Default Patient Test Selection back to CBC. To do
this go to Setup, Patient Sample Setup, Demographics
tab. Refer to Figure 1.
27. Open Mode
Carryover Test
(CBC)
 (Document
"Passed" in
Verification on
Install Ticket)
1.
Obtain a normal whole-blood specimen and run the
specimen three (3) times in the Open Mode with Patient
in Specimen Type and CBC in Test Selection.
Note:
2.
Be sure to re-select Patient in Specimen Type and
CBC in Test Selection prior to each run.
Check if
Performed
Figure 1.
Table H (Carryover
Specifications)
Parameter
Carryover
WOC
≤ 1.0 %
NOC
≤ 1.0 %
RBC
≤ 1.2 %
HGB
≤ 1.0 %
PLT
≤ 1.7 %
Carryover Formula:
% Carryover =
(Bkgd #1 - Bkgd #3)
) X 100
((Sample
#3 - Bkgd #3)
Carryover Formula:
% Carryover =
(Bkgd #1 - Bkgd #3)
((Sample
) X 100
#3 - Bkgd #3)
Run three (3) air cycles (blank aspirations) in succession
with Patient in Specimen Type and CBC in Test
Selection..
Note:
Be sure to re-select Patient in Specimen Type and
CBC in Test Selection prior to each run.
3.
Calculate % carryover as follows for WOC, NOC, RBC,
HGB, and PLT. Refer to the Carryover Formula in the
Reference section.
4.
Refer to Table G for Carryover Specifications. If the
results are out of specifications, troubleshoot as
necessary.
5.
Print and retain the results data, along with the
backgrounds that were used to calculate the carryover %.
6.
Press the Select Closed (F11) box to place the
instrument into the Closed Mode.
Page 9 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
28. Closed Mode
Carryover Test
(CBC)
 (Document
"Passed" in
Verification on
Install Ticket)
Steps
1.
Thoroughly mix and place the sample tube from action 27
step 1 into a rack and place into the load side of the
Sample Loader.
2.
Press Start Loader and run the same specimen three (3)
times through the Closed Mode. Press Stop Loader
when complete.
3.
 (Document
"Passed" in
Verification on
Install Ticket)
Check if
Performed
Carryover Formula:
% Carryover =
(Bkgd #1 - Bkgd #3)
((Sample
) X 100
#3 - Bkgd #3)
Place three (3) empty tubes into the load side of the
Sample Loader.
Note:
29. Open Mode
Precision
Reference
Do NOT label tubes with Background bar code labels.
4.
Press Start Loader and run the tubes through the Closed
Mode. Loader will stop after third tube with “3
Consecutive Short Samples”.
5.
Calculate % carryover for Closed Mode as follows for
WOC, NOC, RBC, HGB, and PLT. Refer to the
Carryover Formula in the Reference section.
6.
Refer to Table H for Carryover Specifications. If the
results are out of specifications, troubleshoot as
necessary.
7.
Print and retain the results data, along with the
backgrounds that were used to calculate the carryover %.
8.
Press the Select Open (F11) box to place the instrument
into the Open Mode
1.
From the menu bar, select Calibration, Quick Precision
Check…. In the Quick Precision Check dialog box, verify
Open Mode is displayed. Select New Precision Check.
2.
Obtain a normal whole-blood specimen.
3.
Thoroughly mix and run the specimen in the Open mode.
4.
Complete ten (10) consecutive cycles.
5.
Verify that results (except MPV and RDW) display
“PASS”. If results are not within specification,
troubleshoot as necessary.
6.
Print and retain a copy of the Open Mode Precision
check.
7.
Press the Select Closed (F11) box to place the
instrument into the Closed Mode.
Note: Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby
Operator’s Manual, Section 4,
for the whole blood ranges used
for imprecision testing.
Table I
(Open/Closed Precision
Specifications)
Parameter
CV%
WOC
≤ 2.4
NOC
≤ 2.8
RBC
≤ 1.8
HGB
≤ 1.4
MCV
≤ 0.8
PLT
≤ 3.8
Note: Evaluation of CV% for MPV and
RDW is not required.
30. Closed Mode
Precision
 (Document
"Passed" in
Verification on
Install Ticket)
1.
Obtain sufficient volume of normal whole blood from a
single donor within four (4) hours of draw to complete ten
(10) runs.
2.
Pool, mix, and aliquot into unused, red top (nonanticoagulant) tubes.
WOC
≤ 2.4
3.
Open the Quick Precision Check… dialog box. Verify
Closed Mode is displayed. Select New Precision Check.
NOC
≤ 2.8
4.
Thoroughly mix and run the specimen tubes in the Closed
mode.
RBC
≤ 1.8
HGB
≤ 1.4
MCV
≤ 0.8
PLT
≤ 3.8
5.
Keep running the rack in Closed mode for a total of ten
(10) runs.
6.
Verify that results (except MPV and RDW) display
“PASS”. If results are not within specification,
troubleshoot as necessary.
7.
Print and retain a copy of the Closed Mode Precision
check.
Page 10 of 12
Table J
(Open/Closed Precision
Specifications)
Parameter
CV%
Note: Evaluation of CV% for MPV and
RDW is not required.
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
Steps
Reference
31. Run Quality
Control
Material
1.
Run controls. Print and retain a copy of the Low, Normal
and High Control files.
32. Backup
Setpoints
1.
From the menu bar, select File, Backup…. The Backup
dialog box opens.
2.
Place a labeled floppy disk in the disk drive.
3.
In the Backup to floppy field, select the Start Backup
button. The dialog box will indicate the status.
4.
When backup is complete, the message: “Backup
Completed successfully” displays.
5.
Remove the floppy disk from the disk drive and store it in
a safe location.
33. LIS Checkout
Note:
If applicable, follow VP-13, LIS Communication
Verification, in the CELL-DYN RUBY System Service
Manual to verify the analyzer data transmission.
34. Operator’s
Manual
Installation
Note:
Refer to the CELL-DYN RUBY System Service
Manual and/or applicable ISA for instructions on
installing/loading the operator’s manual.
35. Local
Language
Setup
Note:
Refer to the CELL-DYN RUBY System Service
Manual and/or applicable ISA for instructions on
setting the system to the local language.
Check if
Performed
Note: Calibration will be performed and
control recovery verified during
system integration.
Be sure to install the correct language keyboard in
addition to setting up the system.
If Russian or Chinese (Simplified) is the desired
language, then CDROM (C) LANG RUS CHS
CDRUBY (8938167801) must be ordered and
installed per VP-60 Russian and Chinese (Simplified)
Language Pack Installation. DO NOT install if
Russian or Chinese (Simplified) are NOT the desired
language.
36. Assemble
Documentation
1.
Assemble the following printouts for future use. Sign and
date all documents.
•
Digital/Voltage Readings screen (closed and open)
•
Raw Data Summary screen
•
Auto Gain Summary
•
Background counts
•
Open and Closed Mode Carryover (COtest QCID)
•
Open and Closed mode precision checks
•
Low, Normal and High Control QCID files
Page 11 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Installation Checklist
Action
37. Document the
Install
Steps
1.
2.
3.
Reference
Check if
Performed
Document successful completion of the installation in
your local call management system. If TSBs have been
installed, you must close those tickets to report TSB
completion.
 Ensure that P/N “0170-Install” is documented in
Usage.
a.
Use Action Taken: N360 Installed
Instrument and Reason for Action: FA68
Install VP Documentation
b.
Click on Get Verification Procedure
c.
Enter Verification test summary, e.g. mark
“Passed” or enter results if required by
verification procedure.
Assemble factory setup information packet (envelope with
multiple pages), installation print-outs and a copy of this
installation checklist. Provide a copy of these documents
to the customer for their records.
Note:
Refer to Local Area Service and Support
Organization procedures and make additional copies
as necessary.
Instrument Serial Number_____________________________
Software Version_____________________________
FSR Print Name______________________________
FSR Signature ______________________
FSR ID# _____________
Date ___________________
Primary Operator Signature ___________________________
Date ___________________
Comments ________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
CELL-DYN Ruby Service and Support Information
Copyright ©2008, 2014
CELL-DYN is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. Abbott Park, Illinois 60064. All rights reserved.
Luer-Lok is property of its respective owner.
Page 12 of 12
9157085 G
October 2014
®
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Integration Checklist
Action
Steps
Verify
Maintenance
1.
Ensure that all required maintenance has been
performed. Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby System
Operator’s Manual, Section 9: Service and
Maintenance.
Verify Background
Counts
1.
Run a Background count in Open Mode. Verify that
results are within specifications.
Note: Refer to Table A for Background Specifications. If
the values are out of specifications, troubleshoot as
necessary.
2.
Verify Open Mode
Precision
Print and retain a copy of the Background count.
1.
Obtain a normal whole blood specimen within four (4)
hours of draw.
2.
From the menu bar, select Calibration, Quick Precision
Check…. In the Quick Precision Check dialog box, verify
Open Mode is displayed. Select New Precision Check.
3.
Thoroughly mix and run the specimen in the Open mode.
4.
Complete ten (10) consecutive cycles.
5.
Verify that results (except MPV and RDW) display
“PASS”. If results are not within specification,
troubleshoot as necessary.
6.
7.
Check if
Performed
Reference
Print and retain a copy of the Open Mode Precision
check.
Press the Select Closed (F11) box to place the
instrument into the Closed Mode.


Table A
(Background Specifications)
Parameter
WOC
Specification
< 0.10 x 103/μl
NOC
< 0.10 x 103/μl
RBC
< 0.02 x 106/μl
HGB
< 0.10 x 103/μl
PLT
< 5.00 x 103/μl
Note: Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby
Operator’s Manual, Section 4,
for the whole blood ranges used
for imprecision testing.

Table B
(Open/Closed Precision
Specifications)
Parameter
CV%
WOC
< 2.4
NOC
< 2.8
RBC
< 1.8
HGB
< 1.4
MCV
< 0.8
PLT
< 3.8
Note: Evaluation of CV% for MPV
and RDW is not required.
Verify Closed
Mode Precision
1.
Obtain sufficient volume of normal whole blood from a
single donor within four (4) hours of draw to complete ten
(10) runs.
2.
Pool, mix, and aliquot into five (5) unused, red top (nonanticoagulant) tubes.
3.
Open the Quick Precision Check… dialog box. Verify
Closed Mode is displayed. Select New Precision Check.
4.
Thoroughly mix and run the specimen tubes in the Closed
mode.
5.
Keep running the rack in Closed Mode for a total of ten
(10) runs.
6.
Verify that results (except MPV and RDW) display
“PASS”. If results are not within specification,
troubleshoot as necessary.
7.
Print and retain a copy of the Closed Mode Precision
check.
Page 1 of 5

9157087 B
DEC 2008
®
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Integration Checklist
Action
Verify
Pre-Calibration
Perform Auto
Calibration
Steps
Reference
1.
Verify that all reagents are at least 1/3 full and if a waste
container is used, that it is half empty.
2.
Verify the correct List Numbers and expiration dates.
3.
From the menu bar, select Calibration, Manual
Calibration. In the Manual Calibration dialog box, select
the Calibration Factors tab, then print and retain a copy
of the current Open and Closed Mode Calibration
Factors. Label the sheets as “current”.
4.
Select the Dilution Factors tab to display the current
Open and Closed Mode Dilution Factors.
5.
Print and retain a copy of the Open and Closed Mode
Dilution Factors and label as “Current”.
1.
Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator’s
Manual, Section 6: Calibration Procedures and
perform an Auto Calibration in the Open Mode using
calibrator.
Check if
Performed


Note: Before beginning, obtain six (6) normal whole blood
specimens within four (4) hours of draw for the
Open/Closed Mode Bias Check
2.
From the menu bar, select Calibration, Auto-Calibration
Wizard. In the Auto-Calibration Wizard dialog box,
confirm that Open is selected in the Sample Mode field.
Select Next >.
3.
Proceed through subsequent dialog boxes to verify PreCalibration steps. When the Auto Background cycle is
complete, select Next >.
4.
In the Calibrator Setup dialog box, enter the calibrator
information and assay values. Enter “6” for the number of
runs for calibration. Select Next >.
5.
Run the calibrator 6 times. Select Next >.
6.
Follow the instructions in the Auto-Calibration Wizard to
apply new factors and continue with the Open/Closed
Mode Bias Check.
Note: when new open mode factors are applied, the
factors are copied to the closed mode.
Perform
Open/Closed
Mode Bias Check
1.
Follow the instructions in the Auto-Calibration Wizard to
perform the Open/Closed Mode Bias Check.
2.
Apply new factors (if necessary) to adjust open/closed
mode bias.
Print AutoCalibration
Summary
1.
When the “Auto-Calibration Completed Successfully!”
screen appears, select Print to print the Auto-Calibration
Summary.
Page 2 of 5


9157087 B
DEC 2008
®
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Integration Checklist
Action
Customize
Software
QCID File Setup
Steps
1.
Coordinate with the customer and set up the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Reference
Check if
Performed

Customize Run View:
- Chartable Page (Parameter Sets)
- Lab Page
- Graphs Page
Units Selection
Data Log View
QC View
Customize Printed Report
- Header
- Printed Report options
Patient Sample Setup
- Limits
- Default Patient Test Selection
Orders Setup (Automatic Orders Cleanup)
QC Download ID File Setup
Moving Averages
- Moving Average View
- Moving Average Acceptance Setup
- Monitor Off/On
User Interface Preferences (QCID Daily Cleanup)
LIS setup (Auto and Manual Transmission)
Operators Setup
- Operator Account setup
- Laboratory I/Laboratory II customization
Set up QCID files for each level (Low, Normal and High)
of commercial control.

Note: Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator's
Manual for instructions on the automated upload of
assay values from a QC Disk.
2.
Run all three levels of commercial controls per the
customer's laboratory practice and verify that the results
are within assay range. If results are not within assay
ranges, troubleshoot as necessary.
Page 3 of 5
9157087 B
DEC 2008
®
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Integration Checklist
Action
Retic QCID File
Setup
Steps
The following steps should be performed if customer will be
running the Reticulocyte Assay.
1.
Set up Retic QCID files for each level (Level I and II) of
reticulocyte control.
Note: Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator's
Manual for instructions on running the Reticulocyte
Assay.
Backup Setup
2.
Run a reticulocyte background count. Verify that results
are within specification.
3.
Run both levels (I and II) of reticulocyte control per the
customer's laboratory practice and verify that the results
are within assay range. If results are not within assay
ranges, troubleshoot as necessary.
1.
Perform a backup of the Calibration Factors, QC Limits,
Patient Limits and Analyzer Setpoints.
Reference
Table C
(Background Specifications)
Parameter
RETIC
Check if
Performed

Specification
< 100 counts

Note: Refer to the CELL-DYN Ruby System Operator's
Manual, Section 6: Calibration Procedures,
Subsection: Post-Calibration Procedure.
Verify Completion
1.
While on site, run each level of control daily for a
minimum of five (5) to ten (10) runs each, and verify that
each level's mean falls within expected assay ranges. If
results are not within expected ranges, troubleshoot as
necessary.

2.
Ensure correlations have begun and results are
acceptable.

3.
Assure performance of instrument meets customer's
expectations after the installation is complete.

Note: Refer to Local Area Service and Support
Organization procedures to discuss follow-up
schedule with customer as needed.
Assemble Final
Documentation
1.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Train Additional
Operators

Assemble the following documents for future use. Sign
and date all documents.
Background counts
Open and Closed mode precision results
Current Open and Closed mode Calibration Factors
Current Open and Closed mode Dilution Factors
Auto-Calibration Summary printout
Calibrator assay sheet
All three levels of controls QCID files
Include reticulocyte documentation if run,
background count, and controls

Additional Operators Trained
Date Trained
Page 4 of 5
9157087 B
DEC 2008
®
CELL-DYN Ruby System Field Integration Checklist
Action
Document the
Installation
Steps
Reference
1.
Document successful completion of the installation in
your local call management system.
2.
Assemble all documents and ensure copies are issued to
the customer.
Check if
Performed


Note: Refer to Local Area Service and Support
Organization procedures and make additional
copies as necessary.
Sign Document
Anticipated “On-Line” Date:__________________

Additional comments or any problems requiring follow-up:
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
People informed at the completion of the install:
Field
Service____________________________________
HPS____________________________________
SR_____________________________________
Optional:
DSM____________________________________
HDM____________________________________
TS Signature: _____________________
Date: __________
Customer Signature: _________________
Date: __________
CELL-DYN Ruby Service and Support Information
©2008
CELL-DYN is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, Illinois 60064. All rights reserved.
Luer-Lok is a registered trademark of Becton Dickinson Company.
Page 5 of 5
9157087 B
DEC 2008
CELL-DYN Ruby PM #1
Sub-Process Bar 1
2
3
 ShortNote
Reminders
 General Attention Activator
SafetyWarning
Overview
Instructions & Explanations
4
5
 Picture/info on right
6
7
 CD Ruby Service Manual
 CD Ruby Operator’s Manual
 Target 4 hours
1 1.4 & 17.1 Background Specifications
1 Review Initial Condition
1.1
Wear all PPE
1.2 Review Event Log & Data Log
1.2a Interview customer about performance
& issues
1.2b Correct outstanding issues
1.3 Review QC, X-B
1.3a Correct outstanding issues
1.4 Verify: ISA/TSB status, background,
control recovery  1
1.5 Run 1 patient minimum five times in open Note: Reference Customer Control File (the customer might have set
mode precision to verify instrument
their own means) and or Assay sheet.
operation 2
1.6 Observe instrument operation during step
2 1.5 & 20.7 Precision Specifications
1.5 which will help identify potential issues
1.7 Run 5 samples into WB QCID file. Retain
for use at completion of PM
1.8 Inspect closed aspiration vent needle for
damage. Verify vent is clear of blockage.
Replace as needed
Note: Vent needle can be verified by observing
the Vent Trap during a close mode cycle and
look for fluid entering the vent trap.
1.9 Review and Print: Cal Factors, Dil
Factors, Setpoint screen
1.10 Run 7μm SRP, verify data of Optical
WBC CV's before PM is started for
reference later.
2 Decontaminate Instrument
2.1 Flush flow cell and waste lines to WC-1
through V56 using 10% bleach. Let sit
minimum 5 minutes. Replace WC and
tubing from flow cell to WC-1 if damaged
3
2.2 Run 3 tubes 10% bleach through SL to
clean closed aspiration pathway and
decontaminate the blood pathways.
3 2.1 Flushing Optical Flow Cell
CD Ruby Flushing the Optic Flow Cell and WC1.wmv
3 Fans
3.1 Inspect 4 external fans for proper operation.
Replace if non-functional & date
3.1a Replace fans every 2 years & date
3.2 Perform Page 469 - Clean Fan Filter  p
9-49
ISA 170-003T January, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 1 of 5
CELL-DYN Ruby PM #1
4 8.2 Bleaching Waste Chambers
CD ruby cleaning WC3.wmv
4 Solenoids 6
4.1 In Diagnostic, close all Solenoids, VP-09
Solenoid Operation Verifications
4.2 Press on individual solenoids check that
they are fully closed. (Solenoids no
addition movement)
4.3 Note any solenoids that do click closed for
further action later
 NOTE: Do this before replacing tubing
4.4 Inspect each solenoid for salt buildup,
corrosion or rust
4.5 Note any solenoids that show size of rust or
salt build up.
5 Front Panel
5.1 Turn instrument off
5.2 Inspect open & closed mode wash blocks
for damage. Replace as needed.
5.3 Inspect open probe for damage. Replace as
needed
6 Mixing Chambers
6.1 Inspect RBC & WBC mixing chambers for
corrosion, leaks or excessive buildup
5 9.1 Waste Line Check
6.2 Confirm metal inlet ports are not loose
7 Reservoir
7.1 Inspect for leaks
7.2 Confirm metal posts are intact & no salt
buildup
7.3 Confirm inlet tubing for diluent is not
crimped or restricted
7.4 Correct as needed
8 Waste Chambers
8.1 Inspect all WC for cracks, leaks, plumbed
correctly
8.2 If WC-3 has a lot of buildup, remove &
clean with bleach 4
NOTE: This may take 30 minutes or more
8.3 Replace WC as needed
9 Waste Line
9.1 Check date on tag for waste line to cube
5
9.2 Replace if > 6 months or close to that time
NOTE: Do not replace if system is
connected to a permanent drain
10 Syringe Drives
10.1 Inspect and Clean Syringe Drives as
needed
ISA 170-003T January, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 2 of 5
CELL-DYN Ruby PM #1
10.2 Check all syringes, brackets & luer
fittings. Replace as needed
11 Peristaltic Pump
11.1 Inspect peri-pump for damage
11.1a Replace if needed
11.2 Clean shoe and rollers
11.3 Replace peri-pump tubing with customer
stock based on customer replacement
schedule.
6 4, 12, & 13 Solenoids , Tubing & Check Valves
CD Ruby Tubing Map
Kit Bag PN
Tubing PN
Length (Inch)
Quantity
Valve #
12 Solenoids 6
12.1 Blow out each solenoid with canned air
12.2 Clean or Replace damaged solenoids
identified in section 4
1-1
1-2
1-4
1-7
1-8
2-1
2-2
2-4
2-5
2-6
9360024
93476-01
1.3
50
2-7 4-4
3-1 4-5
3-2 4-6
3-3 5-1
3-6 5-2
3-7 5-4
3-8 5-5
4-1 5-7
4-2 6-1
4-3 6-2
6-3
6-4
6-7
9-1
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-8
9360025
93476-01
1.5
15
1-5
2-3
2-8
3-4
6-8
9-2
9-7
V3
13 Tubing & Check Valves 6
13.1 Replace all Silicone tubing in all pinch
valves
13.1a Remember solenoids on VPM
13.2 Inspect all Tygon tubing for damage &
replace as needed
13.3 Replace check valve on vent assembly
14 HGB Flow Cell 7
14.1 Inspect tubing for kinks or damage
14.2 Inspect connections including metal
fittings
14.3 Replace any damaged component
15 Pressure Sensor
Kit Bag PN
Tubing PN
Length (Inch)
Quantity
Valve #
9360239
93476-01
2.0
1
5-6
9360240
93476-01
3.0
1
1-3
9360241
93476-01
3.5
1
6-5
Kit Bag PN
Tubing PN
Length (Inch)
Quantity
Valve #
9360243
93476-01
5.5
1
6-6
9360244
93177-01
3.0
1
V1
9360245
93177-01
8.0
1
V4
9360242
93476-01
4.0
2
V2
V5
7 14 HGB Flow Cell
Ruby VP 39 Flushing HGB Flow Cell.wmv
15.1 Replace pressure sensor.
15.2 Turn instrument on and prime.
16 Vacuum /Pressure Subassembly
16.1 Inspect Vacuum & Pressure accumulators
for cracks, excessive salt buildup
16.1a Replace pressure accumulator 1
every two (2) years.
16.2 If needed, vacuum accumulators can be
checked by confirming the resistance
between the 2 leads is more then 20
MegaOhms.
16.3 Perform VP-44 Vacuum Accumulator 1
and 2 Rinsing Procedure if needed 
16.4 Perform VP-16 Vacuum & Pressure Level
Verification/Adjustment 
17 Laser Bench
17.1 Confirm background within spec 1
17.2 Run at least 1 sample to confirm proper
scatter before performing optical
checks/alignment
ISA 170-003T January, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 3 of 5
CELL-DYN Ruby PM #1
17.3 Verify Optical WBC CVs referencing
VP-18 Optics Bench Alignment Procedure 8 17.3 WBC Mean Channel & CV Specifications
beginning at step “Perform Verification”
using diluted 7.0 SRP  8
17.4 If CVs are out of spec:
17.4a Perform complete VP-18 Optics
Bench Alignment Procedure 
NOTE: : If CVs are within specs& no Diff
issue reported by customer, there is no need to
clean or align bench
18 Autoloader
18.1 Perform Page 437 – Clean Loader
Components  p 9-16
NOTE: Do not use bleach or alcohol on
grippers
18.2 If excessive diluent on platen, verify
operation of detent pins
18.3 Clean detent pins 9
18.4 Replace tube grippers every 24 months
18.5 Inspect cable and Tube Sensor board for
corrosion replace if needed 10
18.5a Clean or adjust Tube Sensor as needed
VP-58 Tube Sensor Adjustment 
18.6 Clean Forward Indexer & Pawls. Confirm
spring action 11
18.7 Clean Sweep Arm Bushings. Do not oil
or lube 12
18.8 Inspect Spring on Sweep Arms. Replace
every 2 years or as needed F1.07
Autoloader Sweep Arm Spring
Replacement Procedure 
18.9 Clean Bar Code Reader. Adjust position
as needed VP-11 Bar Code Reader
Verification/Alignment 
18.10 Perform the following VPs: 
18.10a VP-23 Tower Unit Stop Solenoid
Verification
18.10b VP-24 Bar Code Spin Assembly
Verification
Offset Specifications
Pull the flow cell out of the beam path. Adjust the front mirror Y
screw for minimum reading on the DMM. The end result
should be a reading of < 50 mV for the OFFSETS for both the
0 and 10 degree photodiodes. With Diluent in the flow cell the
reading should be <100 mV.
9 18.3 Clean Detent Pins
10 18.5 Inspect Tube Sensor
18.10c VP-25 Tube Height Sensors (S1/S2)
Verification
18.10d VP-26 Mixer Up/Down Verification
18.10e VP-27 Mixer Head Rotation
Verification
18.10f VP-28 Mixer Bladders Verification
18.10g VP-29 Rack Advance & Tube
Sensors Verification
18.10h VP-30 Cross Transfer Arms & Rack
Sensors Verification
18.10i VP-31 Mixer Bladders Pressure
ISA 170-003T January, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 4 of 5
CELL-DYN Ruby PM #1
Verification/Adjustment
11 18.6 Clean Forward Indexer & Pawls
19 Data Station
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
Clean inside data station
Clean keyboard
Clean external barcode reader
Clean monitor
Clean mouse
20 Final Verification Procedures
20.1 After every Verification procedure print
out results and save when possible.
20.2 Perform VP-15 Vacuum & Pressure
Retention Verification
12 18.7 Clean Sweep Arm Bushing
20.3 Perform VP-05 HGB Current
Verification/Adjustment 
20.4 Set optical Gains and linear Gains
Referencing VP-20, System Gains
Verification /Adjustment..
20.5 Run 5 samples in CBC NOC mode
(saved from beginning of PM) on sample
loader. Compare to results pre & post PM
20.6 Verify Carryover by running 3
backgrounds following step 20.5. 13
20.7 Verify Open and Closed precision &
confirm within specs 2
20.8 Verify Mode to Mode Bias check.
13 20.6 Carryover Calculation & Specifications
20.9 Run a minimum of one batch in Moving
Average, if customer is monitor X-B
20.10 Review X-B
20.11 \  Verify all controls are within specs
20.12 Perform Calibration, Section 6 as needed

20.13 Verify LIS operation VP-13 LIS
Communication Verification 
20.14 Perform Backup VP-48 Backup
Procedure 
20.15 Close PM Activity on Call Management
System.
Talsico® Process Picture Maps™ & all associated intellectual property are owned by Talsico International, ABN 20 419 167 619, & subject to licensing Agreement
End of document
ISA 170-003T January, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 5 of 5
CELL-DYN Ruby Total Call
Sub-Process Bar 1
2
 ShortNote
Reminders
4
5
 Picture/info on right
 General Attention Activator
SafetyWarning
Overview
3
6
7
 CD Ruby Service Manual
 CD Ruby Operator’s Manual
 Target 45 minutes
Instructions & Explanations
1 Review Initial Condition
1.1
Wear all PPE
1.2 IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS
WERE DONE DURING THE
INSTRUMENT SERVICING YOU DO
NOT HAVE TO REPEAT.
1.3 Review Event Log & Data Log
1.4 Verify: ISA/TSB status, background,
control recovery  1
1.5 Print: Cal Factors, Dil Factors, Setpoint
screen if you have made changes during the
service call.
1 1.4 & 15.6 Background Specifications
2 Fans
2.1 Inspect 4 external fans for proper operation.
Replace if non-functional & date
2.2 Verify Fan Filters are clean referencing Page
469 - Clean Fan Filter  p 9-49
Note: Reference Customer Control File (the customer might have set
their own means) and or Assay sheet
3 Front Panel
3.1 Inspect open & closed mode wash blocks for
damage. Replace as needed
3.2 Inspect open probe for damage. Replace as
needed
3.3 Inspect closed aspiration vent needle for
damage. Verify vent is clear of blockage.
Replace as needed
Note: Vent needle can be verified by observing
the Vent Trap during a close mode cycle and look
for fluid entering the vent trap.
2 7.1 Waste Line Check
4 Mixing Chambers
4.1 Inspect RBC & WBC mixing chambers for
corrosion, leaks or excessive buildup
4.2 Confirm metal inlet ports are not loose
4.3 Inspect for leaks
4.4 Confirm metal posts are intact & no salt
buildup
4.5 Correct as needed
5 Reservoir
5.1 Inspect for leaks
5.2 Confirm metal posts are intact & no salt
buildup
ISA 170-003T Januray, 2015
3 10 & 11 Solenoids , Tubing & Check Valves
CD Ruby Tubing Map
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 1 of 3
CELL-DYN Ruby Total Call
5.3 Correct as needed
4 12 HGB Flow Cell
Ruby VP 39 Flushing HGB Flow Cell.wmv
6 Waste Chambers
6.1 Inspect all WC for cracks, leaks, plumbed
correctly
6.2 Replace WC as needed
7 Waste Line
7.1 Check date on tag for waste line to cube 2
7.2 Replace if > 6 months or close to that time
NOTE: Do not replace if system is connected
to a permanent drain
8 Syringe Drives
8.1 Inspect each syringe drive if they appear to
be damaged, dirty referencing H1.01
Syringe Driver Assembly 
8.2 Check all syringes, brackets & luer fittings.
Replace as needed
5 15.3 WBC Mean Channel & CV Specifications
9 Peristaltic Pump
9.1 Inspect peri-pump tubing
9.2 Replace with customer stock as needed based
customer schedule
10 Solenoids 3
10.1 Visually inspect each solenoid for salt
buildup, corrosion or rust
10.2 Replace damaged solenoids
11 Tubing 3
11.1 Inspect all Silicone tubing in all pinch
valves
11.1a Remember solenoids on VPM
11.2 Replace as needed
11.3 Inspect all Tygon tubing for damage &
replace as needed
6 14.1 Inspect Tube Sensor
12 HGB Flow Cell 4
12.1 Inspect tubing for kinks or damage
12.2 Inspect connections including metal fitting
12.3 Replace any damaged component
13 Other
13.1 Inspect Vacuum & Pressure accumulators
for cracks, excessive salt build up
14 Autoloader
14.1 Inspect tube sensor & for corrosion in
connector 6
14.1a clean or adjust as needed VP-58 Tube
Sensor Adjustment 
ISA 170-003T Januray, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 2 of 3
CELL-DYN Ruby Total Call
14.2 Clean Forward Indexer and Pawls as
7 14.2 Clean Forward Indexer & Pawls
needed. Confirm spring action 7
14.3 Clean detent pins as needed 8
14.4 Clean Sweep Arm Bushings as needed. Do
not oil or lube 9
14.5 Clean Bar Code Reader. Adjust position as
needed VP-11 Bar Code Reader
Verification/Alignment 
14.6 Clean racks, platen, & rack barcode labels
as needed Page 437 – Clean Loader
Components  p 9-16
15 Final Verification Procedures
8 14.3 Clean Detent Pins
15.1 Perform VP-15 Vacuum & Pressure
Retention Verification
15.2 Perform VP-16 Vacuum & Pressure Level
Verification/Adjustment 
15.3 Verify optical CV within specification
using 7 um beads. If not in specifications, do
alignment per VP-18 Optics Bench
Alignment Procedure 5
9 14.4 Clean Sweep Arm Bushing
15.4 Verify HGB voltage is 5.1 VP-05 HGB
Current Verification/Adjustment 
15.5 Verify each SL rack movement
15.5a run a minimum of 2 racks with 5
sample tubes spread out
15.6 Run background & verify within specs 1
15.7 Verify Open and Closed precision &
confirm within specs Calibration, Section 6
page 6-18 10
15.8 Review X-B
15.9 Verify all controls within specs 
15.10 Verify no aspiration errors when running 10 15.7 Precision Specifications
the High control in Step 15.7.
15.11 Perform Calibration, Section 6 as needed

15.12 Verify LIS operation VP-13 LIS
Communication Verification 
15.13 Perform Backup if and Calibration or
Gains were changed VP-48 Backup
Procedure 
Talsico® Process Picture Maps™ & all associated intellectual property are owned by Talsico International, ABN 20 419 167 619, & subject to licensing Agreement
End of document
ISA 170-003T Januray, 2015
©2012, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064
For Internal Use Only
CELL-DYN Ruby is a trademark of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
Page 3 of 3
Cell Dyn Ruby PM Checklist
Text
PM
Initial Condition
Front Panel
Laser Bench
Auto Loader
Data Station
Verification
Total Call
Initial Condition
Front Panel
Auto Loader
Verification
ISA 170-003T
Percent
Complete
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Percent
Complete
0%
0%
0%
0%
Page 1 of 1
Cell Dyn Ruby
PM Check List
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Date :
Customer Name:
City:
Phone Number:
1 CHECK INITIAL CONDITION
0
13
12/10/2015
0%
REVIEW AND VERIFY
FALSE Review SYS LOG and DATA LOG. Interview customer about performance, issues, etc
FALSE
Review QC, X-B, CAL History, Dilution factors
FALSE
Verify ISA and TSB Status
FALSE
Verify background counts are within range
FALSE
Verify control counts are with in range
FALSE
Run open mode quick precision
FALSE
Observe instrument operation during precision to help identify potential issues
FALSE
Run 5 samples in control file and retain samples for use at the completion of PM
FALSE
Inspect closed aspiration vent needle for damage or blockage, replace as needed
FALSE
Run 7μm SRP, verify data of Optical WBC CV's before PM
0
10
FALSE
Print the following data screens:
CAL
Dil
90
90D
Set Point
DECONTAMINATE INSTRUMENT
FALSE Flush flow cell and waste lines to Waste Chamber 1 through V56 using 10% bleach
FALSE
FALSE
Run 3 tubes of 10% Bleach on Sample loader
Do a Prepare for Shipping with 10% bleach
FANS
FALSE Inspect all four external fans for proper operation, replace if non-functional or every 2 years, and date
FALSE
Clean all fan filters
2 FRONT PANEL
0
24
0%
FLOW PANEL
FALSE Inspect both Open and Closed Wash Blocks and Sample Probes, Inspect Vent to Close Mode Probe
MIXING CHAMBERS
FALSE Inspect RBC and WBC Mixing Chambers for corrosion, leaks, or excessive buildup
FALSE
Confirm metal inlet ports are not loose
RESERVOIR
FALSE Inspect reservoirs for leaks
FALSE
Confirm metal posts are intact and there is no salt buildup
FALSE
Confirm inlet tubing for diluent is not crimped or restricetd, correct as needed
WASTE CHAMBERS
FALSE Inspect all waste chambers for cracks or leaks
FALSE
Check date on Waste line to cube, replace if greater then six months or nearing that time
FALSE
If WC-3 has a lot of buildup, remove and clean with bleach (this may take 30 minutes or more)
SYRINGE DRIVES
FALSE Inspect and clean each of the Syringe Drives
FALSE
Check all syringes, brackets and luer fittings, replace as needed
FALSE
HGB Syringe 2.5 ml
FALSE
Diluent Syringe 10.0 ml
FALSE
WBC Lyse Syringe 2.5ml
FALSE
Injection Syringe
ISA 170-003T
Page2 of 10
Cell Dyn Ruby
PM Check List
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Date :
Customer Name:
City:
Phone Number:
12/10/2015
PERISTALTIC PUMP
FALSE Inspect the peripump for damage, replace if needed
FALSE
Clean shoes and rollers
FALSE
Replace Peri-Pump tubing with customer stockbased on customer replacement schedule
SOLENOIDS AND TUBING
FALSE Inspect each of the Solenoids for salt buildup, corrosion, or rust. Replace as needed
FALSE
Blow out each solenoid with canned air
FALSE
Replace all Silicone tubing in all valves, including solenoids on VPM
FALSE
Inspect all Tygon Tubing for damage, replace as needed
FALSE
Replace all check valves on Flow Panel
HGB FLOW CELL
Clean HGB Flow Cell with 10% Bleach
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Inspect tubing for kinks or damage
Inspect all fittings, Y tubing connections including the metal fittings, and reagent inlet lines
PRESSURE SENSOR
FALSE Replace Pressure Sensor
SHEAR VALVE
Lube the Shear Valve driver
FALSE
FALSE
Clean Shear Valve Ceramics
FALSE
Replace all Check valves in the Pneumatics area
OTHER
FALSE Inspect Vacuum and Pressure Accumulators for cracks or excessive salt build up
Replace Pressure Accumulator 1 every two (2) years and date.
3 LASER BENCH
FALSE
0
2
0%
Confirm the Initialization and the prime of the system
LASER BENCH
FALSE
Run at least 1 sample to confirme proper scatter before performing optical checks/alignment
FALSE
Confirm Optical CV's, do not clean or align bench if CVs are within specs and no issues reported by customer
4 AUTOLOADER
0
10
0%
GENERAL
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Clean tube Sensor
Inspect cable to Tube Sensor board for corrosion, replace if needed
Clean tube grippers with DI water, do not use bleach or alcohol
FALSE
Replace Tube Grippers every two years
INDEXERS
FALSE
Clean Forward Indexer and pawls, including spring action
DETENT PINS
FALSE
Clean detent pins
FALSE
If excessive diluent on platen, verify operation of detent pins
SWEEP ARMS
FALSE
Clean sweep arm bushings. Do not oil or lube
FALSE
Inspect Spring on Sweep arms. Replace every 2 years or as needed
ISA 170-003T
Page3 of 10
Cell Dyn Ruby
PM Check List
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Date :
Customer Name:
City:
Phone Number:
12/10/2015
B/C READER
FALSE
Clean barcode reader. Adjust postion as needed
FALSE
Clean racks, platen, and rack barcode labels
5 DATA STATION
0
5
0%
0
16
0%
DATA STATION
FALSE
Clean inside
FALSE
Clean keyboard
FALSE
Clean External barcode reader
FALSE
Clean monitor
FALSE
Clean mouse
6 VERIFICATION
PNEUMATICS
FALSE
Verify Vac/Pressure Retention
FALSE
Verify and set vacuum and pressure level
FALSE
Verify System Voltages
FALSE
Confirm HGB Voltage
HGB V
LASER BENCH
Verify optical CV's within specification
0
FALSE
FALSE
10
90
90D
Confirm Gains for WBC, RBC, PLT and Linear gains
SAMPLE LOADER
Verify each rack movement correctly, by running a minimum of 2 racks with 10 bloods spread out
FALSE
FALSE
Verify Sample Aspiration Sensors
DATA
Run 5 same samples from before in CBC NOC mode and compare results pre & post PM
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Verify background counts
Verify Precision in Open and Closed mode and confirm within specs
Open Mode:
WBC
NOC
RBC
HGB
MCV
PLT
Closed Mode:
WBC
NOC
RBC
HGB
MCV
PLT
FALSE
Verify Carryover
FALSE
Verify Moded to Mode Bias check
FALSE
Verify X-B data (run a minimum of one batch in Moving Average if customer is monitoring X-B data)
ISA 170-003T
Page4 of 10
Cell Dyn Ruby
PM Check List
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Date :
Customer Name:
City:
Phone Number:
CONTROL RUN
FALSE Verify all Controls are within specification.
CALIBRATION RUN
Calibrate if necessary.
FALSE
DATA STATION
Back Up the System Configuration Files.
FALSE
FALSE
Verify LIS operation
CLOSE THE ACTIVITY
Close PM Activity on Call Management System
FALSE
PM Completed on: Thursday, December 10, 2015
Field Engineer Signature:
Customer Signature:
ISA 170-003T
Page5 of 10
12/10/2015
Cell Dyn Ruby
PM Check List
ISA 170-003T
Page6 of 10
Press to
Copy Text
Press to
Reset
7 Ruby PM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12 Verification
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
19 Total Characters
First prepare the ticket in CMSNext, Display "Ticket details and Troubleshooting Text" screen, Click on Grey Button titled "Press to Copy Text", Go to CMSNext and
Paste into the report!! ( CTRL + V )
Cell Dyn Ruby
Total Call
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Date :
Customer Name:
City:
Phone Number:
1 CHECK INITIAL CONDITION
0
9
12/10/2015
0%
REVIEW AND VERIFY
FALSE Review SYS LOG and DATA LOG. Interview customer
FALSE
Review QC, X-B, CAL History, Dilution factors. Correct any issues found
FALSE
Verify ISA and TSB Status
FALSE
Verify background counts are within range
FALSE
Verify control counts are with in range
FALSE
Print the following data screens:
CAL
Dil
Set Point
DECONTAMINATE INSTRUMENT
Flush flow cell and waste lines to Waste Chamber
FALSE
FALSE
Run 3 tubes of 10% Bleach on Sample loader
FANS
Inspect all four external fans for proper operation. Replace if nojnfunctional and date
FALSE
FALSE
Verify fan filters are clean
2 FRONT PANEL
0
17
0%
FLOW PANEL
FALSE Inspect both Open and Closed Wash Blocks, and Sample Probes and Closed Mode vent
MIXING CHAMBERS
Inspect RBC and WBC Mixing Chambers for corrosion, leaks, or excessive buildup
FALSE
FALSE
Confirm metal inlet ports are not loose and do not have salt buildup. Correct as needed.
RESERVOIR
Inspect Reagent reservoirs for leaks
FALSE
FALSE
Confirm metal inlet ports are not loose and do not have salt buildup. Correct as needed.
WASTE CHAMBERS
Inspect waste chambers for cracks or cracks. Replace if needed.
FALSE
FALSE
Inspect Waste line to cube. Replace if older than 6 months or close to that time.
SYRINGE DRIVES
FALSE Inspect each of the Syringe Drives
FALSE
Check all syringes, brackets and luer fittings. Replace as needed.
FALSE
HGB Syringe 2.5 ml
FALSE
Diluent Syringe 10.0 ml
FALSE
WBC Lyse Syringe 2.5ml
Injection Syringe
FALSE
FALSE
Inspect Peri-Pump tubing. Replace with customer stock as needed based on customer schedule
SOLENOIDS AND TUBING
Inspect all valves for salt build up, corrosion, or rust. Replace as needed.
FALSE
FALSE
Inspect all Silicone tubing, replace as needed. Include valves on VPM
FALSE
Inspect all Tygon Tubing, replace as needed
HGB FLOW CELL
Inspect all fittings, Y tubing connections, metal fittings. Replace if damaged
FALSE
OTHER
Inspect Vacuum and Pressure Accumulators for cracks or excessive salt buil up. Replace if needed
FALSE
ISA 170-003T
8 of 10
Cell Dyn Ruby
Total Call
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Date :
Customer Name:
City:
Phone Number:
FALSE
3 AUTOLOADER
0
9
12/10/2015
0%
GENERAL
FALSE
Clean tube Sensor
FALSE
Inspect Tube Sensor board
FALSE
Clean tube grippers
INDEXERS
FALSE
Clean Forward Indexer and pawls and pawls as needed. Confirm spring action
DETENT PINS
FALSE
Clean detent pins as needed
SWEEP ARMS
FALSE
Clean sweep arm bushings as needed. Do not oil or lube
FALSE
Inspect Spring on Sweep arms
B/C READER
FALSE
Clean barcode reader. Adjust position as needed
FALSE
Clean racks, platen, and rack barcode labels
4 VERIFICATION
0
15
0%
PNEUMATICS
FALSE
Verify Vac/Pressure Retention
FALSE
Verify vacuum and pressure level
FALSE
Verify System Voltages
FALSE
Verify HGB Voltage
HGB V
LASER BENCH
FALSE Verify optical CV Gains are within specifications using 7 um beads
0
10
90
FALSE
Verify Gains for WBC, RBC, PLT and Linear gains
SAMPLE LOADER
FALSE Verify each rack movement
FALSE
Verify Sample Aspiration Sensors
DATA
FALSE Verify background counts
Analyzer S/N :
FSR ID :
Customer Name:
City:
ISA 170-003T
9 of 10
90D
Cell Dyn Ruby
Total Call
Date :
Phone Number:
FALSE
Verify Precision in Open and Closed mode and confirm within specs
Open Mode:
WBC
FALSE
NOC
RBC
HGB
MCV
PLT
Closed Mode:
WBC
NOC
RBC
HGB
MCV
PLT
Review X-B data
CONTROL RUN
Verify Controls recovery
FALSE
CALIBRATION RUN
FALSE Calibrate as necessary
DATA STATION
Back Up the System Configuration Files
FALSE
FALSE
Verify LIS operation
Completed on: Thursday, December 10, 2015
Field Engineer Signature:
Customer Signature:
ISA 170-003T
10 of 10
12/10/2015
ISA 170-003T CELL-DYN Ruby Pre-Installation, Installation and Integration Checklists, and PM
Procedure
Recommended Preventive Maintenance Parts
List
Note: Not all parts will be needed, or used. Some individual parts are included in the Kits at
bottom of Table. Part numbers subject to change without immediate PM document revisions.
Part Number
06H92-01
08H38-01
8510615001
91485-01
8310815101
03H86-01
09H06-01
04H34-01
04H40-01
28561-01
28560-01
02H82-02
9130542
9130543
8310651701
8310654301
8310653101
92161-02
09H38-02
08H43-01
08H44-01
09H32-01
8932078301
8921016301
8921122101
8921174902
9130732
9130733
8921173202
Description
CD32 IN-LINE MILLPORE FLTRS-6
FILTER AIR INLINE
SW PRESSURE 20 PSI MINI ADJA
PERIST PMP TBG-MD
FTG TBG VLV CHECK .125"ID KYNA
DB CHECK VLV .125 "
CDRUBY ASPIRATION NEEDLE
SRNG 10 ML KIT 35
SRNG 2.5ML KIT 30/35
SRNG 2.5ML
SRNG 500UL
CD4K DIL/SHTH SYR
TBG SILI (S1) .032"ID .156"OD
TBG SILI (S2) .062"ID .187"OD
TBG VINYL 1/16"ID 1/8"OD CLR
TBG TYG 1/32"ID 3/32"OD FLEXIB
TBG TYG 1/8"ID 3/16"OD
WASTE OUTLET TUBE
RGT LN W/CAP, CDRUBY
TBG DIL/STH RGT32
TBG HB/NOC RGT32
OPEN MODE PROBE, CDRUBY
WASH BLOCK, OTS, CD3200
ASSY,SOLV,N/C W/.125"WSHR
ASSY, SOLV, 3.9KG WHT (NO WSHR)
ASSY, REAGENT RESERVOIR 125MM
KIT, PINCH TUBING, PM, CDRUBY
Recommended Two (2) Year Parts Replacement
KIT, PM, CDRUBY
WASTE BOTTLE, 1K - PRESSURE ACCUM, 3K, 5"
TALL
This document is intended for internal use only.
Page 1 of 1
ACTIVE PRINTER COMPATIBILITY & VALIDATED (updated Feb. 2015). (Default printer in green, Optional printer in yellow)
Item
Printer model / Type
1
OKI Microline 320
B&W 110V /
Dot matrix
Abbott List
Number for
Abbott List
220 V (only if
Number for
printer is
110 V printer
in the US
orderable from
US)
Replacement
Cartridge
CD1800
CD3700
CD3200
Yes
Yes
Yes
20821-01
20822-01
13401-01
2
HP OfficeJet 8100
100V-240V
(Color Ink jet)
08H62-05
08H62-05
See Note 1, 2
08H62-07(YLW)
08H62-06(BLK)
08H62-09(CYN)
08H62-08(MGTA)
3
OKI B4600 B&W 110V
/ Laser
08H60-04
08H60-05
08H61-02
4
HP CP2025n Color
120V/Laser
(Superceded by HP
M451dn)
08H07-08
Buy 220 V
printer locally
See Note 2
09H00-30(BLK)
09H00-34(MA)
09H00-32(CYN)
09H00-36(YEL)
5
HP M451dn Color
120V/Laser
08H07-09
Buy 220 V
printer locally
See Note 2
08H07-10(BLK)
08H07-12(MA)
08H07-11(CYN)
08H07-13(YEL)
6
Konica 1650EN Color
120V/Laser
09H80-01
Buy 220 V
printer locally
See Note 2
09H80-04(MA)
09H80-05(YEL)
09H80-06(CYN)
09H80-07(BLK)
7
HP H470 Color Ink jet
120V-240V
09H76-01
09H76-01
See Note 1, 2
09H77-01(BLK)
09H77-02(CLR)
8
Epson LX 300+II
(120V)
08H89-20
Buy 220 V
printer locally
08H89-28
Yes
CDSapphire
CD
Ruby
CD
Emerald
18
Est.Cost
( $ US)
Ink Life
(pages)
Paper
hold
(sheet)
Printer
Language/OS
325.00
Info not avail.
1 Bin
Epson FX, DOS
Yes
Yes
see
see
Note
Note 3
3
Yes
See Note 4
150.00
2300 (Blk)
1500 (Clr)
250
PCL3 /
Windows XP
Yes
Yes
Yes
240.00
2500 (Blk)
250
PCL5 / Windows
95
Yes
505.00
2,500(Blk)
2,000(Clr)
250
PCL6, Postcript
Yes
499.00
4,000(Blk)
2,600(Clr)
250
PCL6, Postcript
320.00
2,500(Blk)
2,500(Clr)
250
PCL6, Postcript
Yes
315.00
480 (Blk)
320 (Clr)
150
PCL3
Yes
200.00
3 millions
characters
Yes
Note:
1/ Item 2, 7: Recommend to use local cartridges with local printer (For ex. Europe cartridges are not compatible with US printers and vice versa)
2/ Recommend to buy printer locally. Download instruction from ISA to install printer.
3/ Item 2: Requires adapter 08H77-05 for CD3200 and CD3700 (not compatible with adapter 08H77-04 or older).
4/ Item 2: Printer HP Officejet 8100 replaced HP 6940 for CD3200, CD3700 and Ruby only, not used for CD Emerald.
Epson ESC P/2